Answers for energy.
7SR242 Duobias
Transformer Protection Relay
Reyrolle
Protection
Devices
2
3
Contents
Technical Manual Chapters
1. Description of Operation
2. Settings, Configuration & Instruments
3. Performance Specification
4. Data Communications
5. Installation
6. Commissioning and Maintenance
7. Applications Guide
4
5
Software Revision History
2017/08
2662H85001 R8c-7d
Phase currents added to 61850. 5A instruments corrected.
2015/11 2662H85001 R8b-7c EN100+ compatibility.
Additional ‘46IT’ and ‘51element time multiplier
steps incorporated.
2013/01
2662H85001 R7c-7b
Revised file handling during shutdown
2012/08 2662H85001 R7b-7a
(Requires hardware
CC)
Addition of optional IEC 61850 communication protocol and Ethernet.
Compatible with H/W CC
2010/02 2662H80001 R4c-3 Revisions to: VT ratio settings, 87BD 1st bias slope limit setting incre-
ments, CB fail function, LED CONFIG menu, DATA STORAGE menu.
Added: Open circuit detection (46BC), CONTROL MODE menu, Close
circuit supervision (74CCS), Measured earth fault undercurrent (37G),
Pulsed output co ntac ts.
2008/07
2662H80001R3d-2c.
Demand metering. Optional DNP3.0 data comms.
2008/05
2662H80001R3-2b
First Release.
Hardware Revision History
2015/11
DD
EN100+ Ethernet comms card replaces EN100.
2012/08
CC
Hardware revisions to allow integration of IEC 61850 functionality.
2008/05
BB
First Release
6
www. siemens.com/energy
7SR242 Duobias Contents
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited
Contents
Technical Manual Chapters
1. Description of Operation
2. Settings, Configuration & Instruments
3. Performance Specification
4. Data Communications
5. Installation
6. Commissioning and Maintenance
7. Applications Guide
7SR242 Duobias Contents
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited
7SR242 Duobias Contents
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited
Software Revision History
2017/08
2662H85001 R8C-7d
Phase currents added to 61850. 5A instruments corrected.
2015/11
2662H85001 R8b-7c
Additiona l ‘46IT ’ and ‘51’ elem ent time mul tip lier ste ps incor p orated.
2013/01
2662H85001 R7c-7b
Revised file handling during shutdown
2012/08 2662H85001 R7b-7a
(Requires hardware
CC)
Addition of optional IEC 61850 communication protocol and Ethernet.
Compatible with H/W CC
2010/02 2662H80001 R4c-3 Revisions to: VT ratio settings,
87BD 1st bias slope limit setting
increments, CB fail function, LED CONFIG menu, DATA STORAGE
menu.
Added: Open circuit detection (46BC), CONTROL MODE menu, Close
circuit supervision (74CCS), Measured earth fault undercurrent (37G),
Pulsed output co ntac ts.
2008/07
2662H80001R3d-2c.
Demand metering. Optional DNP3.0 data comms.
2008/05
2662H80001R3-2b
First Release.
Hardware Revision History
2015/11
DD
EN100+ Ethernet comms card replaces EN100.
2012/08
CC
Hardware revisions to allow integration of IEC 61850 functionality.
2008/05
BB
First Release
7SR242 Duobias Contents
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document, and in any model or article produced from it
(and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices
Limited. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form, in any data retrieval
system, without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited, nor shall any model or article be
reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent.
While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct, no liability shall be accepted
for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission, whether such error or omission is the result of
negligence or any other cause. Any and all such liability is disclaimed.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited
7SR242 Duobias
Multi-Function 2-Winding Transformer Protection Relay
Description of Operation
Document Release History
This document is is sue 2017/08. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is:
2017/08 Software revision 2662H85001 R8c-7d
2015/11 7SR2424 added. RS485 comms terminal labelling revised
Figure 1-4). Text revisions to LED indications (2.5), inrush detector (5.3), waveform records (6.4.3)
and fault data records (6.4.4).
2014/04 Section 6.4.3 - Waveform Records revised.
2013/01 Software revision 2662H85001 R7c-7b
2012/08 Addition of optional IEC 61850 communication protocol.
2010/06 Additional Comms modules option of (RS485 + IRIG-B) and (RS232 + IRIG-B) and typographical
revisions
2010/02 Document reformat due to rebrand
2010/02 Software revision 2662H80001 R4c-3
2008/07 Software revision 2662H80001R3d-2c.
2008/05 First issue
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 2 of 61
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 3 of 61
Contents
Sectio n 1: Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 7
Current Transformer Circuits ............................................................................................................ 7
External Resistors ............................................................................................................................. 7
Fibre Optic Communication .............................................................................................................. 7
Front Cover ....................................................................................................................................... 7
Section 2: Hardware Descrip ti on ........................................................................................................ 15
2.1 General ................................................................................................................................... 15
2.2 Case ........................................................................................................................................ 15
2.3 Front Cover ............................................................................................................................. 16
2.4 Po wer Su p p l y Unit (P SU ) ........................................................................................................ 16
2.5 Operator Interface/ Fascia ...................................................................................................... 16
2.6 Current Inputs ......................................................................................................................... 19
2.7 Voltage Input ........................................................................................................................... 19
2.8 Binary inputs ........................................................................................................................... 19
2.9 Binary outputs (Output Relays) ............................................................................................... 20
2.10 Virtual Input/O ut puts ............................................................................................................... 21
2.11 Self Monitoring ........................................................................................................................ 22
2.11.1 Protect ion Hea lthy/Def ect ive ...................................................................................... 22
Sectio n 3: Protection Functions ......................................................................................................... 23
3.1 Current Protection: Differential Protection .............................................................................. 23
3.1.1 ICT .............................................................................................................................. 23
3.1.2 Overall Biased Differential (87BD) ............................................................................. 24
3.1.3 87HS .......................................................................................................................... 26
3.2 Curr ent Protec t ion: Phase Overcurrent (51, 50) ..................................................................... 28
3.2.1 Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection (50) ................................................................ 28
3.2.2 Time Delayed Overcurrent Protection (51) ................................................................ 29
3.3 Current Protection: Derived Earth Fault (50N, 51N) ............................................................... 30
3.3.1 Instantaneous Derived Earth Fault Protection (50N) ................................................. 30
3.3.2 Time Delayed Derived Earth Fault Protection (51N) ................................................. 31
3.4 Current Protection: Measured Earth Fault (50G, 51G) ........................................................... 32
3.4.1 Instantaneous Measured Earth Fault Protection (50G) ............................................. 32
3.4.2 Time Delayed Measured Earth Fault Protection (51G) .............................................. 33
3.5 Current Protection: High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault (64H) ........................................ 34
3.6 Open Circuit (46BC) ................................................................................................................ 35
3.7 Current Protection: Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46NPS) ................................... 36
3.8 Current Protection: Under-Current (37, 37G) ......................................................................... 37
3.9 Current Protection: Thermal Overload (49) ............................................................................ 38
3.10 Voltage Protection: Over Fluxing (24) ..................................................................................... 40
3.11 Voltage Protection: Under/Over Voltage (27/59) .................................................................... 42
3.12 Voltage Protection: Neutral Overvoltage (59N) ...................................................................... 43
3.13 Voltage Protection: Under/Over Frequency (81) .................................................................... 45
Sectio n 4: Control & Logic Functions ................................................................................................ 46
4.1 Quick Logic ............................................................................................................................. 46
Sectio n 5: Supervision Functions ...................................................................................................... 48
5.1 Circuit Breaker Failure (50BF) ................................................................................................ 48
5.2 Trip/Close Circuit Supervision (74TCS/74CCS) ..................................................................... 50
5.3 Inrush Detector (81HBL2) ....................................................................................................... 51
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 4 of 61
5.4 Over Fluxing Detector (81HBL5)............................................................................................. 52
Sectio n 6: Other Features .................................................................................................................... 54
6.1 Data Communications ............................................................................................................. 54
6.2 IEC 61850 Communications ................................................................................................... 54
6.3 Maintenance............................................................................................................................ 55
6.3.1 Output Matrix Test ...................................................................................................... 55
6.3.2 CB Counters ............................................................................................................... 55
6.3.3 I2t CB Wear ................................................................................................................ 55
6.4 Data Stora ge ........................................................................................................................... 56
6.4.1 General ....................................................................................................................... 56
6.4.2 Event Records ............................................................................................................ 56
6.4.3 Waveform Records. ................................................................................................... 56
6.4.4 Fault Data Records .................................................................................................... 57
6.4.5 Demand ...................................................................................................................... 57
6.4.6 Demand/Data Log ...................................................................................................... 57
6.5 Metering .................................................................................................................................. 58
6.6 Oper ati ng Mod e ...................................................................................................................... 58
6.7 Control Mode........................................................................................................................... 58
6.8 Real Time Clock ...................................................................................................................... 59
6.8.1 Time Synchronisation Data Comms ....................................................................... 59
6.8.2 Time SynchronisationBinary Input ......................................................................... 59
6.8.3 Time Synchronisation IRIG-B (Optional) ................................................................. 59
6.9 Settings Groups ...................................................................................................................... 59
6.10 Password Feature ................................................................................................................... 60
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 5 of 61
List of Figures
Figure 1-1 Function Diagram: 7SR242n-2aAnn-0AA0 Relay ............................................................. 10
Figure 1-2 Function Diagram: 7SR242n-2aAnn-0BA0 Relay ............................................................. 11
Figure 1-3 Function Diagram: 7SR242n-2aAnn-0C A0 Rela y ............................................................. 12
Figure 1-4 Connection Diagram: 7SR242 Relay ................................................................................. 13
Figure 2-1 7SR24 with 3 + 16 LEDs in E8 Case ................................................................................ 16
Figure 2-2 Binary Input Logic ............................................................................................................. 19
Figure 2-3 Binary Output Logic .......................................................................................................... 21
Figure 2.11-1 Start-up Counter Meter .................................................................................................... 22
Figure 3-1 Biased Differential Characteristic ....................................................................................... 24
Figure 3-2 Functional Diagram for Biased Current Differential Protection .......................................... 25
Figure 3-3 Differential Highset Characteristic ..................................................................................... 26
Figure 3-4 Logic Diagram: High Set Current Differential Protection ................................................... 27
Figure 3-5 Logic Diagram: Instantaneous Over-cur rent El ement ....................................................... 28
Figure 3-6 Logic Diagram: Time Delayed Overcurrent Element ......................................................... 29
Figure 3-7 Logic Diagram: Instantaneous Derived Earth Fault Element............................................. 30
Figure 3-8 Logic Diagram: Derived Time Delayed Earth Fault Protection .......................................... 31
Figure 3-9 Logic Diagram: Measured Instantaneous Earth-fault Element .......................................... 32
Figure 3-10 Logic Diagram: Time Delayed Measured Earth Fault Element (51G) ............................... 33
Figure 3-11 Logic Diagram: High Impedance REF (64H) ..................................................................... 34
Figure 3-12 Logic Diagram: Open Circuit Function (46BC) .................................................................. 35
Figure 3-13 Logic Diagram: Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46NPS) .................................... 36
Figure 3-14 Logic Diagram: Undercurrent Detector (37, 37G) .............................................................. 37
Figure 3-15 Logic Diagram: Thermal Overload Protection (49) ............................................................ 39
Figure 3-16 Inverse Over-fluxing Characteristic (24IT) ......................................................................... 40
Figure 3-17 Logic Diagram: Overfluxing Elements (24) ........................................................................ 41
Figure 3-18 Logic Diagram: Under/Over Voltage Elements (27/59) ..................................................... 42
Figure 3-19 Logic Diagram: Neutral Overvoltage Element ................................................................... 44
Figure 3-20 Logic Diagram: Under/Over Frequency Detector (81) ....................................................... 45
Figure 4-1 Sequence Diagram showing PU/DO Timers in Quick Logic (Counter Reset
Mode Off) ........................................................................................................................... 47
Figure 5-1 Logic Diagram: Circuit Breaker Fail Protection (50BF) ...................................................... 49
Figure 5-2 Logic Diagram: Trip Circuit Supervision Feature (74TCS) ................................................ 50
Figure 5-3 Logic Diagram: Close Circuit Supervision Feature (74CCS) ............................................. 50
Figure 5-4 Logic Diagram: Inrush Detector Feature (81HBL2) ........................................................... 51
Figure 5-5 Logic Diagram: Overfluxing Detector Feature (81HBL5) ................................................... 52
List of Tables
Table 1-1: 7SR242 Ordering Options ....................................................................................................... 8
Table 2-1 Summary of 7SR24 Relay Configurations ......................................................................... 15
Table 6-1 Operati ng Mod e ................................................................................................................. 58
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 6 of 61
Symbols and Nomenclature
The following notational and formatting conventions are used within the remainder of this document:
Setting Menu Location MAIN MENU>SUB-MENU
Setting: Elem name -Setting
Setting value: value
Alternatives: [1st] [2nd] [3rd]
S
RQ
c
Pickup
Operate
Elem Starter
Elem Inhibit
Elem Reset Delay
c
Forward
Reverse
Elem Char Dir
Non-Dir
L1 Dir Blk
PhaseAFwd
Binary input signal
visible to user
Binary Output visible to user
Digital signal not visible to
user, to/from another element
List of settings associated with a specific
function
Appropriate list is TRUE when setting
selected.
Digital signal not visible to
user, internal to this element
IL1
Analogue signal with signal
description
Common setting for multiple functions
c
Pickup
Operate
Function.
Individual functions are enabled when
associated control input (c) is TRUE.
Common control input (c) for multiple
functions. All functions are enabled
when control input is TRUE.
&
And Gate
(2 inputs shown)
1
Or Gate
(3 inputs shown)INST.
EVENT
EVENT: IEC, Modbus, DNP etc.
Where applicable
Relay instrument
=1
Exclusive Or (XOR) Gate
(3 inputs shown)
Latch (Set/Reset)
Positive Edge Trigger
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 7 of 61
Section 1: Introduction
This manual is applicable to the following relays:
7SR242 Multi-Function 2-Winding Transformer Protection Relay
The 7SR242 relay integrates the protection and control elements required to provide a complete transformer
protection.
The ‘Ordering Options’ Tables summarise the features availa ble in each mod el.
General Safety Precautions
Current Transformer Circuits
The secondary circuit of a live CT must not be open circuited. Non-observance of this precaution can result in
injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
External Resistors
Where external resistors are fitted to relays, these may present a danger of electric shock or burns, if touched.
Fibre O ptic C ommunication
Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly. Optical power meters
should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device.
Front Cover
The front cover provides additional securing of the relay element within the case. The relay cover should be in
place during nor mal oper atin g cond itions.
!
!
!
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 8 of 61
Table 1-1: 7SR242 Ordering Options
DUOBIAS-M
7
S
R
2
4
2
-
2
A
-
0
A
0
Multi funct ional 2 winding
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
transformer differential
Protection Produc t
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
protection
Transformer
4
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Relay Type
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Diff erential (2 winding)
2
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Case I/O and Fascia
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
E8 case, 6 CT, 2 EF/REF CT, 1 VT, 9 Binary Inputs / 6 Binary Outputs,
16 LEDs
2
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
E10 case, 6 CT, 2 EF/REF CT, 1 V T, 19 Bin ary Inputs / 14 Binary O utputs,
24 LEDs
3
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
E12 case, 6 CT, 2 EF/REF CT, 1 V T, 39 Bin ary Inputs / 14 Binary O utputs,
32 LEDs
4
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Meas uring Input
|
|
|
|
|
|
1/5 A, 40 - 160V, 50/60Hz
2
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Auxiliary voltage
|
|
|
|
|
30 to 220V DC, binar y input thresh old 19V DC
A
|
|
|
|
30 to 220V DC, binar y input thresh old 88V DC
B
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Communication Interface
|
|
|
|
Standard ver sion includ ed in all models , USB front port, RS48 5 rear port
1
1/2
|
|
Standard ver sion plus addi tional rear F/O ST connector s (x2) and IRIG-B
2
1/2
|
|
Standard version plus a dditional rear RS485 (x1) an d IRIG-B
3
1/2
|
|
Standard ver sion plus addi tional rear R S232 (x1) and IRIG-B
4
1/2
|
|
Standard ver sion plus addi tional rear Electrical Ethernet RJ45 (x2)
7
7
|
|
Standard version plus a dditional rear Optic al Ethernet Dupl ex (x2)
8
7
|
|
|
|
|
Protocol
|
|
|
IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus RTU (user selec table s etting)
1
|
|
IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus RTU and DNP 3.0 (user selectabl e)
2
|
|
IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus RTU and DNP 3.0 (user selectabl e) and IE C 61850
7
|
|
|
|
Protection Function Packages
|
|
Option A: Standard version Included in al l model s
- 81HBL2 Inrush D etector
- 81HBL5 Overflux i ng det ec tor
- 87BD Biase d curre nt differ ential
- 87HS Current diff er ent ial hi ghes t
Programmable logic
For each win ding/c ircuit breaker
- 50BF Circuit breaker fail
- 64H High impedance REF
- 74TCS/CCS Tr ip/close circuit supervision
Option B: Standard v ersion plus
- 37/37G Undercurrent
- 46BC Open ci rcuit
- 46NPS Negative phase sequence overcurrent
- 49 Thermal overload
- 50 Instantaneous phase fault overcurrent
- 50G/50N I nstanta neous ear th fault
- 51 Time delayed phase fault over current
- 51G/51N Ti me delayed earth fault
A
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
B
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(continued on following page )
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 9 of 61
DUOBIAS-M
7
S
R
2
4
2
-
2
A
-
0
A
0
(continued from previous page)
Option C: Standard v ersion - plus
- 24 Overfluxing
- 27/59 Under/overvoltage
- 59N Neutr al vol t age di s plac e m ent
- 81 Under/overfrequency
- 37/37G Undercurrent
- 46BC Open c ircuit
- 46NPS Negative phase sequenc e overcur rent
- 49 Therm al overload
- 50 Instant aneous phase f ault overcurrent
- 50G/50N I nstanta neous ear th fault
- 51 Time delayed phase fault overcurrent
- 51G/51N Time delayed earth fault
C
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Additional Functionality
|
No Ad ditional Functionality
A
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 10 of 61
50
BF-1
50
BF-1
50
BF-1
Ig-1
50
BF-2
50
BF-2
50
BF-2
64H
W1-Ia
64H
81
HBL
5
81
HBL
5
81
HBL
5
74
TCS
(x6)
Ig-2
W1-Ib
W1-Ib
W2-Ic
W2-Ib
W2-Ia
81
HBL
2
81
HBL
2
81
HBL
2
81
HBL
2
81
HBL
2
81
HBL
2
81
HBL
5
81
HBL
5
81
HBL
5
87HS 87BD
ICT
ICT
7SR242n-2aAn1-0AA0
50
BF-1
I4
50
BF-2
I4 74
CCS
(x6)
Figure 1-1 Function Diagram: 7SR242n-2aAnn-0AA0 Relay
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 11 of 61
Ig-1
W1-Ia
Ig-2
W1-Ib
W1-Ic
W2-Ic
W2-Ib
W2-Ia
50G
(x2)
51G
(x4) 64H
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
74
TCS
(x6)
7SR242n-2aAn1-0BA0
81
HBL2
81
HBL2
81
HBL2
87HS 87BD
ICT
ICT
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
50N
(x2)
51N
(x2)
46
BC
(x2)
37 49
37 49
37 49
50N
50
BF-2
50
BF-2
50
BF-2
46
NPS
51N
51
51
51
50
50
50
50G 51G 64H
81
HBL2
81
HBL
2
81
HBL
2
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
Each function element
can be assigned to W1
or W2 CT inputs.
NOTE: The use of some
functions are mutually
exclusive
37G
(x2)
50
BF-1
I4
37G
50
BF-2
I4
74
CCS
(x6)
46
BC
46
NPS
(x4)
Figure 1-2 Function Diagram: 7SR242n-2aAnn-0BA0 Relay
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 12 of 61
Ig-1
50G
(x2)
51G
(x4) 64H
W1-Ia 81
HBL5
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
V
74
TCS
(x6)
59N
(x2)
27
59
(x4)
81
(x6)
Ig-2
W1-Ib
W1-Ic
W2-Ic
W2-Ib
W2-Ia
7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0
81
HBL2
81
HBL2
81
HBL2
87HS 87BD
ICT
ICT
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
50N
(x2)
51N
(x2)
46
BC
(x2)
37 49
37 49
37 49
50N
50
BF-2
50
BF-2
50
BF-2
46
NPS
51N
51
51
51
50
50
50
50G 51G 64H
81
HBL2
81
HBL
2
81
HBL
2
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
Each function element
can be assigned to W1
or W2 CT inputs.
NOTE: The use of some
functions are mutually
exclusive
24
(x3)
37G
(x2)
50
BF-1
I4
37G
50
BF-2
I4
74
CCS
(x6)
46
BC
46
NPS
(x4)
Figure 1-3 Function Diagram: 7SR242n-2aAnn-0CA0 Relay
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 13 of 61
Rear View: Arrangement of terminals and modules
Shows contacts internal
to relay case assembly.
Contacts close when the
relay chassis is
withdrawn from case
NOTES
BI = Binary Input
BO = Binary Output
BI 10
+ve
-ve
2
4
BI 11
+ve
-ve
6
8
BI 12
+ve
10
BO 7
BO 8
BO 9
BI 13
+ve
12
BI 14
+ve
14
BI 15
+ve
-ve
16
18
BI 16
20
BI 17
+ve
22
BI 18
+ve
24
BI 19
+ve
-ve
26
28
+ve
BO 10
BO 11
BO 12
BO 13
BO 14
D
21
19
17
23
25
27
3
1
7
5
11
9
15
13
BO 1
GND.
BI 1
+ve
-ve
+ve
-ve
22
24
28
2
4
BI 2
+ve
-ve
6
8
BI 3
+ve
-ve
10
12
BO 2
BO 3
BO 4
BO 5
7SR242
C
A
RS485
Screen
B
Term.
14
16
18
20
13
14
15
16
1A
5A
1
2
3
4
1A
5A
5
6
7
8
1A
5A
9
10
11
12
1A
5A
A
Ig-1
V
27
28
17
18
19
20
5A
BI 4
+ve
18
BI 5
+ve
22
BI 6
+ve
-ve
26
28
1A
5A
1
2
3
4
1A
5A
5
6
7
8
1A
5A
9
10
11
12
B
-ve
20
-ve
24
BI 7
+ve
17
BI 8
+ve
21
BI 9
+ve
-ve
25
27
-ve
19
-ve
23
W1-Ia
W1-Ib
W1-Ic
W2-Ic
W2-Ib
W2-Ia
Ig-2
BO 6
9
5
7
27
3
1
15
11
13
19
17
23
21
25
26
BI 20
+ve
-ve
2
4
BI 21
+ve
-ve
6
8
BI 22
+ve
10
BI 23
+ve
12
BI 24
+ve
14
BI 25
+ve
-ve
16
18
BI 26
20
BI 27
+ve
22
BI 28
+ve
24
BI 29
+ve
-ve
26
28
+ve
E
BI 30
+ve
-ve
1
3
BI 31
+ve
-ve
5
7
BI 32
+ve 9
BI 33
+ve 11
BI 34
+ve 13
BI 35
+ve
-ve
15
17
BI 36
19
BI 37
+ve 21
BI 38
+ve 23
BI 39
+ve
-ve
25
27
+ve
A
CT/VT
B
CT
D
Optional
I/O
1 2
27 28
1 21 2
27 2827 28
Data
Comms
(Optional)
C
PSU
1 2
27 28
E
Optional
I/O
1 2
27 28
Figure 1-4 Connection Diagram: 7SR242 Relay
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 14 of 61
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 15 of 61
Section 2: Hardware Description
2.1 General
The structure of the relay is based upon the Multi-function hardware platform. The relays are supplied in either
size E8, E10 or E12 cases (where 1 x E = width of approx. 26mm). The hardware design provides commonality
between products and components across the 7SR2 rang e of relay s.
Table 2-1 Summary of 7SR24 Relay Configurations
Relay Current
Inputs Voltage
Inputs Binary
Inputs Output
Relays LEDs Case
7SR2422 8 1 9 6 16 E8
7SR2423 8 1 19 14 24 E10
7SR2424 8 1 39 14 32 E12
Relays are assembled from the following modules:
1) Front Fascia with three fixed function LEDs and ordering options of configurable LEDs.
2) Processor module
3) Analogue Input module ‘A’: 3 x Current + 6 x Binary Inputs
4) Analogue Input module ‘B’: 5 x Current + 1 x Voltage.
5) Power Supply and basic Binary Input (BI) and Binary Output (BO).
6) Optional Binary Input/Output Module
7) Optional Binary Input Module
8) Optional data comms module
2.2 Case
The relays are housed in cases designed to fit directly into standard panel racks.
The complete relay assembly is withdrawable from the front of the case. Contacts in the case ensure that the CT
circuits remain short-circuited when the relay is removed. Note that when the optional Ethernet comms module is
fitted to the relay the comms cables and the EN100 module rear securing screw must be removed before the
relay assembly is withdrawn.
The rear terminal blocks comprise M4 screw terminals for wire connections. Each terminal can accept two 90
degree ring tongue crimps.
Located at the top rear of the case is a screw clamp earthing point, this must be connected to the main panel
earth.
See Chapter 5 (Installation Guide) for full details of panel cut-out and internal clearance requirements.
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 16 of 61
2.3 Front Co ver
With the transparent front cover in place the user only has access to the and TEST/RESET buttons,
allowing all areas of the menu system to be viewed, but preventing setting changes and control actions. The only
‘action’ that is permitted is to reset the Fault Data display, latched binary outputs and LEDs by using the
TEST/RESET button.
The front cover is used to secure the relay assembly in the case.
2.4 Power Supply Unit (PSU)
The relay PSU can be directly connected to any substation dc system rated from 30V dc to 220V dc.
In the event of the station battery voltage level falling below the relay minimum operate level the PSU will
automatically switch itself off and latch out this prevents any PSU overload conditions occurring. The PSU is
reset by switching the auxiliary supply off then on.
Typically the PSU is connected to the auxiliary supply via an external HRC fuse rated at 6A (BS88/IEC60259).
Isolation links may also be installed in accordance with user requirements.
2.5 Operato r In ter fa ce/ Fascia
The operator interface is designed to provide a user-friendly method of controlling, entering settings and retrieving
data from the relay.
Figure 2-1 7SR24 with 3 + 16 LEDs in E8 Case
NOTE: Pushbuttons on cover not shown
The fascia is an integral part of the relay. Handles are located at each side of the element to allow it to be
withdrawn from the relay case.
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 17 of 61
Relay Information
Above the LCD three labels are provided, these provide the following information:
1) Product name and order code.
2) Nominal current rating, rated frequency, voltage rating, auxiliary dc supply rating, binary input supply
rating, configuration and serial number.
3) Blank label for user defined information.
A ‘template’ is available within the ‘Reydisp’ program to allow users to create and print customised LED label
inserts.
The warning and information labels on the relay fascia provide the following information:
Dielectric Test Voltage 2kV
Impulse Test Above 5kV
Caution: Risk of Electric Shock
Caution: Refer to Equipment Documentation
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
A 4 line by 20-character liquid crystal display indicates settings, instrumentation, fault data and control
commands.
To conserve power the display backlighting is extinguished when no buttons are pressed for a user defined
period. A setting within the “SYSTEM CONFIG” menu allows the timeout to be adjusted from 1 to 60 minutes and
“Off” (backlight permanently on). After an hour the display is completely de-activated. Pressing any key will re-
activate the display.
The LCD contrast can be adjusted using a flat blade screwdriver to turn the screw located below the contrast
symbol . Turning the screw clockwise increases the contrast, anti-clockwise reduces the contrast.
‘PROTECTION HE ALTHY’ LED
This green LED is steadily illuminated to indicate that DC voltage has been applied to the relay power supply and
that the relay is operating correctly. If the internal relay watchdog detects an internal fault then this LED will
continuously flash.
‘PICKUP’ LED
This yellow LED is illuminated to indicate that a user selectable function(s) has picked up. The LED will self reset
after the initiating condition has been removed.
Functions are assigned to the PICKUP LED in the OUTPUT CONFIG>PICKUP CONFIG menu.
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 18 of 61
‘TRIP’ LED
This red LED is steadily illuminated to indicate that a user selectable function has operated to trip the circuit
breaker. Functions are assigned to the ‘Trip’ LED using the OUTPUT CONFIG>Trip Contacts setting.
Operation of the LED is latched and can be reset by either pressing the TEST/RESET► button, energising a
suitably programmed binary input, or, by sending an appropriate command over the data communications
channel(s).
Indication LEDs
Relays have either 16, 24 or 32 user programmable LED indicators. Each LED can be programmed to be
illuminated as either green, yellow or red. Where an LED is programmed to be lit both red and green it will
illuminate yellow. . Each LED can be assigned two different colours dependent upon whether a Start/Pickup or
Operate condition initiates operation. The LED illumination colour is assigned in the OUTPUT CONFIG>LED
CONFIG menu for both Pickup and Operate initiation.
Functions are assigned to the LEDs in the OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX menu.
Each LED can be labelled by withdrawing the relay and inserting a label strip into the pocket behind the front
fascia. A ‘template’ is available to allow users to create and print customised legends.
Each LED can be user programmed as hand or self–resetting. Hand reset LEDs can be reset by either pressing
the TEST/RESET► button, energising a suitably programmed binary input, or, by sending an appropriate
command over the data communications channel(s).
The status of hand reset LEDs is maintained by a back up storage capacitor in the event of an interruption to the
d.c. supply voltage. The length of time for which the LED status will be maintained will depend on such things as
temperature, length of time in service, etc. However the status will be maintained for a minimum of 1.8 days.
LED status stored in fault data records are backed up in non-volatile memory and are permanently stored even in
the event of loss of auxiliary d.c. supply voltage, s ee section 6.4.4
Standard Keys
The relay is supplied as standard with five pushbuttons. The buttons are used to navigate the menu structure and
control relay functions. They are labelled:
Increases a setting or moves u p menu.
Decreases a setting or mov es dow n menu.
TEST/RESET Moves right, can be used to reset selected functionality and for LED test (at
relay identif ier scr een).
ENTER Used to initiate and a ccept set ting s chang es.
CANCEL. Used to cancel settings changes and/or move up the menu structure by one
level per press.
NOTE: All settings and configuration of LEDs, BI, BO and function keys can be accessed and set by the user
using these keys. Alternatively configuration/settings files can be loaded into the relay using ‘ReyDisp’.
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 19 of 61
2.6 Current Inputs
In total eight current inputs are provided on the Analogue Input modules. Terminals are available for both 1A and
5A inputs. CT ratios are input by the user in the CT/VT CONFIG menu.
Current is sample d at 1600Hz for 50Hz systems and 1920Hz for 60Hz systems (32 samples per cycle).
The waveform recorder samples and displays current input waveforms at 32 samples per cycle.
2.7 Voltage Input
An optional voltage input is provided on the Analogue Input module ‘A’.
VT ratios are input by the user in the CT/VT CONFIG menu.
Voltage is sampled at 1600Hz for 50Hz systems and 1920Hz for 60Hz systems (32 samples per cycle).
The waveform recorder displays the voltage input waveform at 32 samples per cycle.
2.8 Binary inputs
The binary inputs are opto-couplers operated from a suitably rated dc supp ly .
Relays are fitted with 9 or 19 binary inputs (BI). The user can assign any binary input to any of the available
functio ns ( INPUT CONFIG > INPUT MATRIX).
The Power Supply module includes the relay basic I/O. The module includes 3 x BI.
Pick-up (PU) and drop-off (DO) time delays are associated with each binary input. Where no pick-up time delay
has been applied the input may pick up due to induced ac voltage on the wiring connections (e.g. cross site
wiring). The default pick-up time of 20ms provides ac immunity. Each input can be programmed independently.
Each input may be logically inverted to facilitate integration of the relay within the user scheme. When inverted the
relay indicates that the BI is energised when no d.c. is applied. Inversion occurs before the PU & DO time delay,
see fig. 2.8-1.
Each input may be mapped to any front Fascia indication LED and/or to any Binary output contact and can also
be used with the internal user programmable logic. This allows the relay to provide panel indications and alarms.
Event
BI 1
Binary Input 1
=1
Inverted Inputs
BI 1 inverted BI 1 P/U Delay
Event
BI n
Binary Input n
=1
BI n inverted BI n P/U Delay
INPUT CONFIG>
INPUT MATRIX
(Or gates)
Logic signals,
e.g. '51-1 Inhibit'
BI 1 D/O Delay
BI n D/O Delay
INPUT
CONFIG>
BINARY
INPUT
CONFIG
Figure 2-2 Binary Input Logic
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 20 of 61
2.9 Binary outputs (Output Re lays)
Relays are fitted with 6 or 14 binary outputs. All outputs are fully user configurable and can be programmed to
operate from any or all of the available functions.
The Power Supply module includes the relay basic I/O. The module includes six binary outputs each fitted with 1
contact providing in total 1 x normally closed (NC), 2 x change-over (CO) and 3 x normally open (NO) contacts.
In the default mode of operation binary outputs are self reset and remain energised for a user configurable
minimum time of up to 60 seconds. If required, outputs can be programmed to operate as ‘hand reset’ or ‘pulsed’.
Where an output is programmed to be ‘hand reset’ and ‘pulsed’ then the output will be ‘hand reset’ only.
The binary outputs can be used to operate the trip coils of the circuit breaker directly where the trip coil current
does not exceed the 'make and carry' contact rating. The circuit breaker auxiliary contacts or other in-series
auxiliary device must be used to break the trip coil current.
CB1 and CB2 ‘Trip Contacts’ are assigned in the OUTPUT CONFIG>BINARY OUTPUT CONFIG menu.
Operation of a ‘Trip Contact’ will actuate the ‘Trip Alert’ screen where enabled and will initiate both fault record
storage and CB Fail protection where enabled.
When the relay is withdrawn from the case all normally closed contacts will be open circuited. This should be
considered in the design of the control and protection circuitry.
Notes on Self Reset Outputs
Outputs reset after the initiate condition is removed, they are subject to the user definable ‘Minimum Operate
Time’ setting.
With a failed breaker condition the relay may remain operated until current flow in the primary system is
interrupted by an upstream device. The relay will then reset and attempt to interrupt trip coil current flowing
through an output contact. W here this level is above the break rating of the output contact an auxiliary relay with
heavy-duty contact s shou ld be utilise d.
Notes on Pulsed Outputs
When operated, the output will reset after the user definable ‘Minimum Operate Time’ setting regardless of the
initiating condition.
Notes on Hand Reset Outputs
Hand reset outputs can be reset by either pressing the TEST/RESET button, by energising a suitably
programmed binary input, or, by sending an appropriate command over the data communications channel(s).
On loss of the auxiliary supply hand-reset outputs will reset. When the auxiliary supply is re-established the binary
output will remain in the reset state unless the initiating condition is still present.
Binary Output Test
The MAINTENANCE>OUTPUT MATRIX TEST menu includes a facility to test output relays from the relay fascia
without the need for a secondary injection test set.
Binary outputs can also be energised from the Reydisp Evolution software package where PC facilities are
available.
For both methods the output contact is energised for the duration of the ‘OUTPUT CONFIG > BINARY OUTPUT
CONFIG > Min Operate Time’ setting.
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 21 of 61
Event
Output 1
Min Operate Time
Hand Reset
BO 1 hand reset
S
RQ
OUTPUT CONFIG>
OUTPUT MATRIX
(Or gates)
Logic signals,
e.g. '51-1'
Reset LEDs & Outputs (TEST/RESET key, Binary Input, Data Comms)
&&
&
1
1
Event
Output n
BO n hand reset
S
RQ
&&
&
1
1
BO 1
BO n
OUTPUT
CONFIG>
BINARY
OUTPUT
CONFIG
OUTPUT
CONFIG>
BINARY
OUTPUT
CONFIG
Figure 2-3 Binary Output Logic
2.10 Virtual Input/Outputs
The relays have 16 virtual input/outputs, these are internal logic states. Virtual I/O is assigned in the same way as
physical Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs. Virtual I/O is mapped from within the INPUT CONFIG > INPUT
MATRIX and OUTPUT CO NFIG > OUTPUT MATRIX menus.
The status of virtual I/O is not stored during power loss.
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 22 of 61
2.11 Self M onitoring
The relay incorporates a number of self-monitoring features. Each of these features can initiate a controlled reset
recovery sequence.
Supervision includes a power supply watchdog, code execution watchdog, memory checks by checksum and
processor/ADC health checks. When all checks indicate the relay is operating correctly the ‘Protection Healthy’
LED is illuminate d.
If an internal failure is detected, a message will be displayed. The relay will reset in an attempt to rectify the
failure. This will result in de-energisation of any binary output mapped to ‘protection healthy’ and flashing of the
protection healthy LED. If a successful reset is achieved by the relay the LED and output contact will revert back
to normal operational mode, and the relay will restart, therefore ensuring the circuit is protected for the maximum
time.
A Start-up Counter Meter is provided to display the number of start-ups the relay has performed. Once the
number of start-ups has exceeded a set number, an Alarm output can be given.
Figure 2.11-1 Start-up Counter Meter
Reset of the counter can be done from the meter or via a binary input or a command.
Various types of start-up are monitored by the relay:
1. power-on starts (auxiliary supply initiation)
2. expected starts (user initiated via comms, language changes, custom protection curve etc.)
3. unexpected st art s (caused by the relay watchdog)
Any combination of these can be selected for the start-up count. This is done in the MAINTENANCE
MENU>START COUNT menu using the Start Up Types setting. All the start-up types selected will be added to
the overall start-up count.
The number of restarts before the alarm output is raised is set in the MAINTENANCE MENU>START COUNT
menu using the Start Up Count Target setting.
When the number of relay start-ups reaches the target value an output is raised, OUTPUT MATRIX>Start Up
Count Alarm, which can be programmed to any combination of binary outputs, LED’s or virtual outputs.
2.11.1 Protection Healthy/Defective
A normally open contact can be used to signal protection healthy. When the relay has DC supply and it has
successfully passed its self-checking procedure then the Protection Healthy contacts are made.
A normally closed contact is used to signal protection defective. When the DC supply is not applied to the relay or
a problem is detected within the relay then this output is de-energised and the normally closed contacts make to
provide an external alarm.
An alarm can be provided if the relay is withdrawn from the case. A contact is provided in the case at positions
25-26 of the PSU module, this contact closes when the relay is withdrawn.
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 23 of 61
Section 3: Prot ection Functions
3.1 Current Protection: Differential Protection
Comprises both biased differential and high-set differ ential elements.
The fundamental frequency current is measured with the line CT inputs. These line currents are both multiplied
and vector corrected before being applied to the current differential elements.
3.1.1 ICT
The Wn ICT Multiplier setting is applied to the line c urrents the CT secondary currents. The multiplier is used
to correct any CT ratio mismatch so that ideally nominal current (ICTOUT = 1A) is applied to the biased differential
algorithm.
The Wn ICT Connection setting applies the correct vector compensation to the current applied to the differential
algorithm.
The nominal current ratio of the virtual interposing CT is 1:1. Note that where Yd settings are applied some
current distributions will result in a √3 multiplying factor being applied. See ‘Applications Guide’.
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 24 of 61
3.1.2 Overall Biased Differential (87BD)
87BD Initial
Setting 1st Bias
Slope
Limit
Bias (Restraint) Current
2II W2W1
+
87BD 1
st
Bias Slope
Operate Current
2nd Bias Slope
2nd Bias
Slope Type
W2W1
II +
I
W1
I
W2
Figure 3-1 Biased Differential Characteristic
Figure 3.1-1 illustrates the biased differential characteristic. Within the relay the fundamental frequency RMS line
currents are modified by the ICT Multiplier and ICT Connection settings (see 3.1.1) before being applied to th e
biased differential elements. The biased differential elements calculate the operate current for each phase from
the vector sum of winding 1 and winding 2 currents i.e. IOPERATE = IW1 + IW2. The bias (or restraint) current is
calculated from the tota l current of winding 1 and winding 2 currents i.e.
2II
IW2W1
RESTRAIN
+
=
.
The 87BD Initial setting defines the minimum differential current required to operate the relay.
The 8 7BD 1st Bias Slope setting is used to ensure protection stability in the presence of steady state errors e.g.
the effects of an on-load t ap c hanger .
The 87BD 1st Bias Slope Limit setting defines the border between the 1st and 2 nd bias slopes.
87BD 2nd Bias Slope Type setting allows the user to select the preferred characteristic shape i.e. Line or Curve.
The 87BD 2nd Bias Slope setting is applied when 87BD 2nd Bias Slope Type = Line. This setting is used to
modify the sensitivity of the differential algorithm at higher current levels.
The output of 87BD Delay can be mapped to relay outputs.
Operation of the bia sed diff erential elements can be inhibit ed from:
Inhibit 87BD A binary or virtual input.
87BD Inrush Action: Inhibit Operation of the inrush current detector
87BD Overfluxing Action: Inhibit Operation of the ov erfluxing detector
User Inhibit Reylogic (grap hi cal log ic).
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 25 of 61
c
Pickup
Operate
1
1General Pickup
87BD
87BD 1
st Bias Slope Limit
Enable
87BD 1st Bias Slope
87BD Initial
W1-IL1
W1-IL2
W1-IL3
&
Inhibit 87BD
87BD Element
Enabled
Disabled
c
Pickup
Operate
c
Pickup
Operate
ICT
W1 ICT Multiplier
W1 ICT Connection
W2-IL1
W2-IL2
W2-IL3
ICT
W2 ICT Multiplier
W2 ICT Connection
87BD Delay
87BD 2nd Bias Slope
87BD 2nd Bias Slope Type
81HBL2 Element
Enabled
Disabled
Wn-IL1
Wn-IL2
Wn-IL3
81HBL2 Bias
L2 81HBL2
81HBL2 Setting
Enable
>
>
>
L1 81HBL2
L3 81HBL2
81HBL5 Element
Enabled
Disabled
Wn-IL1
Wn-IL2
Wn-IL3
81HBL5 Bias
81HBL5 Setting
Enable
>
>
>
87BD Inrush Action
Off
Inhibit
&
&
&
A
B
C
87BD ‘A’ Inhibit
87BD ‘B’ Inhibit
87BD ‘C’ Inhibit
87BD ‘A’
Inhibit
87BD ‘B’
Inhibit
87BD ‘C’
Inhibit
L2 81HBL5
L1 81HBL5
L3 81HBL5
87BD Overfluxing Action
Off
Inhibit
&
&
&
87BD ‘A’ Inhibit
87BD ‘B’ Inhibit
87BD ‘C’ Inhibit
User Inhibit 87BD
Figure 3-2 Functional Diagram for Biased Current Diffe rential Protection
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 26 of 61
3.1.3 87HS
87HS Setting
Bias (Restraint) Current
Operate Current
W2
W1
II +
2II W2W1 +
Figure 3-3 Differential Highset Characteristic
Figure 3.1-3 illustrates the differential highset characteristic. W ithin the relay the fundamental frequency RMS line
currents are modified by the ICT Multiplier and ICT Connection settings (see 3.1.1) before being applied to the
differential highset elements. The differential highset elements calculate the operate current for each phase from
the vector sum of winding 1 and winding 2 currents i.e. IOPERATE = IW1 + IW2.
87HS Setting defines the differential current required to operate the element. The output of 87HS Delay can be
mapped to relay outputs.
Operation of the highset differential elements can be inhibited from:
Inhibit 87HS A binary or virtual input.
87HS Inrush Action: Inhibit Operation of the inrush current detector
87HS Overfluxing Action: Inhibit Operatio n of the ov erfluxing detector
User Inhibit Reylogic (grap hi cal log ic).
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 27 of 61
c
Pickup
Operate
87HS Setting
Enable
c
Pickup
Operate
c
Pickup
Operate
87HS ‘A’
Inhibit
87HS ‘B’
Inhibit
87HS ‘C’
Inhibit
General Pickup
87HS
W1-IL1
W1-IL2
W1-IL3
ICT
W1 ICT Multiplier
W1 ICT Connection
W2-IL1
W2-IL2
W2-IL3
ICT
W2 ICT Multiplier
W2 ICT Connection
87HS Delay
81HBL2 Element
Enabled
Disabled
Wn-IL1
Wn-IL2
Wn-IL3
81HBL2 Bias
L2 81HBL2
81HBL2 Setting
Enable
>
>
>
L1 81HBL2
L3 81HBL2
81HBL5 Element
Enabled
Disabled
Wn-IL1
Wn-IL2
Wn-IL3
81HBL5 Bias
81HBL5 Setting
Enable
>
>
>
87HS Inrush Action
Off
Inhibit
&
&
&
87HS ‘A’ Inhibit
87HS ‘B’ Inhibit
87HS ‘C’ Inhibit
L2 81HBL5
L1 81HBL5
L3 81HBL5
87HS Overfluxing Action
Off
Inhibit
&
&
&
87HS ‘A’ Inhibit
87HS ‘B’ Inhibit
87HS ‘C’ Inhibit
&
&
&
Inhibit 87HS
87HS Element
Enabled
Disabled
User Inhibit 87HS
Figure 3-4 Logic Diagram: High Set Current Differential Protection
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 28 of 61
3.2 Current Prot ection: Phase Overcurrent (51, 50)
The optional phase overcurrent elements have a common setting to measure either fundamental frequency RMS
or True RMS current:
True RMS current: 51/50 Measurement = RMS
Fundamental Frequency RMS current: 51/50 Measurement = Fundamental
3.2.1 Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection (50)
Optionally two instantaneous overcurrent elements are provided, each can be selected to either winding 1 or
winding 2.
Each instantaneous element (50-n) has independent settings. 50-n Setting for pick-up current and 50-n Delay
follower time delay. The instantaneous elements have transient free operation.
Operation of the instantaneous overcurrent elements can be inhibited from:
Inhibit 50-n A binary or virtual input.
50-n Inrush Action: Inhibit Operation of the inru sh detector function.
User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic).
50-n
50-n Setting
Enable
>
c
50-n Delay
>
c
>
c
Wn-IL1
Wn-IL2
Wn-IL3
50/51
Measurement
L1 81HBL2
50-n Inrush
Action
Off
Inhibit
&
L2 81HBL2
L3 81HBL2
&
&
1
General Pickup
1
&
Inhibit 50-n
50-n Element
Enabled
Disabled
User Inhibit 50-n
Figure 3-5 Logic Diagram: Instantaneous Over-current Element
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 29 of 61
3.2.2 Time Delayed Overcurrent Protection (51)
Optionally two time delayed overcurrent elements are provided, each can be selected to either winding 1 or
winding 2.
51-n Setting sets the pick-up current level.
A number of shaped characteristics are provided. An inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic is
se lected from IEC, ANSI or user defined curv es usi ng 51-n Char. A time multiplier is applied to the characteristic
curves using the 51-n Time Mult setting. Alternatively, a definite time lag delay (DTL) can be chosen using 51-n
Char. When Delay (DTL) is selected the time multiplier is not applied and the 51-n Delay (DTL) setting is used
instead. The full list of operating curves is given in Chapter 2 ‘Settings, Configuration and Instruments Guide’.
Operating curve characteristics are illustrated in Chapter 3 ‘Performance Specification’.
The 51-n Reset setting can apply a definite time delayed reset, or when configured as an ANSI characteristic an
ANSI (DECAYING) reset. If ANSI (DECAYING) reset is selected for an IEC characteristic, the reset will be
instantaneous. The reset mode is significant where the characteristic has reset before issuing a trip output see
‘Applications Guide’.
A minimum operate time for the characteristic can be set using 51-n Min. Operate Time setting.
A fixed additional operate time can be added to the characteristic using 51-n Follower DTL setting.
Operation of the time delayed overcurrent elements can be inhibited from:
Inhibit 51-n A binary or virtual input.
51-n Inrush Action: Inhibit Operation of the inrush dete ctor function.
User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic).
1General Pickup
51-n
51-n Setting
51-n Char
51-n Time Mult
51-n Delay (DTL)
51-n Reset
Enable
51-n Follower DTL
51-n Min. Operate Time
Wn-IL1
Wn-IL2
Wn-IL3
50/51
Measurement
L1 81HBL2
51-n Inrush
Action
Off
Inhibit
&
L2 81HBL2
L3 81HBL2
&
&
c
Pickup
Operate
c
Pickup
Operate
c
Pickup
Operate
1
&
Inhibit 51-n
51-n Element
Enabled
Disabled
User Inhibit 51-n
Figure 3-6 Logic Diagram: Time Delayed Overcurrent Element
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 30 of 61
3.3 Current Prot ection: Derived Earth Fault (50N, 51N)
The earth current is derived by calculating the sum of the measured line currents. These optional elements utilise
RMS current values of the fundamental frequency (50 or 60Hz).
3.3.1 Instantaneous Derived Earth Fault Protection (50N)
Optionally two instantaneous derived earth fault elements are provided, each can be selected to either winding 1
or winding 2.
Each instantaneous element has independent settings for pick-up current 50N-n Setting and a follower time
delay 50N-n Delay. The instantaneous elements have transient free operation.
Operation of the ins tant aneo us earth fault elements can be inhib ited fr om :
Inhibit 50N-nt A binary or virtual input.
50N-n Inrush Action: Inhibit Operation of the inru sh dete ct or function.
User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic).
50N-n
>
Enable
50N-n
Setting 50N-n Delay
Wn-IL1
Wn-IL2
Wn-IL3
I
N
Inhibit 50N-n
&
50N-n Element
Enabled
Disabled
81HBL2
50N-n Inrush
Action
Off
Inhibit &General Pickup
User Inhibit 50N-n
Figure 3-7 Logic Diagram: Instantaneous Derived Earth Fault Element
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 31 of 61
3.3.2 Time Delayed Derived Earth Fault Protection (51N)
Optionally two time delayed derived earth fault elements are provided, each can be selected to either winding 1 or
winding 2.
51N-n Setting sets the pick-up current level.
A number of shaped characteristics are provided. An inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic is
selected from IEC, ANSI or user defined curves using 51N-n Char. A time multiplier is applied to the
characteristic curves using the 51N-n Time Mult setting. Alternatively, a definite time lag delay (DTL) can be
chosen using 51N-n Char. When Delay (DTL) is selected the time multiplier is not applied and the 51N-n Delay
(DTL) setting is used instead.
The 51N-n Reset setting can apply a definite time delayed or ANSI (DECAYING) reset. The reset mode is
significant where the characteristic has reset before issuing a trip output see ‘App lic ati ons Guide’.
A minimum operate time for the characteristic can be set using the 51N-n Min. Operate Time setting.
A fixed additional operate time can be added to the characteristic using the 51N-n Follower DTL setting.
Operation of the time delayed earth fault eleme nts can be inhibit ed fr om:
Inhibit 51N-n A binary or virtual input.
51N-n Inrush Action: Inhibit Operation of the inrush detector function.
User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic).
General Pickup
51N-n
51N-n Setting
51N-n Charact
51N-n Time Mult
51N-n Min Operate Time
Enable
Wn-IL1
Wn-IL2
Wn-IL3
IN
51N-n Delay (DTL)
51N-n Follower DTL
c
Pickup
Operate
81HBL2
51N-n Inrush
Action
Off
Inhibit
51N-n Reset
&
&
Inhibit 51N-n
51N-n Element
Enabled
Disabled
User Inhibit 51N-n
Figure 3-8 Logic Diagram: Derived Time Delayed Earth Fault Protection
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 32 of 61
3.4 Current Prot ection: Measur ed Earth Fault (50G, 51G)
The earth current is measured directly via dedicated current analogue inputs. These optional elements utilise
either RMS or Fundamental current values as defined by the 51G/50G Measurement setting (MEASURED E/F
menu).
3.4.1 Instantaneous Measured Earth Fault Protection (50G)
Optionally two instantaneous measured earth fault elements are provided, each can be selected to either winding
1 or winding 2.
Each instantaneous element has independent settings for pick-up current 50G-n Setting and a follower time
delay 50G-n Delay. The instantaneous elements have transient free operation.
Operation of the ins tant aneo us measured earth fault elements can be inhibited from:
Inhibit 50G-n A binary or virtual input.
50G-n Inrush Action: Inhibit O perat io n of the inrush detector function.
User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic).
>
Enable
50G-n Setting
IGn
51G/50G Measurement
50G-n
50G-n Delay
General Pickup
Inhibit 50G-n
&
50G-n Element
Enabled
Disabled
81HBL2
50G-n Inrush
Action
Off
Inhibit &
User Inhibit 50G-n
Figure 3-9 Logic Diagram: Measured Instantaneous Earth-fault Element
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 33 of 61
3.4.2 Time Delayed Measured Earth Fault Protection (51G)
Optionally two time delayed measured earth fault elements are provided, each can be selected to either winding 1
or winding 2.
51G-n Setting sets the pick-up current level.
A number of shaped characteristics are provided. An inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic is
selected from IEC, ANSI or user defined curves using 51G-n Char. A time multiplier is applied to the
characteristic curves using the 51G-n Time Mult setting. Alternatively, a definite time lag (DTL) can be chosen
using 51G-n Char. W hen DTL i s select ed the tim e multip lier is not applied and the 51G-n Delay (DTL) setting is
used instead.
The 51G-n Reset setting can apply a definite time delayed or ANSI (DECAYING) reset. The reset mode is
significant where the characteristic has reset before issuing a trip output see ‘App lic ati ons Guide’.
A minimum operate time for the characteristic can be set using 51G-n Min. Operate Time setting.
A fixed additional operate time can be added to the characteristic using 51G-n Follower DT L setting.
Operation of the time delayed measured earth fault elements can be inhibited from:
Inhibit 51G-n A binary or virtual input.
51G-n Inrush Action: Inhibit O perat io n of the inrush detector function.
User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic).
General Pickup
51G-n
IG
n
51G/50G Measurement
51G-n Setting
51G-n Charact
51G-n Time Mult
51G-n Min Operate Time
Enable
51G-n Delay (DTL)
51G-n Follower DTL
c
Pickup
Operate
51G-n Reset
81HBL2
51G-n Inrush
Action
Off
Inhibit
&
&
Inhibit 51G-n
51G-n Element
Enabled
Disabled
User Inhibit 51G-n
Figure 3-10 Logic Diagram: Time Delayed Measured Earth Fault Element (51G)
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 34 of 61
3.5 Current Prot ection: High Impedance Restricted Earth
Fault (64H)
Two high impedance restricted earth fault elements are provided, one for each transformer winding
The relay utilises fundamental current measurement values for this function.
The single phase current input is derived from the residual output of line/neutral CTs connected in parallel. An
external stabilising resistor mus t be connected in series with this input to ensure that this element provides a high
impedance path.
64H Current Setting sets the pick-up current level. An output is given after elapse of the 64H Delay setting.
An external series stabilising resistor and a parallel connected voltage limiting non-linear resistor are used with
this function. See Applications Guide’ for advice in specifying suitable component values.
Operation of the high imped an ce elem ent can be inhi bit ed from:
Inhibit 64H A binary or virtual input.
User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical log ic).
>
Enable
64H-n Current Setting
IG
64H-n
64H-n Delay
&
Inhibit 64H-n
64H-n Element
Enabled
Disabled
User Inhibit 64H-n
Figure 3-11 Logic Diagram: High Impedance REF (64H)
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 35 of 61
3.6 Open Circuit (46BC)
Optionally two open circui t elements are provided, each can be selected to either winding 1 or winding 2.
The element calculates the ratio of NPS to PPS currents. Where the NPS:PPS current ratio is above 46BC
Setting an output is given after the 46BC Delay.
The Open Circuit function can be inhibited from
Inhibit 46BC A binary or virtual input .
Gn 46BC-n U/I Guarded O perat io n of the undercur r ent guar d fun ctio n.
User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical log ic).
46BC-n
Enable
&
46BC-n Setting
IL1
IL2
IL3
NPS
Filter I2
PPS
Filter I1
46BC-n Delay
46BC-n U/I
Guarded
Yes
<
46BC-n U/I
Guard Setting &
&
<
<
Inhibit 46BC-n
46BC-n Element
Enabled
Disabled
User Inhibit 46BC-n
Figure 3-12 Logic Diagram: Open Circuit Function (46BC)
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 36 of 61
3.7 Current Prot ection: Negative Phase Sequence
Overcurrent (46NPS)
Optionally four NPS current elements are provided 2 x 46IT and 2 x 46DT. Each element can be selected to
either winding 1 or winding 2.
The 46IT elements can be configured to be either definite time lag (DTL) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT),
46IT Setting sets the pick-up current level for the element.
A number of shaped characteristics are provided. An inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic is
selected from IEC and ANSI curves using 46IT Char. A time multiplier is applied to the characteristic curves using
the 46IT Time Mult setting. Alternatively, a definite time lag delay (DTL) can be chosen using 46ITChar. W hen
Delay (DTL) is selected the time multiplier is not applied and the 46IT Delay (DTL) setting is used instead.
The 46IT Reset setting can ap ply a, definite time delayed or ANSI (DECAYING) reset.
The 46DT elements have a DTL characteristic. 46DT Setting sets the pick-up current and 46DT Delay the
follower time delay.
Operation of the negative phase sequence overcurrent elements can be inhibited from:
Inhibit 46IT A binary or virtual input.
Inhibit 46DT A binary or virtual input.
User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical log ic).
46IT-n
46IT Setting
46IT Char
46IT Time Mult
46IT Delay (DTL)
46IT Reset
Wn-IL1
Wn-IL2
Wn-IL3
NPS
>
c
46DT Setting
I2
General Pickup
En.
Pickup
Operate
46DT-n
46DT-n Delay
General Pickup
&
Inhibit 46IT-n
46IT-n Element
Enabled
Disabled
User Inhibit 46IT-n
&
Inhibit 46DT-n
46DT-n Element
Enabled
Disabled
User Inhibit 46DT-n
Figure 3-13 Logic Diagram: Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46NPS)
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 37 of 61
3.8 Current Prot ection: Under-Current (37, 37G)
Optionally two under-current elements are provided for both line and measured earth current, each can be
selected to either winding 1 or winding 2.
Each phase has an independent level detector and current-timing element. 37-n Setting sets the pick-up current.
An output is given after elapse of the 37-n Delay setting.
Operation of the under-current elements can be inhibited from:
Inhibit 37(G)-n A binary or virtual input.
Gn 37-n U/I Guarded Operation of the under current guard functio n.
Inhibit 37(G)-n A binary or virtual input.
User Inhibit 37(G)-n Reylogic (graphical log ic).
137-n
37-n Delay
37-n Setting
Enable
<
<
<
Wn IL1
Wn IL2
Wn IL3
37-n U/I
Guarded
Yes
<
37-n U/I Guard
Setting
&
<
<
1
Ig-n 37G-n
37G-n Delay
37G-n Setting
Enable
<
Inhibit 37-n
37-n Element
Enabled
Disabled
User Inhibit 37-n
&
&
Inhibit 37G-n
37G-n Element
Enabled
Disabled
User Inhibit 37G-n
Figure 3-14 Logic Diagram: Undercu rrent Detector (37, 37G)
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 38 of 61
3.9 Current Prot ection: Thermal Overload (49)
Optionally a phase segregated thermal overload element is provided, this can be selected to either winding 1 or
winding 2. The thermal state is calculated using the mea sure d True RMS current.
Should the current rise above the 49 Overload Setting for a defined time an output signal will be initiated.
Operate Time (t):-
()
×
×=
2
B
2
2
P
2
IkI II
tln
τ
Where
T = Time in minutes
τ = 49 Time Constant setting (minutes)
In = Log Natural
I = measured current
IP = Previous steady state current level
k = Constant
IB = Basic current, typically the same as In
k.IB = 49 Overload Setting (Iθ)
Additionally, an alarm can be given if the thermal state of the system exceeds a specified percentage of the
protected equ ipment’s thermal capacity 49 Capacity Alarm setting.
For the heating curve:
100%)e
(1
I
I
θ
τ
t
2
θ
2
×
=
Where: θ = thermal state at time t
I = measured thermal current
Iθ = 49 Overload setting (or k. IB)
The final steady state thermal condition can be predicted for any steady state value of input current where t >τ,
100%
I
I
θ2
θ
2
F×=
Where: θF = final thermal state before disconnection of device
49 Overload Setting Iθ is expressed as a multiple of the relay nominal current and is equivalent to the factor k.I B
as defined in the IEC255-8 thermal operating characteristics. It is the value of current above which 100% of
thermal capacity will be reached after a period of time and it is therefore normally set slightly above the full load
current of the protected device.
The thermal state may be reset from the fascia, a user logic reset or externally via a binary input.
Thermal overload protection can be inhibited from:
Inhibit 49 A binary or virtual input.
User Inhibit Reylogic (grap hi cal log ic).
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 39 of 61
Wn-IL149 Alarm
49 Trip
49 Time Constant
49 Overload Setting
Enable
cap alarm
trip
Wn-IL2
Wn-IL3
cap alarm
trip
cap alarm
trip
1
49 Capacity Alarm
1
&
Inhibit 49
49 Element
Enabled
Disabled
User Inhibit 49
Reset 49
User Reset 49 1
C
C
C
Figure 3-15 Logic Diagram: Thermal Overload Protection (49)
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 40 of 61
3.10 Voltage Prot ection: Over Fluxi ng (24)
Optionally, three over fluxing elements are provided2 x 24DT and 1 x 24IT Char elements.
The 24DT Elements have a DTL characteristic. 24DT Setting sets the pick-up level and 24DT Delay the follower
time delay. An output is given if the Volts/Hertz ratio is above setting for the duration of the delay. The 24DT-n
Hysteresis setting allows the user to vary the pick-up/drop-o f f ratio for the ele ment .
The 24IT Element has a user definable shape.
24Xn Point Setting sets the over fluxing (V/f) level for up to 7 user definable points.
24Yn Point Setting sets the operate time for each of th e defined points.
The 24IT Reset setting can ap ply a, definite time delayed reset.
Y (secs)
X - (V/f)
X0
Y0
X6
Y6
X0, Y0 point
defines
curve pick-up
X6, Y6 point
defines
curve cut-off
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Straight-line
between points
Figure 3-16 Inverse Over-fluxing Characteristic (24IT)
Operation of the ov er fluxing element s can be inhibited from:
Inhibit 24IT A binary or virtual input.
Inhibit 24DT-n A binary or virtual input.
User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical log ic).
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 41 of 61
General Pickup
24DT-2
24DT-2 Hysteresis
24DT-2 Delay
Enable
24DT-2 Setting
V
General Pickup
24IT-Char
24IT Char Point Yn
Enable
24IT Char Point Xn
24IT Char Reset
>
cPickup
trip
General Pickup
24DT-1
24DT-1 Hysteresis
24DT-1 Delay
Enable
24DT-1 Setting
>
&
Inhibit 24DT-1
24DT-1 Element
Enabled
Disabled
User Inhibit 24DT-1
&
Inhibit 24DT-2
24DT-2 Element
Enabled
Disabled
User Inhibit 24DT-2
&
Inhibit 24IT Char
24IT Char
Enabled
Disabled
User Inhibit 24IT Char
Figure 3-17 Logic Diagram: Overfluxing Elements (24)
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 42 of 61
3.11 Voltage Prot ection: Under/Over Voltage (27/5 9)
Optionally four under/over voltage elements are provided.
The relay utilises fundamental voltage measurement values for this function.
27/59-n Setting sets the pick-up voltage level for the element.
The sense of the element (undervoltage or overvoltage) is set by the 27/59-n Operation setting.
Voltage eleme nts are block ed if the measured volt age fal ls below the 27/59 U/V Guard setting.
An output is given after elapse of the 27/59-n Delay setting.
The 27/59-n Hysteresis setting allows the user to vary the pick-up/drop-off ratio for the element.
Operation of the under/over voltage elements can be inhibited from:
Inhibit 27/59-n A binary or virtual input.
27/59-n U/V Guarded Under voltage guard element.
User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic).
27/59-n U/V
Guarded
Yes
Vor> <
General Pickup
27/59-n
27/59-n Hysteresis
27/59-n Delay
Enable
27/59-n Setting
27/59-n Operation
<
27/59 U/V Guard
Setting
&
&
Inhibit 27/59-n
27/59-n Element
Enabled
Disabled
User Inhibit 27/59-n
Figure 3-18 Logic Diagram: Under/Over Voltage Elements (27/59)
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 43 of 61
3.12 Voltage Prot ection: Neutral Overvoltage (59N)
Optionally two Neutral Overvoltage (or Neutral Voltage Displacement) elements are provided.
One of the elements can be configured to be either definite time lag (DTL) or inverse definite minimum time
(IDMT),
59NIT Setting sets the pick-up voltage level (3V0) for the element.
An inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) can be selected using 59NIT Char. A time multiplier is applied to the
character ist ic curv es using the 59NIT Time Mult setting (M):
[ ]
=1
M
tVs
3Vo
op
Alternatively, a definite time lag delay (DTL) can be chosen using 59NITChar. When Delay (DTL) is selected the
time multiplier is not applied and the 59NIT Delay (DTL) setting is used instead.
An instantaneous or definite time delayed reset can be applied using the 59NIT Reset setting.
The second element has a DTL characteristic. 59NDT Setting sets the pick-up voltage (3V 0) and 59NDT Delay
the follower time delay.
Operation of the neutral overvoltage elements can be inhibited from:
Inhibit 59NIT A binary or virtual input.
Inhibit59NDT A binary or virtual input.
User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical log ic).
It should be noted that neutral voltage displacement can only be applied to VT arrangements that allow zero
sequence flux to flow in the core i.e. a 5-limb VT or 3 single phase VTs. The VT primary winding neutral must be
earthed to allow the flow of zer o sequen ce current.
59NIT
59NIT Setting
59NIT Charact
59NIT Time Mult
59NIT Delay (DTL)
59NIT Reset
59NDT
>
En.
59NDT Setting 59NDT Delay
V = 3Vo
General Pickup
General Pickup
En.
Pickup
Operate
&Inhibit 59NIT
59NIT Element
Enabled
Disabled
User Inhibit 59NIT
&
Inhibit 59NDT
59NDT Element
Enabled
Disabled
User Inhibit 59NDT
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 44 of 61
Figure 3-19 Logic Diagram: Neutral Overvoltage Element
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 45 of 61
3.13 Voltage Prot ection: Under/Over Frequency (81)
Optionally six under/over frequency elements are provided.
Frequency elements are blocked if the measured voltage falls below the 81 U/V Guard setting.
The sense of the element (under-frequency or over-frequency) is set by the 81-n Operation setting.
81-n Setting sets the pick-up frequency for the element.
An output is given after elapse of the 81-n Delay setting.
The 81-n Hysteresis setting allows the user to vary the pick-up/drop-off ratio for the element.
Operation of the under /ov er frequency elements can be inhibi ted from :
Inhibit 81-n A binary or virtual input.
81-n U/V Guarded Under voltage guard element.
User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic).
or
> <
General Pickup
81-n
81-n Hysteresis
81-n Delay
Enable
81-n Setting
81-n Operation
V
81-n U/V
Guarded
Yes
<
81-n U/V Guard
Setting
&
&
Inhibit 81-n
81-n Element
Enabled
Disabled
User Inhibit 81-n
Figure 3-20 Logic Diagram: Under/Over Frequency Detector (81)
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 46 of 61
Section 4: Control & Logic Functions
4.1 Quick Logic
The ‘Quick Logic’ feature allows the user to input up to 16 logic equations (E1 to E16) in text format. Equations
can be entered using Reydisp or at the relay fascia.
Each logic equation is built up from text representing control characters. Each can be up to 20 characters long.
Allowable chara cters are:
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 Digit
( ) Parenthesis
! ‘NOT’ Function
. ANDFunction
^ ‘EXCLUSIVE OR’ Function
+ ORFunction
En Equation (number)
Fn Function Key (number)
‘1’ = Key pressed, ‘0’ = Key not pressed
In Binary Input (number)
‘1’ = Input energised, ‘0’ = Input de-energised
Ln LED (number)
‘1’ = LED energised, ‘0’ = LED de-energised
On Binary output (number)
‘1’ = Output ener gis ed, ‘0’ = Output de-energised
Vn Virtual Input/Output (number)
‘1’ = Virtual I/O energised, ‘0’ = Virtual I/O de-energised
Example Showing Use of Nomenclature
E1= ((I1^F1).!O2)+L1
Equation 1 = ((Binary Input 1 XOR Function Key 1) AND NOT Binary Output 2)
OR
LED 1
When the equation is satisfied (=1) it is routed through a pick-up timer (En Pickup Delay), a drop-off timer (En
Dropoff Delay), and a counter which instantaneously picks up and increments towards its target (En Counter
Target).
The counter will either maintain its count value En Counter Reset Mode = OFF, or reset after a time delay:
En Counter Reset Mode = Single Shot: The En Counter Reset Time is started only when the counter
is first incremented (i.e. counter value = 1) and not for subsequent counter operations. Where En
Counter Reset Time elapses and the count value has not reached its target the count value is reset to
zero.
En Counter Reset Mode = Multi Shot: The En Counter Reset Time is started each time the counter is
incremented. W here En Counter Reset Time elapses without further count increments the count value
is reset to zero.
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 47 of 61
P.U. DELAY
D.O. DELAY
T
Counter Value 1 2
Increment
Counter
Equation Output 1 0 1 0 1 For Counter Target = 2
En = 1
Equation nP.U. DELAY D.O. DELAY Counter En = 1
Counter
= Target Value
Figure 4-1 Sequence Diagram showing PU/DO Timers in Quick Logic (Counte r Reset Mode Off)
When the count value = En Counter Target the output of the counter (En) = 1 and this value is held until the
initiating conditions are removed when En is instantaneously reset.
The output of En is assigned in the OUTP UT C ONFI G>OU TPUT MA TRIX menu where it can be programmed to
any binary output (O), LED (L) or Virtual Input/Output (V) combination.
Protection functions can be used in Quick Logic by mapping them to a Virtual Input / Output.
Refer to Chapter 7 Applications Guide for examples of Logic schemes.
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 48 of 61
Section 5: Supervisi on Functions
5.1 Circuit Breaker Failure (50BF)
Two CB Fail elements are provided one element per winding.
Each circuit breaker fail function has two time delayed outputs that can be used for combinations of re-tripping or
back-tripping. CB Fail outputs are given after elapse of the 50BF-n-1 Delay or 50BF-n-2 Delay settings. The two
timers run concurrently.
The circuit breaker fail protection time delays are initiated either from:
An output Trip Contact of the relay (MENU: OUTPUT CONFIG\BINARY OUTPUT CONFIG\CBn Trip
Contacts), or
A binary or virtual input assigned to 50BF-n Ext Trip (MENU: INPUT CONF IG\INPUT MATRI X\50BF Ext
Trip).
A binary or virtual input assigned to 50BF-n Mech Trip (MENU: INPUT C ONFIG\I NPU T MA TRI X\ 50BF-
n Mech Trip).
CB Fail outputs will be issued providing any of the 3 phase currents are above the 50BF-n Setting or the current
in the fourth CT is above 50BF-n-I4 for longer than the 50BF-n-n Delay setting, or for a mechanical protection trip
the circuit breaker is still closed when the 50BF-n-n Delay setting has expired indicating that the fault has not
been cleared.
Both 50BF-n-1 and 50BF-n-2 can be mapped to any output contact or LED.
If the 50BF-n CB Faulty input (MENU: INPUT CONFIG\INPUT MATRIX\CB Faulty) is energised when a CB trip
is given the time delays 50BF-n-n Delay will be by-passed a nd the output giv en immediately.
Operation of the CB Fail elements can be inhibited from:
Inhibit 50BF-n A binary or virtual input.
User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical log ic).
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 49 of 61
Trip Contact
50BF-n-1
50BF-n-2
1
Wn-IL1 >
50BF-n Setting
50BF-n Element
Enabled
Disabled
50BF-n-1 Delay
50BF-n-2 Delay
Inhibit 50BF-n
&
&
50BF-n Ext Trip
Wn-IL3
Wn-IL2
&
50BF-n CB Faulty
1
1
CB-n Closed
1
50BF-n Mech Trip
&
Ig-n >
50BF-n-I4 Setting
1
&
&
&
User Inhibit 50BF-n
Figure 5-1 Logic Diagram: Circuit Breaker Fail Protection (50BF)
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 50 of 61
5.2 Trip/Close Circuit Supervision (74TCS/74CCS)
The relay provides six trip and six close circuit supervision elements, all elements are identical in operation and
independent from each other allowing 6 trip and 6 close circuits to be monitored.
One or more binary inputs can be mapped to 74TCS-n/74CCS-n. The inputs are connected into the trip circuit
such that at least one input is energised when the trip circuit wiring is intact. If all mapped inputs become de-
energised, due to a break in the trip circuit wiring or loss of supply an output is given.
The 74TCS-n Delay or 74CCS-n Delay setting prevents failure being incorrectly indicated during circuit breaker
operation. This delay should be greater than the operating time of the circuit breaker.
The use of one or two binary inputs mapped to the same Circuit Supervision element (e.g. 74TCS-n) allows the
user to realise several alternative monitoring schemes see ‘Applications Guide’.
74TCS-n
Disabled
Enabled &
74TCS-n
74TCS-n
User Inhibit 74TCS-n
74TCS-n Delay
&
74TCS
Notes
For details of data communications points refer to Technical Manual, Chapter 4 (Data
Communications).
For details of user logic inputs and outputs refer to the relevant Reydisp Manager template.
Figure 5-2 Logic Diagram: Trip Circuit Supervision Feature (74TCS)
CCS-n
Enabled
Disabled
&
74CCS-n
74CCS-n Delay
1
74CCS-n NOTE: Diagram shows two binary inputs mapped
to the same Close Circuit Supervision element
74CCS-n
Figure 5-3 Logic Diagram: Close Circuit Supervision Feature (74CCS)
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 51 of 61
5.3 Inrush Detector (81HBL2)
Inrush detector elements monitor the line currents.
The inrush detector can be used to block the operation of selected elements during transformer magnetising
inrush conditions.
The 81HBL2 Bias setting allows the user to select between Phase, Sum and Cross meth ods of measur e ment:
Phase Each phase is inhibited separately.
Sum With this method the square root of the sum of the squares of the second harmonic in each
phase is compared to each operate curre nt indiv id ually.
Cross All phases are inhibited when any phase detects an inrush condition.
An output is initiated where the measured ratio of second harmonic to fundamental current component content is
above the 81HBL2 setting. An LED assigned to this function operates instantaneously, whereas an output relay
assigned to this function operates after a 60ms time delay.
81HBL2 Element
Enabled
Disabled
IL1
IL2
IL3
81HBL2 Bias
L2 81HBL2
81HBL2 Setting
c
>
>
>
L1 81HBL2
L3 81HBL2
>181 HBL2
Figure 5-4 Logic Diagram: Inrush Detector Feature (81HBL2)
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 52 of 61
5.4 Over Fluxing Detector (81HBL5)
Over fluxing detector elements monitor the line currents.
The over fluxing detector can be used to block the operation of differential protection (87BD/ 87HS) elements.
The 81HBL5 Bias setting allows the user to select between Phase, Sum and Cross methods of meas urement:
Phase Each phase is inhibited separately
Sum The inrush current from each phase is summated and compared to each operate current
individually
Cross All phases are inhibited when any phase detects an inrush condition
An output is given where the measured fifth harmonic component content is above the 81HBL5 setting.
IL1
IL2
IL3
81HBL5 Bias
L2 81HBL5
81HBL5 Setting
c
>
>
>
L1 81HBL5
L3 81HBL5
81HBL5 Element
Enabled
Disabled
>181 HBL5
Figure 5-5 Logic Diagram: Overfluxing Detector Feature (81HBL5)
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 53 of 61
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 54 of 61
Section 6: Other Features
6.1 Data Com m unications
Two communication ports, COM1 and COM2 are provided as standard. RS485 connections are available on the
terminal blocks at the rear of the relay (COM1). A USB port, COM 2, is provided at the front of the relay for local
access using a PC.
Optionally, additional communication ports are available: -
2 x fibre optic communication serial ports with ST connectors (COM 3 and COM 4) plus 1 x IRIG B
1 RS232 serial port (COM 3) plus IRIG B
1 x RS485 serial port (COM 3) plus IRIG B
2 x Electrical Ethernet with RJ45 connectors IEC 61850 - (COM 3 and COM 4),
2 x Optical Ethernet Duplex LC connect or s IEC 618 50 - (COM 3 and COM 4).
Communication is compatible with Modbus-RTU, IEC60870-5-103 FT 1.2, DNP 3.0, and IEC60870-5-101
transmission and application standards for all serial ports and IEC 61850 for Ethernet ports.
Reydisp Manager provides the functionality of Reydisp Evolution and also provides project management of
multiple devices to allow engineering of IEC61850 projects
Communication with the relay from a personal computer (PC) is facilitated by the REYDISP EVOLUTION
software package. The program allows the transfer of relay settings, waveform records, event records, fault data
records, Instruments/meters and control functions. REYDISP EVOLUTION is compatible with IEC60870-5-103.
Data communications operation is described in detail in Chapter 4 of this manual.
6.2 IEC 61850 Communicat ions
The relay can optionally be provided with IEC61850 comms.
The 61850 comms can be user configured to provide HSR, PRP and RSTP operation.
For further details refer to the following publications:
IEC 61850 Model Implementation Conformance Statement (MICS)
IEC 61850 PIXIT, PICS, TICS
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS), Protocol Implementation Extra Information for
Testing (PIXIT) and Technical Issues Implementation Conformance Statement (TICS),
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 55 of 61
6.3 Maintenance
6.3.1 Output Matrix Test
The feature is available from the Relay fascia and allows the user to operate binary outputs or LEDs assigned to
relay functions.
Any protection function which is enabled in the setting menu will appear in the Output Matrix Test.
6.3.2 CB Counters
Four CB trip counters are provided:
CB1 Total Trip Count:
Increments on each trip command issued.
CB1 Delta Trip Count:
Additional counter which can be reset independently of the
Total Trip Counter. This can be used, for example, for
recording trip operations betw een visits to a substation.
CB2 Total Trip Count
As CB1
CB2 Delta Trip Count:
As CB1
The status of each counter can be viewed in the INSTRUMENTS mode.
Binary outputs can be mapped to each of the above counters, these outputs are energised when the
user defined Count Target is reached.
6.3.3 I2t CB Wear
CB1 and CB2 wear counters are also provided:
I2t CB1 Wear:
Provides an estimate of contact wear and maintenance
requirements.
The algorithm works on a per phase basis,
measuring the arcing current during faults. The I2t value at
the time of trip is added to the previously stored value and an
alarm is given when any one of the three phase running
counts exceeds the set Alarm limit . The t value is the time
between CB contacts separation when an arc is formed,
Separation Time, and the CB Clearance time.
I
2
t CB2 Wear:
As CB1
The status of each counter can be viewed in the INSTRUMENTS mode.
Binary outputs can be mapped to each of the above counters, these outputs are energised when the
user defined Alarm Limit is rea ched.
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 56 of 61
6.4 Data Storage
6.4.1 General
The relay stores three types of data records: relay event records, analogue/digital waveform records and fault
data records. These data records are backed up in non-volatile memory and are permanently stored even in the
event of loss of auxiliary d.c. supply voltage.
6.4.2 Event Records
The event recorder feature allows the time tagging of any change of state (Event) in the relay. As an event
occurs, the actual event condition is logged as a record along with a time and date stamp to a resolution of 1
millisecond. There is capacity for a maximum of 5000 event records that can be stored in the relay and when the
event buffer is full any new record will over-write the oldest. Stored events can be erased using the DATA
STORAGE>Clear Events setting.
The following ev ents are logg ed:
Change of state of Binary outputs.
Change of state of Binary inputs.
Change of Settings and Settings Group
Change of state of any of the control functions of the relay.
All events can be uploaded over the data communications channel(s) and can be displayed in the ‘ReyDisp
Evolution’ package in chronological order, allowing the sequence of events to be viewed. Events are also made
available spontaneously to an IEC 60870-5-103 or Modbus RTU compliant control system.
For a complete listing of events available in each model, refer to Technical Manual Chapter 4 ‘Data Comms’.
6.4.3 Waveform Records.
Waveform records provide a trace of the insta ntan eous magnitude of each analo gue inp ut chan nel and the status
of each binary channel i.e. each binary input, binary output, virtual I/O and LED, against time for the duration of
the record. The values are recorded at every digital sampling point used by the relay software.
Each recorded analogue waveform displays an input identifier, minimum value, maximum value and the
instantaneous values at both cursor positions (user variable). Each binary waveform displays the input/output
number and the initiating condition(s) e.g. external input or protection element.
Triggering of waveform storage is configured from the ‘Settings > DATA STORAGE > WAVEFORM STORAGE
menu. Triggering is automatically initiated from operation of any of the selected protection or control elements.
Waveform storage can also be triggered from the relay fascia, from a suitably programmed binary input or via the
data comms chann el(s) .
Waveforms are sampled at a rate of 32 samples per cycle.
The latest 100 records are stored, the most recent is waveform 1. Records are archived by the relay during
quiescent periods. The duration of each stored record is 1s, 2s, 5s or 10s. The percentage of waveform storage
prior to waveform triggering is user configurable. When the waveform archive buffer is full (i.e. 100 records are
stored) the triggering of a new waveform record causes the oldest record - waveform 100 to be overwritten.
Stored waveforms can be deleted from the relay fascia using the DATA STORAGE > Clear Waveforms setting or
via Reydisp.
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 57 of 61
6.4.4 Fault Data Records
Measured quantities for the last 100 relay trip fault records are stored with time and date of trip.
The HMI LCD can display the latest 10 fault records with time and date of trip, measured quantities and LED
status. The Max Fault Rec. Time setting sets the time period from fault trigger during which the operation of any
LEDs is recorded.
Records are triggered from operation of an output relay programmed as a ‘CBn Trip Contact’. The ‘Trip Alert’
feature must also be enabled.
To achieve accurate instrumentation values for the fault records when testing, ensure a drop off delay is applied
to the test set so that the injected quantities remain on for a short duration, typically 20ms, after the relay has
issued the trip output. This extended period of injection simulates the behaviour of the power system where
faulted conditions are present until CB operation.
Where examined together the event records and the fault records will detail the full sequence of events leading to
a trip.
Fault records are stored in a rolling buffer, with the oldest faults overwritten. The fault storage can be cleared with
the DATA STORAGE>Clear Faults setting.
The SYSTEM CONFIG > Trip Alert = Disabled setting allows the above to be switched off e.g. during
commissioning tests.
6.4.5 Demand
Maximum, minimum and mean values of line currents and voltage (where applicable) are available as instruments
which can be read in the relay INSTRUMENTS MENU or via Reydisp.
The DATA STORAGE > DEMAND DATA LOG > Data Log Period setting is used to define the time/duration
after which the instrument is updated. The updated value indicates the maximum, minimum and mean values for
the defined period.
The Gn Demand Window setting defines the maximum period of time over which the demand values are valid. A
new set of demand values is established after expiry of the set time.
The Gn Demand Window Type can be set to FIXED, PEAK or ROLLING.
When set to FIXED the maximum, minimum and mean values demand statistics are calculated over
fixed Window duration. At the end of each window the internal statistics
are reset and a new window is started.
When set to PEAK the maximum and minimum values within the Demand Window time setting is
recorded.
When set to ROLLING the max imum, minimum and me an va lues deman d stati sti cs are cal c ulate d over
a moving Window duration. The internal statistics
are updated when the window advances every Updated Period.
The statistics can be reset from a binary input or communication command, after a reset the update period and
window are immediately restarted.
6.4.6 Demand/Da ta Log
The Data log feature can be used to build trend and demand records.
Up to 10,080 values for each phase current (W1 and W 2) and voltage (where fitted) analogue are recorded. Each
recorded value consists of the mean value of the sampled data over the Data Log Period.
Stored Data Log records are retrieved using Reydisp.
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 58 of 61
6.5 Metering
The metering feature provides real-time data available from the relay fascia in the ‘Instruments Mode’ or via the
data communic atio ns inte rf ac e .
For a detailed description refer to Technical Manual Chapter 2 Se ttings and Inst ruments.
6.6 Opera ting Mode
The relay has three operating modes, Local, Remote and Out of Service. The following table identifies the
functions operation in each mode.
The modes can be selected by the following methods:
SYSTEM CONF IG>RELAY MODE setting, a Binary Input or Command
OPERATION REMOTE LOCAL OUT OF SE RV ICE
Control
Rear Serial Ports (when set as Remote)
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Rear Serial Ports (when set as Local)
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Fascia (Control Mode)
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
USB
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Binary Inputs
Setting Option
Setting Option
Enabled
Binary Outputs
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Reporting
Spontaneous
IEC 103
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
DNP3
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
General Interrogation
IEC 103
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
DNP3
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
MODBUS
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Changing of Settings
Rear Ports (when set as Remote)
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Rear Ports (when set as Local)
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Fascia
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
USB
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Historical Inf or mati on
Waveform Records
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Event Records
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Fault Informat ion
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Setting Information
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Table 6-1 Operating Mode
6.7 Control Mode
This mode provides convenient access to commonly used relay control and test functions. When any of the items
listed in the control menu are selected control is initiated by pressing the ENTER key. The user is prompted to
confirm the action, again by pressing the ENTER key, before the command is executed.
Control Mode commands are password protected using the Control Password function see Section 6.10.
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 59 of 61
6.8 Real Time Clock
Time and date can be set either via the relay fascia using appropriate commands in the System Config menu, via
the data comms channel(s) or via the optional IRIG-B input.
In order to maintain synchronism within a substation, the relay can be synchronised to the nearest second or
minute using the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, optional IRIG-B input or binary input.
The default date is set at 01/01/2000, this indicates that no date has been set. When editing the Time, only the
hours and minutes can be edited. The seconds are zeroed by pressing ENTER and the clock begins running.
The time and date are maintained while the relay is de-energised by a back up storage capacitor. The length of
time for which this data will be maintained will depend on such things as temperature, length of time in service,
etc. However the data will be maintained for a minimum of 1.8 days.
6.8.1 Time Synchronisation Data Comms
Where the data comms channel(s) is connected to a dedicated substation automation system the relay can be
time synchronised using the relevant command within IEC 60870-5-103 or optional DNP3.0 protocols. The time
can also be synchronised from ‘Reydisp Evolution’ which utili ses the communications support software.
6.8.2 Time Synchronisation Binary Input
A binary input can be mapped Clock Sync from BI. The seconds or minutes will be rounded up or down to the
nearest value when the BI is energised. This input is leading edge triggered.
6.8.3 Time Synchronisation IRIG-B (Optional)
A BNC connector on the relay rear provides an isolated IRIG-B time synchronisation port. The IRIG-B input is
compatible with a modulated 3-6 Volt signal and provides time synchronisation to the nearest millisecond.
6.9 Settings Gr oups
The relay provides eight groups of settings Group number (Gn) 1 to 8. At any one time only one group of
se ttings can be ‘active’ SYSTEM CONFIG>Active Group setting.
It is possible to edit one group while the relay operates in accordance with settings from another ‘active’ group
using the View/Edit Group setting.
Some settings are independent of the active group setting i.e. they apply to all settings groups. This is indicated
on the top line of the relay LCD where only the Active Group No. is identified. Where settings are group
dependent this is indicated on the top line of the LCD by both the Active Group No. and the View Group No.
being displayed.
A change of settings group can be achieved either locally at the relay fascia, remotely over the data comms
channel(s) or via a binary input. When using a binary input an alternative settings group is selected only whilst the
input is energised (Select Grp Mode: Level triggered) or latches into the selected group after energisation of the
input (Select Grp Mode: Edge triggered).
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 60 of 61
6.10 Password Feature
The relay incorporates two levels of password protection one for settings, the other for control functions.
The programmable password feature enables the user to enter a 4 character alpha numeric code to secure
access to the relay functions. The relay is supplied with the control password set to AAAA. The settings pa ssw or d
is supplied set to NONE, i.e. the password feature is disabled.
Passwords must be entered twice as a security measure against accidental change. Once a password has been
entered then it will be required thereafter to change settings or initiate control commands. Passwords can be de-
activated by using the password to gain access and by entering the password NONE. Again this must be entered
twice to de-activate the security system.
As soon as the user attempts to change a setting or initiate control the password is requested before any changes
are allowed. Once the password has been validated, the user is ‘logged on’ and any further changes can be
made without re-entering the password. If no more changes are made within 1 hour then the user will
automatically be ‘logged off’, re-enabling the password feature.
The Settings Password prevents unauthorised changes to settings from the front fascia or over the data comms
channel(s). The Control Password prevents unauthorised operation of controls in the relay Control Menu from the
front fascia.
The password validation screen also displays a numerical code. If the password is lost or forgotten, this code
should be communicated to Siemens Protection Devices Ltd. and the password can be retrieved.
Chapter 1) 7SR242 Duobias Description Of Operation
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 61 of 61
Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide
The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document, and in any model or article produced from it
(and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices
Limited. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form, in any data retrieval
system, without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited, nor shall any model or article be
reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent.
While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct, no liabili ty shal l be acc epte d
for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission, whether such error or omission is the result of
negligence or any other cause. Any and all such liability is disclaimed.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited
7SR242 Duobias
Multi-Function 2-Winding Transformer Protection Relay
Settings, Configuration & Instruments
Document Release History
This document is is sue 2017/08. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is:
2017/08 Software revision 2662H85001 R8c-7d
2013/01 Software revision 2662H85001 R7c-7b
2012/08 Addition of optional IEC 61850 communication protocol and Ethernet Int erfac e.
2010/06 Additional Comms modules option of (RS485 + IRIG-B) and (RS232 + IRIG-B) and typographical
revisions
2010/02 Document reformat due to rebrand
2010/02 Software revision 2662H80001 R4c-3
2008/07 Software revision 2662H80001R3d-2c.
2008/05 First issue
Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 2 of 22
Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 3 of 22
Contents
Section 1: Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 5
1.1 Relay Menus And Display ....................................................................................................................... 5
1.2 Operation Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 6
1.2.1 User Interface Operation ........................................................................................................... 6
1.3 Settings Display ...................................................................................................................................... 8
1.4 Instruments Mode ................................................................................................................................... 8
1.5 Fault Data Mode ................................................................................................................................... 16
Section 2: Setting the Relay Using Reydisp ........................................................................................................... 17
2.1 Physical Connection ............................................................................................................................. 17
2.1.1 Front USB connection ............................................................................................................. 17
2.1.2 Rear RS485 connectio n .......................................................................................................... 18
2.1.3 Optional rear fibre optic connection ........................................................................................ 18
2.1.4 Optional rear RS485 + IRIG-B connection .............................................................................. 19
2.1.5 Optional rear RS232 + IRIG-B connection .............................................................................. 19
2.1.6 Optional Rear EN100 Ethernet Module (COM3) ..................................................................... 20
2.1.7 Configuring Relay Data Communication ................................................................................. 21
2.1.8 Connecting to the Relay via Reydisp ...................................................................................... 22
APPENDIX 1 7SR242 Settings
List of Figures
Figure 1-1 Menu ................................................................................................................................................. 5
Figure 1-2 Fascia Contrast symbol .................................................................................................................. 5
Figure 1-3 Fascia of 7SR242 Relay .................................................................................................................... 5
Figure 1-4 Relay Identifier Screen .................................................................................................................... 6
Figure 1-5 7SR24 Menu Structure ...................................................................................................................... 7
Figure 1-6 Schematic Diagram: Current and Voltage Meters (in clud es o ption al func tion ali t y ) ......................... 12
Figure 2-1 USB connection to PC .................................................................................................................. 17
Figure 2-2 RS485 connection to PC ............................................................................................................... 18
Figure 2-3 Fibre Optic Connection to PC ...................................................................................................... 18
Figure 2-4 EN100 Ethernet Module .................................................................................................................. 20
Figure 2-5 PC Comms Port Allocation ........................................................................................................... 22
Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 4 of 22
Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 5 of 22
Section 1: Introduction
1.1 Relay Menus And Display
All relay fascias contain the same access keys although the fascias may differ in appearance from model to
model. The basic menu structure is also the same in all products and consists of four main menus, these being,
Settings Mode - allows the user to view and (if allowed via the settings mode password) change settings in the
relay.
Instruments Mode - allows the user to view the relay meters e.g. current, volt age etc.
Fault Data Mode - allows the user to see type and data of any fault that the relay has detected.
The menus can be viewed via the LCD by pressing the access keys as below,
Pressing CANCEL returns to the Relay Identifier screen
Relay Identifier
SETTINGS
MODE INSTRUMENTS
MODE FAULT DATA
MODE
TEST/
RESET TEST/
RESET TEST/
RESET
CONTROL
MODE
TEST/
RESET
Figure 1-1 Menu
LCD Contrast
To adjust the contrast on the LCD insert a flat nosed screwdriver into the screw below the contrast symbol,
turning the screw left or right decreases and increases the contrast of the LCD.
Figure 1-2 Fascia Contrast symbol
Figure 1-3 Fascia of 7SR242 Relay
Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 6 of 22
1.2 Operation Guide
1.2.1 User Interface Operation
The basic menu structure flow diagram is shown in Figure 1.2-2. This diagram shows the main modes of display:
Settings Mode, Instrument Mode, Fault Data Mode and Control Mode.
When the relay leaves the factory all data storage areas are cleared and the settings set to default as specified in
settings document.
When the relay is first energised the user is presented with the following message: -
Duobias 7SR242
_______________________________
ENTER to CONTROL
Figure 1-4 Relay Identifier Screen
On the factory default setup the relay LCD should display the relay identifier, on each subsequent power-on the
screen that was showing prior to the last pow er-off will be displayed.
The push-buttons on the fascia are used to display and edit the relay settings via the LCD, to display and activate
the control segment of the relay, to display the relays instrumentation and Fault data and to reset the output
relays and LED’s.
The five push-buttons have the following functions:
READ DOWN READ UP
These pushbuttons are used to navigate the menu structure and to adjust settings.
ENTER
ENTER
The ENTER push-button is used to initiate and accept setting changes.
When a setting is displayed pressing the ENTER key will enter the edit mode, the setting will flash and can now
be changed using the▲ or buttons. When the required value is displayed the ENTER button is pressed again
to accept the change.
When an instrument is displayed pressing ENTER will toggle the instruments favourite screen status.
CANCEL
CANCEL
This push-button is used to return the relay display to its initial status or one level up in the menu structure.
Pressed repeatedly will return to the Relay Identifier screen. It is also used to reject any alterations to a setting
while in the edit mode.
TEST/
RESET
This push-button is used to reset the fault indication on the fascia. When on the Relay Identifier screen it also
acts as a lamp test button, when pressed all LEDs will momentarily light up to indicate their correct operation. It is
also moves the cursor right ► when navigating through menus and settings.
Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 7 of 22
SETTINGS DISPLAY MODE INSTRUMENTS MODE FAULT DATA MODE
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
FUNCTION CONFIG
CT/VT CONFIGURATION
PHASE U/O VOLTAGE
U/O FREQUENCY
VOLTAGE PROTECTION
SUPERVISION
27/59-1
27/59-2
27/59-3
27/59-4
NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE 59NIT
59NDT
81-1
81-2
CB FAIL
TRIP CCT SUPERVISION
51-1
51-2
50-1
50-2
51N-1
51N-2
50N-1
50N-2
DERIVED E/F
MEASURED E/F 51G-1
51G-2
50G-1
50G-2
46IT
46DT
37-1
37-2
RESTRICTED E/F
NPS OVERCURRENT
UNDER CURRENT
THERMAL
CONTROL & LOGIC CB CONTROL
INPUT CONFIGURATION
OUTPUT CONFIGURATION
MAINTENANCE
DATA STORAGE
INPUT MATRIX
GENERAL ALARMS
BINARY INPUT CONFIG.
OUTPUT MATRIX
BINARY OUTPUT CONFIG
LED CONFIG
PICKUP CONFIG
CB COUNTERS
I2T CB WEAR
FAVOURITE METERS
CURRENT METERS
VOLTAGE METERS
FREQUENCY METERS
THERMAL METERS
MAINTENANCE METERS
GENERAL ALARM METERS
BINARY INPUT METERS
BINARY OUTPUT METERS
VIRTUAL METERS
MISCELLANEOUS METERS
7SR242 DUOBIAS
__________________________
ENTER to CONTROL
Fault n DD/MM/YY
CURRENT PROTECTION
DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION
OVERFLUXING 24DT-1
24DT-2
INRUSH DETECTOR
OVERFLUXING DETECTOR
COMMUNICATIONS
64H-1
64H-2
81-3
81-4
81-5
81-6
24IT
OVERFLUXING METERS
COMMUNICATION METERS
DIFFERENTIAL METERS
DEMAND METERS
PHASE OVERCURRENT
CONTROL MODE
CB1
E/F Protection
Set L or R
Set Remote
Set Service
Set Local
CB2
OPEN CIRCUIT
CLOSE CCT SUPERVISION
QUICK LOGIC METERS
QUICK LOGIC
37G-1
37G-2
46BC-1
46BC-2
Figure 1-5 7SR24 Menu Structure
Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 8 of 22
1.3 Settings Display
The Settings Mode is reached by pressing the READ DOWN ▼ button from the relay identifier screen.
Once the Settings Mode title screen has been located pressing the READ DOWN button takes the user into
the Settings mode sub-menus.
Each sub-menu contains the programmable settings of the relay in separate logical groups. The sub menus are
accessed by pressing the TEST/RESET button. Pressi ng th e button will scroll throu gh the s etti ngs, after the
last setting in each sub menu is reached the next sub menu will be displayed. If a particular sub menu is not
required to be viewed then pressing will move directly to the next one in the list.
While a setting is being displayed on the screen the ENTER button can be pressed to edit the setting value. If the
relay is setting password protected the user will be asked to enter the password. If an incorrect password is
entered editing will not be permitted. All screens can be viewed even if the password is not known.
While a setting is being edited flashing characters indicate the edit field. Pressing the or buttons will
display the valid field values. If these buttons are held on, the rate of scrolling will increase.
Once editing is complete pressing the ENTER button stores the new setting into the non-volatile memory. The
setting change is effective immediately unless any protection element is operating, in which case the change
becomes effective when no elements are operating.
Configuration and inspection of communications protocol data objects, text used for display in international
languages, graphical user logic and programming of user specific custom protection characteristics is not
possible from the fascia and pc based tools must be used if required.
The actual setting ranges and default values for each relay model can be found in the appendix to this section of
the manual.
1.4 Instruments Mode
The Instrument Mode sub-menu displays key quantities and information to aid with commissioning. The following
meters are available and are navigated around by using the ▲,▼and TEST/REST buttons.
Instrument
Description
FAVOURITE METERS
→to view
This allows the user to view his previously constructed list of
‘favourite meters’ by pressing TEST/RESET ► button and
the READ DOWN button to scroll though the meters added
to this sub-group
To construct a sub-group of favourite meters, first go to the
desired meter then press ENTER this will cause a message
to appear on the LCD ‘Add To Favourites YES pressing
ENTER again will add this to the FAVOURITE METERS
Sub-menu. To remove a meter from the FAVOURITE
METERS sub-menu go to that meter each in the
FAVOURITE METERS sub-menu or at its Primary location
press ENTER and the message ‘Remove From Favourites’
will appear press ENTER again and this meter will be
removed from the FAVO U RIT E M ETE RS sub-group.
The relay will poll through, displaying each of the meters
se lected in favourite meters, after no key presses have been
detected for a user settable period of time. The time is set in
the Setting menu>System Config>Favourite Meters Timer.
Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 9 of 22
DIFFERENTIAL METERS
→to view
This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are
associated with Current TEST/RESET ► allows access to
this sub -group
W1 Line
Ia 0.00xIn ----o
Ib 0.00xIn ----o
Ic 0.00xIn ----o
Displays Windin g 1 Input 3 Phase currents Nominal RMS
values & phase angles with respect to PPS voltage.
W2 Line
Ia 0.00xIn ----o
Ib 0.00xIn ----o
Ic 0.00xIn ----o
Displays Winding 2 Input 3 Phase currents Nominal RMS
values & phase angles with respect to PPS voltage.
W1 Relay
Ia 0.00xIn ----o
Ib 0.00xIn ----o
Ic 0.00xIn ----o
Displays Winding 1 relay currents Nominal RMS values &
phase angles with respect to PPS voltage.
W2 Relay
Ia 0.00xIn ----o
Ib 0.00xIn ----o
Ic 0.00xIn ----o
Displays Winding 2 relay currents Nominal RMS values &
phase angles with respect to PPS voltage.
Operate
Ia 0.00xIn
Ib 0.00xIn
Ic 0.00xIn
Displays the 3 phase operate currents’ relevant to the bia sed
differential (87BD) and highset differential (87HS) functions.
Restrain
Ia 0.00xIn
Ib 0.00xIn
Ic 0.00xIn
Displays the 3 phase restrain currents relevant to the biased
differential (87BD) function.
W1 1st Harmonic
Ia 0.00xIn
Ib 0.00xIn
Ic 0.00xIn
Displays W1 3 phase fundamental current components
Nominal RMS values.
W1 2nd Harmonic
Ia 0.00xIn
Ib 0.00xIn
Ic 0.00xIn
Displays W1 3 phase 2nd Harmonic current comp one nt s
Nominal RMS values.
W1 5nd Harmonic
Ia 0.00xIn
Ib 0.00xIn
Ic 0.00xIn
Displays W1 3 phase 5th Harmonic current components
Nominal RMS values.
W2 1st Harmonic
See above.
W2 2nd Harmonic
See above.
W2 5th Harmonic
See above.
Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 10 of 22
CURRENT METERS
→to view
This is the sub-group that incl u des all the mete rs that ar e
associated with Current TEST/RESET ► allows access to
this sub -group
W1 Primary
Ia 0.00kA
Ib 0.00kA
Ic 0.00kA
Displays the 3 phase currents Primary RMS values
W1 Secondary
Ia 0.00A
Ib 0.00A
Ic 0.00A
Displays the 3 phase currents Secondary RMS values
W1 Nominal
Ia 0.00xIn ----o
Ib 0.00xIn ----o
Ic 0.00xIn ----o
Displays the 3 Phase currents Nominal RMS values & phase
angles with respect to PPS voltage.
W1 Sequence
Izps 0.00xIn ----o
Ipps 0.00xIn ----o
Inps 0.00xIn ----o
Displays the 3 Phase currents Nominal RMS values & phase
angles with respect to PPS voltage.
W1 Derived Earth (In)
Ia kA
Ib A
Ic xIn
Displays the Earth currents derived from W1 line currents.
RMS values.
W2 Primary
See above.
W2 Secondary
See above.
W2 Nominal
See above.
W2 Sequence
See above.
W2 Derived Earth (In)
See above.
Measured Earth – 1 (Ig)
Ig 0.000kA
Ig 0.000A
Ig 0.000xIn
Displays the Earth currents for IG1. RMS values
Measured Earth – 2 (Ig)
Ig 0.000kA
Ig 0.000A
Ig 0.000xIn
Displays the Earth currents for IG2. RMS values
Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 11 of 22
VOLTAGE METERS
→to view
This is the sub-group that incl u des all the mete rs that ar e
associated with Voltage TEST/RESET ► allows access to
this sub -group
Voltage Meters
Pri (Ph-Ph) 0.00kV
Sec 0.00V
Nom 0.00xVn
Displays the Voltage RMS values
FREQUENCY METERS
→to view
This is the sub-group that incl u des all the mete rs that ar e
associated with Frequency TEST/RESET ► allows access
to this sub-group
Frequency 00.000Hz
Displays the power system frequency.
OVERFLUXING METERS
→to view
This is the sub-group that incl u des all the mete rs that ar e
associated with Over-fluxing. TEST/RESET ► allows access
to this sub-group
Overfluxing Meters
V/f V xVn
V/f xVn/fn
V/f 24IT %
Displays the over-fluxing values
THERMAL METERS
→to view
This is the sub-group that incl u des all the mete r s that are
associated with Thermal TEST/RESET ► allows access to
this sub -group
Thermal Status
Phase A 0.0%
Phase B 0.0%
Phase C 0.0%
Displays the thermal capacity
Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 12 of 22
Meas
Earth
1
W1
5
th
Harm
V
Nom.
V
Secy F
V
Prim
7SR242n-2aAnn-0CA0
W1
2
nd
Harm
ICT
ICT
W1
Ia
Line
W1
Ia
prim
W1
Ia
Nom.
W1
1
st
Harm
W1
Ia
secy
W1
I EF
Der.
W1
I
Seq.
Ia
Op.
Ib
Op.
Ic
Op.
W1
Rel.
Ia
W1
Rel.
Ib
W1
Rel.
Ic
W2
Rel.
Ia
W2
Rel.
Ib
W2
Rel.
Ic
W1
5
th
Harm
W1
2
nd
Harm
W1
Ib
Line
W1
Ib
prim
W1
Ib
Nom.
W1
1
st
Harm
W1
Ib
secy
W1
5
th
Harm
W1
2
nd
Harm
W1
Ic
Line
W1
Ic
prim
W1
Ic
Nom.
W1
1
st
Harm
W1
Ic
secy
Meas
Earth
2
W2
I EF
Der.
W2
I
Seq.
W2
5
th
Harm
W2
2
nd
Harm
W2
Ic
Line
W2
Ic
prim
W2
Ic
Nom.
W2
1
st
Harm
W2
Ic
secy
W2
5
th
Harm
W2
2
nd
Harm
W2
Ib
Line
W2
Ib
prim
W2
Ib
Nom.
W2
1
st
Harm
W2
Ib
secy
W2
5
th
Harm
W2
2
nd
Harm
W2
Ia
Line
W2
Ia
prim
W2
Ia
Nom.
W2
1
st
Harm
W2
Ia
secy
V/F
W1
Therm
W1
Therm
W1
Therm
W2
Therm
W2
Therm
W2
Therm
Ib
Rest.
Ia
Rest.
Ic
Rest.
Figure 1-6 Schematic Diagram: Current and Voltage Meters (includes optional functionality)
Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 13 of 22
MAINTENANCE METERS
→to view
This is the sub-group that incl u des all the mete rs that ar e
associated with Maintenance TEST/RESET ► allows
access to this sub-group
CB1 Manual Close
Last Close ms
CB1 Manual Open
Last Open ms
Displays the CB manual opening and closing times
CB2 Manual Close
Last Close ms
CB2 Manual Open
Last Open ms
Displays the CB opening and closing times
CB1 Total Trips
Count 0
Target 100
Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the CB
CB1 Delta Trips
Count 0
Target 100
Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the CB
CB2 Total Trips
Count 0
Target 100
Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the CB
CB2 Delta Trips
Count 0
Target 100
Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the CB
CB1 Wear
Phase A 0.00MA^2s
Phase B 0.00MA^2s
Phase C 0.00MA^2s
Displays the current measure of circuit breaker wear.
CB2 Wear
Phase A 0.00MA^2s
Phase B 0.00MA^2s
Phase C 0.00MA^2s
Displays the current measure of circuit breaker wear.
CB1 Trip Time
Trip Ti me ms
CB2 Trip Time
Trip Ti me ms
Displays the CB manual opening and closing times
Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 14 of 22
GENERAL ALARM METERS
→to view
This is the sub-group that incl u des all the mete rs that ar e
associated with the Binary inputs TEST/RESET ► allows
access to this sub-group
General Alarms
ALARM 1 Cleared
Displays the state of General Alarm
General Alarms
ALARM 2 Cleared
General Alarms
ALARM 3 Cleared
General Alarms
ALARM 4 Cleared
General Alarms
ALARM 5 Cleared
General Alarms
ALARM 6 Cleared
General Alarms
ALARM 7 Cleared
General Alarms
ALARM 8 Cleared
General Alarms
ALARM 9 Cleared
General Alarms
ALARM 10 Cleared
General Alarms
ALARM 11 Cleared
General Alarms
ALARM 12 Cleared
DEMAND METERS
→to view
This is the sub-group that includes Demand meters. Values
are available for user defined time periods. TEST/RESET
allows access to this sub-group
Voltage Demand
Displays maximum, minimum and mean value s
W1 I Phase A Demand
W1 I Phase B Demand
W1 I Phase C Demand
W2 I Phase A Demand
W2 I Phase B Demand
W2 I Phase C Demand
Frequency Demand
BINARY INPUT METERS
→to view
This is the sub-group that incl u des all the mete rs that ar e
associated with the Binary inputs TEST/RESET ► allows
access to this sub-group
BI 1-8 ---- ----
BI 9-13 ---- -
Displays the state of DC binary inputs 1 to 8 (The number of
binary inputs may vary depending on model)
Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 15 of 22
BINARY OUTPUT MET E RS
→to view
This is the sub-group that incl u des all the mete rs that ar e
associated with the Binary Outputs TEST/RESET ► allows
access to this sub-group
BO 1-8 ---- ----
BO 9-14 ---- -- Displays the state of DC binary Outputs 1 to 8. (The number
of binary outputs may vary depending on model)
VIRTUAL METERS
→to view
This is the sub-group that shows the state of the virtual status inputs in
the relay TEST/RESET ► allows access to this sub-group
V 1-8 ---- ----
V 9-16 ---- ----
Displays the state of Virtual Outputs 1 to 16 (The number of virtual
inputs will vary depending on model)
COMMUNICATION METE RS
→to view
This is the sub-group that incl u des all the mete rs that ar e
associated with Communications ports TEST/RESET
allows access to this sub-group
COM1
COM2
COM3
COM4
Displays which com ports are currently active
COM1 TRAFFIC
Tx1 0
Rx1 0
Rx1 Errors 0
Displays traffic on Com1
COM2 TRAFFIC
Tx2 0
Rx2 0
Rx2 Errors 0
Displays traffic on Com2
COM3 TRAFFIC
Tx3 0
Rx3 0
Rx3 Errors 0
Displays traffic on Com3
COM4 TRAFFIC
Tx4 0
Rx4 0
Rx4 Errors 0
Displays traffic on Com4
MISCELLANEOUS METERS
→to view
This is the sub-group that includes indication such as the
relays time and date, the amount of fault and waveform
records stored in the relay TEST/RESET ► allows access to
this sub -group
Date DD/MM/YYYY
Time HH:MM:SS
Waveform Recs 0
Fault Recs 0
This meter displays the date and time and the number of
Fault records and Event records stored in the relay.
The records stored in the relay can be cleared using the
options in the Settings Menu>Data Storage function.
Event Recs 0
Data Log Recs 0
Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 16 of 22
QUICK LOGIC METERS
→to view
E 1-8
E 9-16
E1 Equation 0
EQN = 0
TMR 0-0 = 0
CNT 0-1 = 0
En Equation
1.5 Fault Data Mode
The Fault Data Mode sub menu lists the time and date of the previous ten protection operations. The stored data
about each fault can be viewed by pressing the TEST/RESET button. Each record contains data on the
operated elements, analogue values and LED flag states at the time of the fault. The data is viewed by scrolling
down using the button.
Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 17 of 22
Section 2: Set ting the Relay Using Reydisp
Reydisp Evolution software provides a pc tool which can be used for programming of protection configuration and
settings and the mapping of hardware input and outputs using a graphical interface. It is supplied with additional
tools for configuration of serial communication protocol data objects, configuration of text for international
language support and programming of user specific time current curves. To configure the relay using a serial
communication port the user will need the following:-
PC with Reydisp Evolution Installed. (This can be download from our website www.siemens.com/energy and
found under the subm enu ‘Sof t w ar e’).
Configuration and download of IEC 61850 data and programming of graphical user logic requires the use of the
Reydisp Manager software which is supplied with online instructions and help and is not documented here.
2.1 Physical Conne ction
The relay can be connected to Reydisp via any of the communication ports on the relay. Suitable communication
Interface cable and converters are required depending which port is being used.
2.1.1 Front USB connection
To connect your pc locally via the front USB port.
Local
Engineer
Access
USB Type A
USB Data Cable
USB Type A
socket on PC
USB Type B
Figure 2-1 USB connection to PC
Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 18 of 22
2.1.2 Rear RS485 connection
Laptop computer
USB or 9 pin male
D connector
25 pin male D
connector
14
18
RS485 Screened
twisted pair Rear terminals
RS232 straight
through cable or
RS232 to USB
converter cable
Figure 2-2 RS485 connection to PC
2.1.3 Optional rear fibre optic connection
7SG244
Tx
Rx Tx
Rx
USB or 9 pin male
D connector
25 pin male D
connector
62.5/125µm fibre optic with ST
connectors
Laptop computer RS232 straight
through cable or
RS232 to USB
converter cable
Figure 2-3 Fibre Optic Connection to PC
Sigma devices have a 25 pin female D connector with the following pin out.
Pin
Function
2
Transmit Data
3
Received Data
4
Request to Send
5
Clear to Send
6
Data set ready
7
Signal Ground
8
Received Line Signal Detector
20
Data Terminal Ready
Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 19 of 22
2.1.4 Optional rear RS485 + IRIG-B connection
Laptop computer
USB or 9 pin male
D connector
25 pin male D
connector
B
A
RS485 Screened
twisted pair Rear Connector
RS232 straight
through cable or
RS232 to USB
converter cable
IRIG-B
COM 3
Gnd
Term
Figure 2.1-1 Additio nal (Op ti onal ) rear RS485 + IRIG-B connection to a PC
2.1.5 Optional rear RS232 + IRIG-B connection
Laptop computer
USB or 9 pin male
D connector
9 way D connector
RS232 cross-over
cable or RS232 to
USB converter
cable
IRIG-B
COM 3
Figure 2.1-2 Additio nal (Op ti onal ) rear RS232 + IRIG-B connection to a PC
Pin
Relay Function
1
Not Connected
2
Receive Data (RXD)
3
Transmit Data (TXD)
4
Outut Supply +5 V 50mA
5
Signal Ground (GND)
6
Input Supply +5 V 50mA
7
Linked to 8 (volts free)
8
Linked to 7 (volts free)
9
Output Supply +5V 50mA
Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 20 of 22
2.1.6 Optional Rear EN100 Ethernet Module (COM3)
The optional ethernet interface is primarily provided for support of IEC 61850 protocol. Support for IEC 870-5-103
is also provided over this interface to allow connection with Reydisp Evolution and Reydisp Manager software for
interrogation, editing and download of relay settings and other data. Ordering options are available with two R J45
electrical connectors or with two duplex LC fibre optic connectors.
Setting name Range Default Setting Notes
LAN Protocol OFF, IEC60870-5-103 IEC60870-5-103
If this setting is set to Off, access to relay data using Reydisp Evolution and Reydisp Manager software via the
Ethernet interface is not available.
Connections to the optional EN100 ethernet module are made on the rear underside of the relay.
Connections are made to either RJ45 sockets (electrical) or Duplex LC (fibre optic) connectors.
LED yellow
LED green
LED yellow
LED green
Ch 1Ch 2
Ethernet – EN100-E
EN100 Module – RJ45 Interface
Ethernet – EN100-O
Ch 1 Ch 2
EN100 Module – Duplex-LC Interface
Green LED (Physical Link)
Off – No link
On – Link present
Yellow LED (Activity)
Off – No traffic
On/flashing - Traffic
Figure 2-4 EN100 Ethernet Module
Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 21 of 22
2.1.7 Configuring Relay Data Communication
Using the keys on the relay fascia scroll down the settings menu’s into the ‘communications’ menu. All of the
below settings may not be available in all relay types. Reydisp software is compatible with IEC60870-5-103
protocol.
COM1-RS485 Port
COM2-USB Port (Front)
COM3 Optional Fibre Optic, RS485, RS232 or Ethernet Port
COM4 Optional Fibre Optic Port
LAN Optional Ethernet Ports
Setting name Range Default Units Notes
Station Address 0 … 65534 0
Address given to relay to
identify that relay from
others which may be using
the same path for
communication as other
relays for example in a fibre
optic hub
COM1-RS485 Protocol OFF, IEC60870-5-103,
MODBUS-RTU, DNP3 IEC60870-5-
103
COM1: Rear mounted
RS485 port
COM1-RS485 Mode Loca l,Rem ot e, Local or
Remote Remote
COM1-RS485 Baud
Rate
75 110 150 300 600 1200
2400 4800 9600 19200
38400 19200
COM1-RS485 Parity
NONE, ODD, EVEN EVEN
COM2-USB Protoc ol OFF, IEC60870-5-103,
MODBUS-RTU, ASCII,
DNP3
IEC60870-5-
103 COM2: Front USB port.
COM2-USB Mode Local,Remote, Local or
Remote Remote
COM3 Protocol OFF, IEC60870-5-103,
MODBUS-RTU, DNP3 IEC6-0870-5-
103
COM3: Optional rear
mounted connec tion
COM3 Baud Rate 75 110 150 300 600 1200
2400 4800 9600 19200
38400 57600 115200 19200
COM3 Parity
NONE, ODD, EVEN EVEN
COM3 Line Idle*
LIGHT ON, LI GHT OFF LIGHT OFF
COM3 Data echo*
ON, OFF OFF
COM4 Protocol** OFF, IEC60870-5-103,
MODBUS-RTU, DNP3 OFF
COM4: Optional rear
mounted Fibre Optic ST
connection
COM4 Baud Rate** 75 110 150 300 600 1200
2400 4800 9600 19200
38400 19200
COM4 Parity**
NONE, ODD, EVEN EVEN
COM4 Line Idle** LIGHT ON, LIGHT OFF LIGHT OFF
COM4 Data echo**
ON, OFF OFF
DNP3 Unsolicited
Events ENABLED, DISABLED DISABLED Setting is only visible when
a port protocol is set to
DNP3.
Chapter 2) 7SR242 Duobias Settings, Configuration & Instruments Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 22 of 22
Setting name Range Default Units Notes
DNP3 Destination
Address 0 … 65534 0 Setting is only visible when
a port protocol is set to
DNP3.
DNP3 Application
Timeout 5, 6 ... 299, 300 10s Seconds Setting is only visible when
a port Protocol is set to
DNP3
*Not applicable for RS485 or RS232 interface modules.
**Fibre Optic Module only
2.1.8 Connecting to the Relay via Reydisp
When Reydisp soft w ar e is running all av aila ble communication ports of the PC will automatically be detected.
On the start page tool bar open up the sub-menu File > Connect.
The ‘Communication Manager’ window will display all available communication ports. With the preferred port
highlighted, select the ‘Properties’ option and ensure the baud rate and parity match that selected in the relay
Data Comms settings. Select ‘Conne ct’ to initiate the relay-PC connection.
Figure 2-5 PC Comm s Port Allocation
Via the Relay > Set Address > Address set the relay address (1-254) or alternatively search for connected
devices using the Relay > Set Address > Device Map. The relay can now be configured using the Reydisp
software. Please refer to the Reydisp Evolution Manual for further guidance.
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document, and in any model or article produced from it
(and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices
Limited. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form, in any data retrieval
system, without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited, nor shall any model or article be
reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent.
While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct, no liability shall be accepted
for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission, whether such error or omission is the result of
negligence or any other cause. Any and all such liability is disclaimed.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited
7SR242 Duobias
Multi-Function 2-Winding Transformer Protection Relay
Performance Specification
Document Release History
This document is is sue 2017/08. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is:
2017/08 Software revision 2662H85001 R8c-7d
2015/11 7SR2424 data added section 1.1.3 Time multip lier sett ing s revised sections 2.5, 2.10, 2.11 and
2.12.
2014/04 Revision to sections 1.2.11 and 2.16.2
2013/01 Software revision 2662H85001 R7c-7b
2012/08 Minor corrections and addition of optional IEC 61850 communication protocol.
2012/02 Clarification made to differential protection operate times, sections 2.16.3 and 2.17.3
2010/06 Additional Comms modules option of (RS485 + IRIG-B) and (RS232 + IRIG-B) and typographical
revisions
2010/02 Document reformat due to rebrand
2010/02 Third issue. Software revision 2662H80001 R4c-3
2008/07 Second issue. Software revision 2662H80001R3d-2c.
2008/05 First issue
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 2 of 50
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 3 of 50
Contents
Section 1: Common Functions ................................................................................................................................. 7
1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................... 7
1.1.1 CE Conformity ........................................................................................................................... 7
1.1.2 Reference ................................................................................................................................. 7
1.1.3 Dimensio ns and Weights .......................................................................................................... 7
1.2 Energising Quantities .............................................................................................................................. 8
1.2.1 Auxiliary Power Supply ............................................................................................................. 8
1.2.2 AC Current ................................................................................................................................ 9
1.2.3 AC Voltage .............................................................................................................................. 10
1.2.4 Binary (Digital) Outputs ........................................................................................................... 11
1.2.5 Binary (Digital) Inputs .............................................................................................................. 11
1.3 Functional Performance ........................................................................................................................ 13
1.3.1 Instrumentation ....................................................................................................................... 13
1.3.2 Data Communication .............................................................................................................. 13
1.3.3 Real Time Clock ...................................................................................................................... 14
1.4 Environmental Performance .................................................................................................................. 15
1.4.1 General ................................................................................................................................... 15
1.4.2 Emissions................................................................................................................................ 16
1.4.3 Immunity ................................................................................................................................. 16
1.4.4 Mechanical .............................................................................................................................. 18
Section 2: Protection Functions ............................................................................................................................. 19
2.1 24 Over Fluxing ..................................................................................................................................... 19
2.1.1 Reference (24DT) ................................................................................................................... 19
2.1.2 Operate and Reset Level (24DT) ............................................................................................ 19
2.1.3 Operate and Reset Time (24DT) ............................................................................................. 19
2.1.4 Reference (24IT) ..................................................................................................................... 19
2.1.5 Operate and Reset Level (24IT) .............................................................................................. 19
2.1.6 Operate and Reset Time (24IT) .............................................................................................. 20
2.2 27/59 Under/Over Voltage .................................................................................................................... 21
2.2.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 21
2.2.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 21
2.2.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 21
2.3 37,37G Undercurrent ............................................................................................................................ 22
2.3.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 22
2.3.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 22
2.3.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 22
2.4 46BC Open Circuit ................................................................................................................................ 23
2.4.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 23
2.4.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 23
2.4.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 23
2.5 46NPS Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent ................................................................................... 24
2.5.1 Reference (46DT) ................................................................................................................... 24
2.5.2 Operate and Reset Level (46DT) ............................................................................................ 24
2.5.3 Operate and Reset Time (46DT) ............................................................................................. 24
2.5.4 Reference (46IT) ..................................................................................................................... 24
2.5.5 Operate and Reset Level (46IT) .............................................................................................. 24
2.5.6 Operate and Reset Time (46IT) .............................................................................................. 25
2.6 49 Thermal Overload ............................................................................................................................ 26
2.6.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 26
2.6.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 26
2.6.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 26
2.7 50 instantaneous overcurrent ................................................................................................................ 28
2.7.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 28
2.7.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 28
2.7.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 28
2.8 50N instantaneous Derived Earth Fault ................................................................................................ 29
2.8.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 29
2.8.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 29
2.8.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 29
2.9 50G Instantaneous Measured Earth Fault ............................................................................................ 30
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 4 of 50
2.9.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 30
2.9.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 30
2.9.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 30
2.10 51 Time Delayed Overcurrent ............................................................................................................... 31
2.10.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 31
2.10.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 31
2.10.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 32
2.11 51N Time Delayed Derived Earth Fault................................................................................................. 33
2.11.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 33
2.11.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 33
2.11.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 34
2.12 51G Time Delayed Measured Earth Fault ............................................................................................. 35
2.12.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 35
2.12.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 35
2.12.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 36
2.13 59N Neutral Voltage Displacement ....................................................................................................... 40
2.13.1 Reference (59NDT) ................................................................................................................. 40
2.13.2 Operate and Reset Level (59NDT) ......................................................................................... 40
2.13.3 Operate and Reset Time (59NDT) .......................................................................................... 40
2.13.4 Reference (59NIT) .................................................................................................................. 40
2.13.5 Operate and Reset Level (59NIT) ........................................................................................... 40
2.13.6 Operate and Reset Time (59NIT) ............................................................................................ 41
2.14 64H Restricted Earth Fault Protection ................................................................................................... 42
2.14.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 42
2.14.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 42
2.14.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 42
2.14.4 Harm onic Rejection ................................................................................................................. 42
2.15 81Under/Over Frequency ...................................................................................................................... 43
2.15.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 43
2.15.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 43
2.15.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 43
2.16 87 Biased Differential ............................................................................................................................ 44
2.16.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 44
2.16.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 45
2.16.3 Operate Time .......................................................................................................................... 45
2.17 87HS High-Set Differential .................................................................................................................... 46
2.17.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 46
2.17.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 46
2.17.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 46
Section 3: Supervision Functions ........................................................................................................................... 47
3.1 50BF Circuit Breaker Fail ...................................................................................................................... 47
3.1.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 47
3.1.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 47
3.1.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 47
3.2 74TCS/CCS Trip/Close Circuit Supervision .......................................................................................... 48
3.2.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 48
3.2.2 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 48
3.3 81HBL2 Inrush Detector........................................................................................................................ 49
3.3.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 49
3.3.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 49
3.3.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 49
3.4 81HBL5 Overfluxing Detector ............................................................................................................... 50
3.4.1 Reference ............................................................................................................................... 50
3.4.2 Operate and Reset Level ........................................................................................................ 50
3.4.3 Operate and Reset Time ......................................................................................................... 50
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 5 of 50
List of Figures
Figure 1-1: Binary Input Configurations Providing Compliance with EATS 48-4 Classes ESI 1 and
ESI 2 ................................................................................................................................................ 12
Figure 2-1 Thermal Overload Protection Curves .............................................................................................. 27
Figure 2-2 IEC IDMTL Curves (Time Multiplier=1) ............................................................................................ 37
Figure 2-3 ANSI IDMTL Operate Curves (Time Multiplier=1) ........................................................................... 38
Figure 2-4 ANSI Reset Curves (Time Multiplier=1) ........................................................................................... 39
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 6 of 50
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 7 of 50
Section 1: Commo n Functi ons
1.1 General
1.1.1 CE Conformity
This product is CE compliant to relevant EU directives.
1.1.2 Reference
1.1.2.1 Accuracy Reference Conditions
This product has been tested under the following conditions, unless specifically stated otherwise.
Parameter Value
Auxiliary supply Nominal
AC Voltage Nominal
AC Current Nominal
Frequency Nominal
Ambient temperature 20 °C
1.1.3 Dimensions and Weights
1.1.3.1 Dimensions
Parameter Value
Width 7SR2422, E8 case 208 mm
7SR2423, E10 case 260 mm
7SR2424, E12 case 312 mm
Height 177 mm
Depth behind panel
(including clearance for wiring and fibre) 241.5 m m
Projection (from front of panel) 31 mm
See appropriate case outline and panel drilling drawing, as specified in Diagrams and Parameters documen t, for
complete dimensional specifications.
1.1.3.2 Weights
Parameter Value
Net weight 7SR2422, E8 case 5.2 kg
7SR2423, E10 case 6.8 kg
7SR2424, E12 case 8.4 kg
Additional weights to the above (typical):-
Optional fibre optic, RS485 or RS232 communication interface: add 0.165 kg.
Optional EN100 Ether net co m muni cat ion int er fac e: add 0.5 kg.
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 8 of 50
1.2 Energising Qua ntities
1.2.1 Auxiliary Power Supply
1.2.1.1 Rating
Nominal Operating Range
VAUX 30, 48, 110, 220 VDC 24 to 290 VDC
1.2.1.2 Burden
Battery loading can be estimated from the following approximate figures:
Attribute Watts
30V 48V 110V 220V
Quiescent Relay (inc. ‘PROT HEALTHY’ LED) 6.0 5.7 5.0 4.9
Backlight 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3
LED - Red or Green) Each LED 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04
LED Yellow Each LED 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08
Binary Output Each Output 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
Optional F.O. / RS485 / RS232
Data Comms Interface 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Optional IEC 61850 Comms Interface 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 9 of 50
1.2.2 AC Current
Nominal Measuring Range
In 1, 5 A Phase and earth 80 x In
fn 50, 60Hz 47 to 62Hz
Note. 1 A and 5 A nominal inputs are user selectable on each model.
1.2.2.1 Burden
1.2.2.2 Thermal Withstand
Overload Period
Current
Phase and Earth
1A 5A
Continuous 3.0 x In
10 minutes 3.5 x In
5 minutes 4.0 x In
3 minutes 5.0 x In
2 minutes 6.0 x In
3 seconds 57.7A 202A
2 seconds 70.7A 247A
1 s econd 100A 350A
1 cycle 700A 2500A
Attribute
Value - Phase and Earth
1A 5A
AC Burden ≤ 0.1 VA ≤ 0.3 VA
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 10 of 50
1.2.3 AC Voltage
Nominal Operating Range
Vn 40 to 160 V Up to 270 V
fn 50, 60Hz 47 to 62Hz
1.2.3.1 Burden
Attribute Value
AC Burden ≤ 0.1 VA at 110 V
1.2.3.2 Thermal Withstand
Overload Period Voltage
Continuous 300 V RMS
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 11 of 50
1.2.4 Binary (Digital) Outputs
Contact rating to IEC 60255-0-2
Attribute Value
Carry continuously 5A AC or DC
Make and carry
(L/R 40 ms and V 300 V) for 0.5 s 20A AC or DC
for 0.2 s 30A AC or DC
Break
( 5 A and 300 V)
AC resistive 1250 VA
AC inductive 250 VA at p.f. 0.4
DC re sistive 75 W
DC inductive 30 W at L /R 40ms
50 W at L/R 10ms
Contact Operate / Release Time 6ms / 3ms
Minimum number of operations 1000 at maximum load
Minimum recommended load 0.5 W at minimum of 10mA or 5V
1.2.5 Binary (Digital) Inputs
Nominal Operating Range
VBI 19 VDC 17 to 290 VDC
88 VDC 74 to 290 VDC
1.2.5.1 Performance
Attribute
Value
Maximum DC current for
operation VBI = 19 V 1.5mA
VBI = 88 V 1.5mA
Reset/Operate voltage ratio 90 %
Response time < 7ms
Response time when programmed to energise
an output relay contact (i.e. include s output
relay operation) < 20ms
The binary inputs are opto couplers having a low minimum operate current and may be set for high speed
operation. W here a binary input is both used to influence a control function (e.g. provide a tripping function) and it
is considered to be susceptible to mal-operation due to capacitive currents, the external circuitry can be modified
to provide immunity to such disturbances.
To comply with EATS 48-4, classes ESI 1 and ESI 2, external components / BI pick-up delays are required as
shown in fig. 1-1.
To achieve immunity from AC interference, a BI pick-up delay of typically one-cy cle can be appli ed.
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 12 of 50
BI (19V)
ESI-1 30V DC Nominal
(24 – 37.5V Operative)
I
OP
> 10mA
470
1K5
48V DC Nominal
(37.5 – 60V Operative)
I
OP
> 10mA
1K6
1K5
110V DC Nominal
(87.5 – 137.5V Operative)
I
OP
> 25mA
2K0
560
ESI-2 30V DC Nominal
(24 – 37.5V Operative)
I
OP
> 20mA
220
820
48V DC Nominal
(37.5 – 60V Operative)
I
OP
> 20mA
820
820
110V DC Nominal
(87.5 – 137.5V Operative)
I
OP
> 50mA
1K2
330
BI DTL = 10ms
(10µF, 60V Capacitance discharge)
BI DTL = 10ms
(10µF, 150V Capacitance discharge)
BI (19V)
BI (19V)
BI (19V)
BI (19V)
BI (19V)
+
-
+
+
+
+
+
-
-
-
-
-
Resistor power ratings: 30V DC Nominal >3W
48V DC Nominal >3W
110V DC Nominal >10W (ESI- 1)
110V DC Nominal >20W (ESI-2)
Resistors must be wired with crimped connections as they may run hot
110V DC Nominal
(87.5 – 137.5V Operative)
I
OP
> 25mA
2K7
110V DC Nominal
(87.5 – 137.5V Operative)
I
OP
> 50mA
1K3
BI DTL = 10ms
(10µF, 150V Capacitance discharge)
BI (88V) BI (88V)
++
--
Figure 1-1: Binary Input Configurations Providing Compliance with EATS 48-4 Classes ESI 1
and ESI 2
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 13 of 50
1.3 Functional Performa nce
1.3.1 Instrumentation
Instrument Value Reference Typical accuracy
I Current 0.1In to 2.0In ± 1 % or ± 1 % In
V Voltage 0.1Vn to 1.2Vn ± 1 % or ± 1 % Vn
1.3.2 Data Communication
1.3.2.1 USB Data Communication Interface
Attribute Value
Physical layer Electrical
Connectors USB-Type B
1.3.2.2 Fibre optic Data Communication Interface (Optional Rear Mounted Port COM3 / COM4)
Attribute Value
Physical layer Fibre-optic
Connectors ST
TM
(BFOC/2.5)
Recommended fibre 62.5/125 µm glass fibre with ST connector
Optical wavelength 820nm
Launch power (into recommended fibre) -16 dBm
Receiver sensitivity -24 dBm
1.3.2.3 RS485 Data Communication Interface (Standard Rear Port)
Attribute Value
Physical layer Electrical
Connectors 4mm Ring Crimp
1.3.2.4 RS485 Data Communication Interface (Optional Rear Mounted Port COM3)
Attribute Value
Physical layer Electrical
Connectors 4-way Plug
1.3.2.5 RS232 Data Communication Interface (Optional Rear Mounted Port COM3))
Attribute Value
Physical layer Electrical
Connectors 9-way D-plug
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 14 of 50
1.3.2.6 Fibre Optic Ethernet Data Communication Interface (IEC 61850 Option)
Attribute Value
Physical Layer Fibre Optic
Connectors Duplex LC 100BaseF in acc. With IEEE802.3
Recommended Fibre 62.5/125 μm glass fibre with Duplex-LC connector
Transmission Speed 100MBit/s
Optical Wavelengt h 1300nm
Bridgeable distance 2km
1.3.2.7 Electrical Ethernet Data Communication Interface (IEC 61850 Option)
Attribute Value
Physical Layer Electrical
Connectors RJ45 100BaseF in acc. W ith IEEE802.3
Transmission Speed 100MBit/s
Test Voltage (with regard to socket) 500 VAC 50 Hz
Bridgeable distance 20m
1.3.3 Real Time Clock
1.3.3.1 Internal Clock
The specification below applies only while no external synchronisation signal (e.g. IRIG-B, IEC 60870-5-103) is
being received.
Attribute Value
Accuracy (-40 to +85oC) ± 3.5 ppm (No auxiliary supply connected)
± 100 ppm (Auxiliary supply connected)
1.3.3.2 IRIG-B
Attribute
Value
Connector BNC
Signal Type IRIG-B 120, 122 or 123
Applied signal level minimum 3 V, maximum 6 V, peak-to-peak
Signal : carrier ratio 3
Input Impedance 4k Ohms Approx.
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 15 of 50
1.4 Environmental Perf ormance
1.4.1 General
1.4.1.1 Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1/2
Type
Level
Operating range -10 °C to +55 °C
Storage range -25 °C to +70 °C
1.4.1.2 Humidity
IEC 60068-2-78
Type
Level
Operational t est 56 days at 40 °C and 93 % relative humidity
1.4.1.3 Transient Overvoltage
IEC 60255-5
Type Level
Between all terminals and earth, or
between any two independent circuits 5.0 kV, 1.2/50 µs 0.5j
1.4.1.4 Insulation
IEC 60255-5
Type
Level
Between any terminal and earth 2.0 kV AC RMS for 1 min
Between indepen dent cir cui ts
Across normally open contacts 1.0 kV AC RMS for 1 min
1.4.1.5 Enclosure Protection
IEC 60529
Type Level
Installed with cover on IP 51 from front
Installed with cover removed IP 20 from front
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 16 of 50
1.4.2 Emissions
IEC 60255-25
1.4.2.1 Radiated Radio Frequency
Type Limits at 10 m, Quasi-peak
30 to 230 MHz 40 dB(µV/m)
230 to 10000 MHz 47 dB(µV/m)
1.4.2.2 Conducted Radio Frequency
Type Limits
Quasi-peak Average
0.15 to 0.5 MHz 79 dB(µV) 66 dB(µV)
0.5 to 30 MHz 73 dB(µV) 60 dB(µV)
1.4.3 Immunity
1.4.3.1 Auxiliary DC Supply Variation
Quantity
Value
Allowable super im pos ed ac co mpon ent 12% of DC voltage
Allowable breaks/dips in supply
(collapse to zero from nominal voltage) 20ms
1.4.3.2 High Frequency Disturbance
IEC 60255-22-1
Type
Level
Variation
Case, Aux Power & I/O common (longitudi nal) mo de 2.5 kV 10 %
Case, Aux Power & I/O Series (transver se) mod e 1.0 kV
RS485 Metallic Comms 1.0kV No data loss
1.4.3.3 Electrostatic Discharge
IEC 60255-22-2 Class IV
Type Level Variation
Contact discharge 8.0 kV 5 %
1.4.3.4 Radiated Immunity
IEC 60255-22-3 Class III
Type Level Variation
80 MHz to 1000 MHz 10 V/m 5 %
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 17 of 50
1.4.3.5 Electrical Fast Transient / Burst Immunity
IEC 60255-22-4 Class A (20 02)
Type
Level
Variation
Case, Aux Power & I/O 4.0 kV 10 %
RS485 Metallic Comms 2.0 kV No data loss
1.4.3.6 Surge Immunity
IEC 60255-22-5, IEC 61000-4-5
Type Level Variation
Analog Inputs Line to Earth 4.0 kV
10 %
Case, Aux Power & I/O Line to Earth 2.0 kV
Analog Inputs Lin e to Line 1.0 kV
Case, Aux Power & I/O Line to Line 1.0 kV*
RS485 Comms port Line to Earth 1.0 kV No data loss
* Note 45ms pick up delay applied to binary inputs
1.4.3.7 Conducted Radio Frequency Interference
IEC 60255-22-6
Type Level Variation
0.15 to 80 MHz 10 V 5 %
1.4.3.8 Magnetic Field with Power Frequency
IEC 6100-4-8 Level 5
100A/m, (0.126mT) continuous
50Hz
1000A/m, (1.26mT) for 3s
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 18 of 50
1.4.4 Mechanical
1.4.4.1 Vibration (Sinusoidal)
IEC 60255-21-1 Class I
Type Level Variation
Vibration response 0.5 gn 5 %
Vibration endurance 1.0 gn
1.4.4.2 Shock and Bump
IEC 60255-21-2 Class I
Type
Level
Variation
Shock response 5 gn, 11 ms
5 %
Shock withstand 15 gn, 11 ms
Bump test 10 gn, 16 ms
1.4.4.3 Seismic
IEC 60255-21-3 Class I
Type Level Variation
Seismic response 1 gn 5 %
1.4.4.4 Mechanical Classification
Type Level
Durability
> 106 operations
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 19 of 50
Section 2: Prot ection Functions
2.1 24 Over Fluxing
2.1.1 Reference (24DT)
Parameter Value
V/fs Setting 0.10, 0.11… 2.0 x Nominal Voltage / Nominal Frequency
Hyst Hysteresis setting 0, 0.1… 80.0%
td Delay setting 0.00, 0.01…20.00, 20.50… 100, 101… 1000, 1010… 10000,
10100… 14400 s
2.1.2 Operate and Reset Level (24DT)
Attribute Value
V/fop Operate level 100% x V/fs, ± 2 % or ± 0.02
Reset level 95% of V/fop
Repeatability ± 1 %
Variation -10 °C to +55 °C 5 %
2.1.3 Operate and Reset Time (24DT)
Attribute
Value
tbasic Element basic operate time 0.9 to 1.1 x V/fs: 400 ms ± 200ms
0.9 to 2.0 x V/fs: 320 ms ± 200ms
top Operate time following delay tbasic + td, ± 1 % or ± 200ms
Repeatability ± 1 %
Disengaging time < 250ms
2.1.4 Reference (24IT)
Parameter Value
treset Reset sett ing 0, 1… 1000 s
2.1.5 Operate and Reset Level (24IT)
Attribute Value
V/fop Operate level 100% x V/fs, ± 2 % or ± 0.02
Reset level 95% of V/fop
Repeatability ± 1 %
Variation -10 °C to +55 °C 5 %
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 20 of 50
2.1.6 Operate and Reset Time (24IT)
Attribute Value
tbasic Element basic operate time 500ms ± 300ms
top Operate time following delay tbasic + td, ± 1 % or ± 2s
Repeatability ± 1 %
Disengaging time < 250ms
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 21 of 50
2.2 27/59 Under/Over Voltage
2.2.1 Reference
Parameter Value
V
s
Setting
5, 5.5…200V
hyst Hysteresis setting 0, 0.1… 80.0%
td Delay setting 0.00, 0.01…20.00, 20.50… 100, 101… 1000, 1010…
10000, 10100… 14400 s
2.2.2 Operate and Reset Level
Attribute Value
Vop Operate level 100 % Vs, ± 1 % or ±0.25V
Reset level Overvoltage = (100 % - hyst) x Vop, ± 1 %
Undervoltage = (100 % + hyst) x Vop, ± 1 %
Repeatability ± 1 %
Variation -10 °C to +55 °C 5 %
fnom - 3 Hz to fnom + 2 Hz
5 %
2.2.3 Operate and Reset Time
Attribute Value
tbasicE Element basic
operate time Overvoltage 0 to 1.1 x Vs: 73 ms ± 10ms
0 to 2.0 xVs: 63 ms ± 10ms
Undervoltage 1.1 to 0.5 xVs: 58 ms ± 10ms
top Operate time following delay tbasic + td, ± 1 % or ± 10ms
Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 10ms
Disengaging time < 80 ms
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 22 of 50
2.3 37,37G Undercurrent
2.3.1 Reference
Parameter Value
Is 37-n Setting 0.05, 0.10…5.0 xIn
td 37-n Delay setting 0.00, 0.01…20.00, 20.50… 100, 101… 1000, 1010…
10000, 10100… 14400 s
Is 37-n U/I Guard Setting 0.05, 0.10…5.0 xIn
Parameter Value
Is 37G-n Setting 0.05, 0.10… 5.0 xIn
td 37G-n Delay sett ing 0.00, 0.01…20.00, 20.50… 100, 101… 1000, 1010…
10000, 10100… 14400 s
2.3.2 Operate and Reset Level
Attribute Value
Iop Operate level 100 % Is, ± 5 % or ± 1% In
Reset level 105 % Iop
Repeatability ± 1 %
Variation -10 °C to +55 °C 5 %
fnom - 3 Hz to fnom + 2 Hz 5 %
2.3.3 Operate and Reset Time
Attribute Value
tbasic Element basic operate time 1.1 to 0.5 xIs: 35 ms, ± 10ms
top Operate time following delay tbasic + td, ± 1 % or ± 10ms
Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 10ms
Overshoot time < 40 ms
Disengaging time < 60 ms
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 23 of 50
2.4 46BC Ope n C ircuit
2.4.1 Reference
Parameter
Value
Iset NPS to PPS ratio 20,21…100%
tf Delay setting 0.03,04,20 .0,2 0. 1, 100, 101,1000,101 0…..14 400 s
Is 46BC-n U/I Guard Setting 0.05, 0.10…5.0 xIn
2.4.2 Operate and Reset Level
Attribute
Value
Icurr Operate level: NPS to PPS ratio 100 % Iset ± 5 %
Reset level 90 % Ic urr , ± 5 %
Repeatability ± 1 %
Variation
-10 °C to +55 °C 5 %
f
nom
- 3 Hz to f
nom
+ 2 Hz
harmonics to fcutoff
5 %
Attribute Value
Iop Operate level: 46BC-n U/I Guard Setting 100 % Is, ± 5 % or ± 1% In
Reset level 105 % Iop
Repeatability ± 1 %
Variation -10 °C to +55 °C 5 %
fnom - 3 Hz to fnom + 2 Hz 5 %
2.4.3 Operate and Reset Time
Attribute
Value
tbasic
Basic operate time
1x In to 0 A
40 ms
Operate time
tf + tbasic, ± 1 % or ± 20ms
Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 20ms
Variation fnom - 3 Hz to fnom + 2 Hz
harmonics to fcutoff 5 %
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 24 of 50
2.5 46NPS Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent
2.5.1 Reference (46DT)
Parameter Value
Is Setting 0.05, 0.06... 4.0xIn
td Delay setting 0.00, 0.01…20.00, 20.50… 100, 101… 1000, 1010…
10000, 10100… 14400 s
2.5.2 Operate and Reset Level (46DT)
Attribute
Value
Iop Operate level 100 % Is, ± 5 % or ± 1% In
Reset level 95 % Iop
Repeatability ± 1 %
Transient overreach
(X/R 100) -5 %
Variation -10 °C to +55 °C 5 %
fnom - 3 Hz to fnom + 2 Hz 5 %
2.5.3 Operate and Reset Time (46DT)
Attribute Value
tbasic Element basic operate time 0 to 2 xIs: 40 ms, ± 10ms
0 to 5 xIs: 30 ms, ± 10ms
top Operate time following delay tbasic + td, ± 1 % or ± 10ms
Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 10ms
Overshoot time <40 ms
Disengaging time < 60 ms
2.5.4 Reference (46IT)
Parameter Value
char Characteristic setting IEC-NI, -VI, -EI, -LTI; ANSI-MI, -VI, -EI; DTL
Tm Time Multiplier setting 0.025, 0.030… 1.6, 1.7… 5, 6… 100
Is Setting 0.05, 0.06… 2.5xIn
td Delay setting 0, 0.01… 20 s
tres Reset sett ing ANSI DECAYING, 0, 1… 60 s
2.5.5 Operate and Reset Level (46IT)
Attribute Value
Iop Operate level 105 % Is, ± 4 % or ± 1% In
Reset level 95 % Iop
Repeatability ± 1 %
Variation -10 °C to +55 °C 5 %
fnom - 3 Hz to fnom + 2 Hz 5 %
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 25 of 50
2.5.6 Operate and Reset Ti me (46IT)
Attribute Value
Starter operate time ( 2xIs) 35 ms, ± 10ms
top Operate time
char = IEC-NI,
IEC-VI,
IEC-EI,
IEC-LTI
[ ]
Tm
K
t
Is
I
op
×
=1
α
, ± 5 % absolute or ± 50 ms,
for char = IEC-NI : K = 0.14, α = 0.02
IEC-VI : K = 13.5, α = 1.0
IEC-EI : K = 80.0, α = 2.0
IEC-LTI : K = 120.0, α = 1.0
char = ANSI-MI,
ANSI-VI,
ANSI-EI
[ ]
TmB
A
t
P
Is
I
op
×
+
=1
, ± 5 % absolute or ± 50 ms,
for char = ANSI-MI : A = 0.0515, B = 0.114, P = 0.02
ANSI-VI : A = 19.61, B = 0.491, P = 2.0
ANSI-EI : A = 28.2, B = 0.1217, P = 2.0
char = DTL td, ± 1 % or ± 20ms
Reset time ANSI DECAYING
[ ]
Tm
R
t
Is
I
res
×
=
1
2
, ± 5 % absolute or ± 50 ms,
for char = ANSI-MI : R = 4.85
ANSI-VI : R = 21.6
ANSI-EI : R = 29.1
tres tres, ± 1 % or ± 20ms
Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 20ms
Overshoot time < 40 ms
Disengaging time < 60 ms
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 26 of 50
2.6 49 Thermal Overload
2.6.1 Reference
Parameter Value
Is Overload setting 0.10, 0.11… 3 xIn
τ
Time constant setting 1, 1.5… 1000 min
2.6.2 Operate and Reset Level
Attribute
Value
Iol Overload level 100 % Is, ± 5 % or ± 1% In
Reset level 95 % Iol
Repeatability ± 1 %
Variation -10 °C to +55 °C 5 %
fnom - 3 Hz to fnom + 2 Hz 5 %
2.6.3 Operate and Reset Time
Attribute Value
top Overload trip operate time
( )
×
×τ= 2
2
2
P
2
I
II
ln
B
Ik
t
where IP = prior curr ent
± 5 % absolute or ± 100ms,
(Is: 0.3 3 x In)
Repeatability ± 100ms
Figure 2-1 shows the thermal curves for various time constants.
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 27 of 50
Figure 2-1 Thermal Overload Protection Curves
0.1
1
10
100
1000
10000
100000
012345678910
Current (multiple of setting)
Time
(sec)
τ = 1000 mins
τ = 100 mins
τ = 10 mins
τ = 1 min
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 28 of 50
2.7 50 instantaneous overcurrent
2.7.1 Reference
Parameter Value
Is Setting 0.05, 0.10… 25, 25.5… 50 xIn
td Delay setting 0.00, 0.01…20.00, 20.50… 100, 101… 1000, 1010…
10000, 10100… 14400 s
2.7.2 Operate and Reset Level
Attribute Value
Iop Operate level 100 % Is, ± 5 % or ± 1% In
Reset level 95 % Iop
Repeatability ± 1 %
Transient overreach
(X/R 100) -5 %
Variation -10 °C to +55 °C 5 %
fnom - 3 Hz to fnom + 2 Hz 5 %
2.7.3 Operate and Reset Time
Attribute Value
tbasic Element basic operate time 0 to 2 xIs: 35 ms, ± 10ms
0 to 5 xIs: 25 ms, ± 10ms
top Operate time following delay tbasic + td, ± 1 % or ± 10ms
Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 10ms
Overshoot time < 40 ms
Disengaging time < 50 ms
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 29 of 50
2.8 50N instantaneous Derived Earth Fault
2.8.1 Reference
Parameter Value
Is Setting 0.05, 0.10… 25, 25.5… 50 xIn
td Delay setting 0.00, 0.01…20.00, 20.50… 100, 101… 1000, 1010…
10000, 10100… 14400 s
2.8.2 Operate and Reset Level
Attribute Value
Iop Operate level 100 % Is, ± 5 % or ± 1% In
Reset level 95 % Iop
Repeatability ± 1 %
Transient overreach
(X/R 100) -5 %
Variation -10 °C to +55 °C 5 %
fnom - 3 Hz to fnom + 2 Hz 5 %
2.8.3 Operate and Reset Time
Attribute Value
tbasic Element basic operate time 0 to 2 xIs: 35 ms, ± 10ms
0 to 5 xIs: 30 ms, ± 10ms
top Operate time following delay tbasic + td, ± 1 % or ± 10ms
Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 10ms
Overshoot time < 40 ms
Disengaging time < 50 ms
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 30 of 50
2.9 50G Instantaneous Measured Earth Fault
2.9.1 Reference
Parameter Value
Is Setting 0.005…25.0 xIn
td Delay setting 0.00, 0.01…20.00, 20.50… 100, 101… 1000, 1010…
10000, 10100… 14400 s
2.9.2 Operate and Reset Level
Attribute Value
Iop Operate level 100 % Is, ± 5 % or ± 1% In
Reset level 95 % Iop
Repeatability ± 1 %
Transient overreach
(X/R 100) -5 %
Variation -10 °C to +55 °C 5 %
fnom - 3 Hz to fnom + 2 Hz 5 %
2.9.3 Operate and Reset Time
Attribute Value
tbasic Element basic operate time 0 to 2 xIs: 35 ms, ± 10ms
0 to 5 xIs: 25 ms, ± 10ms
top Operate time following delay tbasic + td, ± 1 % or ± 10ms
Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 10ms
Overshoot time < 40 ms
Disengaging time < 50 ms
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 31 of 50
2.10 51 Time Delayed Overcurrent
2.10.1 Reference
Parameter Value
Is Setting 0.05, 0.1… 2. 5 xIn
char Char acteristic setting IEC-NI, -VI, -EI, -LTI; ANSI-MI, -VI, -EI; DTL
Tm Time Multiplier setting 0.025, 0.030… 1.6, 1.7… 5, 6… 100
td Delay setting 0, 0.01… 20 s
tres Reset setting ANSI DECAYING, 0, 1… 60 s
2.10.2 Operate and Reset Level
Attribute Value
Iop Operate level 105 % Is, ± 4 % or ± 1% In
Reset level 95 % Iop
Repeatability ± 1 %
Variation -10 °C to +55 °C 5 %
fnom - 3 Hz to fnom + 2 Hz 5 %
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 32 of 50
2.10.3 Operate and Reset Time
Attribute Value
Starter operate time ( 2xIs) 20 ms, ± 20ms
top Operate time
char = IEC-NI,
IEC-VI,
IEC-EI,
IEC-LTI
[]
Tm
K
t
Is
I
op
×
=1
α
, ± 5 % absolute or ± 30 ms,
for char = IEC-NI : K = 0.14, α = 0.02
IEC-VI : K = 13.5, α = 1.0
IEC-EI : K = 80.0, α = 2.0
IEC-LTI : K = 120.0, α = 1.0
char = ANSI-MI,
ANSI-VI,
ANSI-EI
[ ]
TmB
A
t
P
Is
I
op
×
+
=1
, ± 5 % absolute or ± 30 ms,
for char = ANSI-MI : A = 0.0515, B = 0.114, P = 0.02
ANSI-VI : A = 19.61, B = 0.491, P = 2.0
ANSI-EI : A = 28.2, B = 0.1217, P = 2.0
char = DTL td, ± 1 % or ± 20ms
Reset time ANSI DECAYING
[]
Tm
R
t
Is
I
res
×
=
1
2
, ± 5 % absolute or ± 30 ms,
for char = ANSI-MI : R = 4.85
ANSI-VI : R = 21.6
ANSI-EI : R = 29.1
tres tres, ± 1 % or ± 20ms
Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 20ms
Overshoot time < 40 ms
Disengaging time < 50 ms
Figure 2-2 shows the operate times for the four IEC IDMTL curves with a time multiplier of 1.
Figure 2-3 and figure 2.4 show the ANSI operate and reset curves. These operate times apply to non-directional
characteristics. W here directional control is applied then the directional element operate time should be added to
give total maximum operating time.
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 33 of 50
2.11 51N Time Delayed Derived Earth Fault
2.11.1 Reference
Parameter Value
Is Setting 0.05, 0.1… 2. 5 xIn
char Char acteristic setting IEC-NI, -VI, -EI, -LTI; ANSI-MI, -VI, -EI; DTL
Tm Time Multiplier setting 0.025, 0.030… 1.6, 1.7… 5, 6… 100
td Delay setting 0, 0.01… 20 s
tres Reset sett ing ANSI DECAYING, 0, 1… 60 s
2.11.2 Operate and Reset Level
Attribute Value
Iop Operate level 105 % Is, ± 4 % or ± 1% In
Reset level 95 % Iop
Repeatability ± 1 %
Variation -10 °C to +55 °C 5 %
fnom - 3 Hz to fnom + 2 Hz 5 %
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 34 of 50
2.11.3 Operate and Reset Time
Attribute Value
Starter operate time ( 2xIs) 20 ms, ± 20ms
top Operate time
char = IEC-NI,
IEC-VI,
IEC-EI,
IEC-LTI
[]
Tm
K
t
Is
I
op
×
=1
α
, ± 5 % absolute or ± 30 ms,
for char = IEC-NI : K = 0.14, α = 0.02
IEC-VI : K = 13.5, α = 1.0
IEC-EI : K = 80.0, α = 2.0
IEC-LTI : K = 120.0, α = 1.0
char = ANSI-MI,
ANSI-VI,
ANSI-EI
[ ]
TmB
A
t
P
Is
I
op
×
+
=1
, ± 5 % absolute or ± 30 ms,
for char = ANSI-MI : A = 0.0515, B = 0.114, P = 0.02
ANSI-VI : A = 19.61, B = 0.491, P = 2.0
ANSI-EI : A = 28.2, B = 0.1217, P = 2.0
char = DTL td, ± 1 % or ± 20ms
Reset time ANSI DECAYING
[]
Tm
R
t
Is
I
res
×
=
1
2
, ± 5 % absolute or ± 30 ms,
for char = ANSI-MI : R = 4.85
ANSI-VI : R = 21.6
ANSI-EI : R = 29.1
tres tres, ± 1 % or ± 20ms
Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 20ms
Overshoot time < 40 ms
Disengaging time < 50 ms
Figure 2-2 shows the operate times for the four IEC IDMTL curves with a time multiplier of 1.
Figure 2-3 and figure 2.4 show the ANSI operate and reset curves. These operate times apply to non-directional
characteristics. W here directional control is applied then the directional element operate time should be added to
give total maximum operating time.
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 35 of 50
2.12 51G Time Delayed Measured Earth Fault
2.12.1 Reference
Parameter Value
Is Setting 0.005, 0.10… 1.0 xIn
Char Character istic setting IEC-NI, -VI, -EI, -LTI; ANSI-MI, -VI, -EI; DTL
Tm Time Multiplier setting 0.025, 0.030… 1.6, 1.7… 5, 6… 100
td Delay setting (DTL) 0, 0.01… 20 s
tres Reset sett ing ANSI DECAYING, 0, 1… 60 s
I Applied current (for
operate time) IDMTL 2 to 20 xIs
DTL 5 xIs
2.12.2 Operate and Reset Level
Attribute Value
Iop Operate level 105 % Is, ± 4 % or ± 1% In
Reset level 95 % Iop
Repeatability ± 1 %
Variation -10 °C to +55 °C 5 %
fnom - 3 Hz to fnom + 2 Hz 5 %
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 36 of 50
2.12.3 Operate and Reset Time
Attribute Value
Starter operate time ( 2xIs) 20 ms, ± 20ms
top Operate time
char = IEC-NI,
IEC-VI,
IEC-EI,
IEC-LTI
[]
Tm
K
t
Is
I
op
×
=1
α
, ± 5 % absolute or ± 30 ms,
for char = IEC-NI : K = 0.14, α = 0.02
IEC-VI : K = 13.5, α = 1.0
IEC-EI : K = 80.0, α = 2.0
IEC-LTI : K = 120.0, α = 1.0
char = ANSI-MI,
ANSI-VI,
ANSI-EI
[ ]
TmB
A
t
P
Is
I
op
×
+
=1
, ± 5 % absolute or ± 30 ms,
for char = ANSI-MI : A = 0.0515, B = 0.114, P = 0.02
ANSI-VI : A = 19.61, B = 0.491, P = 2.0
ANSI-EI : A = 28.2, B = 0.1217, P = 2.0
char = DTL td, ± 1 % or ± 20ms
Reset time ANSI DECAYING
[ ]
Tm
R
t
Is
I
res
×
=
1
2
, ± 5 % absolute or ± 30 ms,
for char = ANSI-MI : R = 4.85
ANSI-VI : R = 21.6
ANSI-EI : R = 29.1
tres tres, ± 1 % or ± 20ms
Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 20ms
Overshoot time < 40 ms
Disengaging time < 50 ms
Figure 2-2 shows the operate times for the four IEC IDMTL curves with a time multiplier of 1.
Figure 2-3 and figure 2.4 show the ANSI operate and reset curves. These operate times apply to non-directional
characteristics. W here directional control is applied then the directional element operate time should be added to
give total maximum operating time.
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 37 of 50
Figure 2-2 IEC IDMTL Curves (Time Multiplier=1)
0.1
1
10
100
1000
110 100
Current (mul ti ples of setting)
Time
(sec)
2
3
4
5
6
8
20
30
40
50
60
80
Long Ti m e Invers e
Norm al I nver se
Very I nverse
Extr emely Inverse
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 38 of 50
Figure 2-3 ANSI IDMTL Operate Curves (Time Multiplier=1)
0.1
1
10
100
1000
110 100
Current (mul ti ples of setting)
Time
(sec)
2
3
4
5
6
8
20
30
40
50
60
80
Moder at el y I nverse
Extr emely Inverse
Very I nverse
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 39 of 50
Figure 2-4 ANSI Reset Curves (Time Multiplier=1)
1
10
100
1000
0.1 1
Current (mul ti ples of setting)
Time
(sec)
Moder at el y I nverse
Extr emely Inverse
Very I nverse
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.8
0.9
0.7
5
50
500
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 40 of 50
2.13 59N Neutral Voltage Displacement
2.13.1 Reference (59NDT)
Parameter Value
Vs Setting 1, 1.5… 100V
td Delay setting 0.00, 0.01…20.00, 20.50… 100, 101… 1000, 1010… 10000,
10100… 14400 s
2.13.2 Operate and Reset Level (59NDT)
Attribute Value
Vop Operate level 100 % Vs, ± 2 % or ± 0.5 V
Reset level 95 % Vop
Repeatability ± 1 %
Variation -10 °C to +55 °C 5 %
fnom - 3 Hz to fnom + 2 Hz 5 %
2.13.3 Operate and Reset Time (59NDT)
Attribute
Value
tbasic Element basic operate time 0V to 1.5 xVs, 76 ms, ± 20ms
0V to 10 xVs, 63 ms, ± 20ms
top Operate time following delay tbasic + td, ± 1 % or ± 20ms
Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 20ms
Overshoot time < 40 ms
Disengaging time < 50 ms
2.13.4 Reference (59NIT)
Parameter Value
M Multiplier setting 0.1, 0.2… 10, 10.5… 140
Vs Setting 1, 1.5… 100V
td Delay setting 0, 0.01… 20 s
tres Reset sett ing 0, 1…60 s
2.13.5 Operate and Reset Level (59NIT)
Attribute Value
Vop Operate level 105 % Vs, ± 2 % or ± 0.5 V
Reset level 95 % Vop
Repeatability ± 1 %
Variation -10 °C to +55 °C 5 %
fnom - 3 Hz to fnom + 2 Hz 5 %
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 41 of 50
2.13.6 Operate and Reset Time (59NIT)
Attribute Value
tbasic Starter operate time ( 2xVs) 65 ms, ± 20ms
top Operate
time ch ar = IDMTL
[ ]
1
M
tVs0V3
op
=
, ± 5 % or ± 65 ms
char = DTL td, ± 1 % or ± 40ms
Reset Time char = IDM TL tres, ± 5 % or ± 65ms
char = DTL tres, ± 1 % or ± 40ms
Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 20ms
Overshoot time < 40 ms
Disengaging time < 50 ms
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 42 of 50
2.14 64H Restricted Earth Fault Protecti on
2.14.1 Reference
Parameter Value
Is Setting 0.005, 0.0100.95 xIn
td Delay setting 0.00, 0.01 20.0, 20.1… 100.0, 101.…1000, 1010
10000 , 10100 … 14400 s
2.14.2 Operate and Reset Level
Attribute Value
Iop Operate level 100 % Is, ± 5 % or ±1% xIn
Reset level 95 % Iop, ± 5 % or ±0.1% xIn
Repeatability ± 1 %
Transient overreach
(X/R 100) -5 %
Variation -10 °C to +55 °C 5 %
fnom - 3 Hz to fnom + 2 Hz 5 %
2.14.3 Operate and Reset Time
Attribute Value
tbasic Element basic operate time 0 to 2 xIs, 40 ms, ± 10ms
0 to 5 xIs, 30 ms, ± 10ms
top Operate time following delay tbasic + td, ± 1% or ± 10ms
Repeatability ± 1% or ± 10ms
Overshoot time < 40 ms
Disengaging time < 50 ms
2.14.4 Harmonic Rejection
Harmonic Reject i on
2nd to 15th harmonic
40:1 minimum (50/60H z )
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 43 of 50
2.15 81Under/Over Frequency
2.15.1 Reference
Parameter Value
Fs Setting 40, 40.01… 69.99 Hz
Hyst Hysteresis setting 0, 0.1… 80%
td Delay setting 0.00, 0.01
… 20.0, 20.1… 100.0, 101.…1000, 1010 … 10000 ,
10100 … 14400 s
2.15.2 Operate and Reset Level
Attribute
Value
Fop Operate level 100 % Fs, ± 10mHz
Reset level overfrequency (100 % - hyst) xFop, ± 10mHz
underfrequency (100 % + hyst) xFop, ± 10mHz
Repeatability ± 1 %
Variation -10 °C to +55 °C 5 %
2.15.3 Operate and Reset Time
Attribute Value
tbasic
Element basic
operate time
(for ROCOF
between 0.1
and 5.0 Hz/sec)
overfrequency Typically < 110ms
Maximum < 150ms
underfrequency Typically < 110ms
Maximum < 150ms
top Operate time following delay tbasic + td, ± 1 % or ± 10ms
Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 10ms
Disengaging time < 100 ms
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 44 of 50
2.16 87 Biased Differential
2.16.1 Reference
Parameter Value
ICT Multiplier 1.00x
Iinit Initial Setting 0.1, 0.15… 2 xIn
IB1 1st Bias Slope setting 0.1, 0.15… 0.7 x
IB1L 1
st
Bias Slope Limit 1, 2… 20 xIn
IB2 2
nd
Bias Slope setting 1, 1.05… 2 x
IB2T 2
nd
Bias Slope Type setting Line, Curve
ts Delay setting 0, 0.005… 1s
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 45 of 50
2.16.2 Operate and Reset Level
Attribute Value
IOP
Operate level
2nd Bias Slope Type = Line
B)I(forIMI andIMI andII
RESTRAINRESTRAIN2OPERATE
RESTRAIN1OPERATE
SETTING INITIAL 87OPERATE
>×>
×>
>
Where
2II
I
III
21
RESTRAIN
21OPERATE
+
=
+=
B = 87BD 1st Bias slope limit
M1 = 87BD 1st Bias slope
M2 = 87BD 2nd Bias slope
Operate level
2nd Bias Slope Type = Curve
B)
I
(for
2K
I
I
andIM
Iand
II
RESTRAIN
2
2
RESTRAIN
OPERATE
RESTRAIN1OPERATE
SETTING INITIAL 87OPERATE
>
>
×
>
>
Where
K2 = B22M12B2
87BD Operate Level ± 10% of IOP or ± 0.1In
Reset level 90% of IOP
Repeatability ± 2%
Transient overreach ≤ 5%
Variation -10 °C to +55 °C
fnom - 3 Hz to fnom + 2 Hz
2.16.3 Oper at e Tim e
Attribute Value
tbasic Element basic operate time
Switched from 0 to x IOP
(Inrush Action: Enabled)
3 x IOP, 3 5 ms, ± 10ms
10 x IOP, 30 ms, ± 10ms
top Operate time following delay tbasic + td, ± 1% or ± 10ms
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 46 of 50
2.17 87HS Hi gh-Set Differential
2.17.1 Reference
Parameter Value
ICT Multiplier 1.00x
Is Setting 1, 2 … 30 xIn
ts Delay setting 0, 0.005… 1s
2.17.2 Operate and Reset Level
Attribute Value
Iop Operate level ± 5% of setting or ± 0.01In
Reset level ≥ 95% of IOP
Repeatability ± 2%
Transient overreach ≤ 5%
Variation -10 °C to +55 °C
fnom - 3 Hz to fnom + 2 Hz
2.17.3 Operate and Reset Time
Attribute Value
tbasic Element basic operate time
Switched from 0 to x IOP 3 x IOP, 30 ms, ± 10ms
5 x IOP, 25 ms, ± 10ms
top Operate time following delay tbasic + td, ± 1% or ± 10ms
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 47 of 50
Section 3: Supervisi on Functions
3.1 50BF Circuit Breaker Fail
3.1.1 Reference
Parameter Value
Is Setting: 50BF-n 0.050, 0.0552.0 xIn
Is Setting: 50BF-n-I4 0.005, 0.010… 2. 0 xIn
tCBF1 Stage 1 Delay setting 0, 5… 60000ms
tCBF2 Stage 2 Delay setting 0, 5… 60000ms
3.1.2 Operate and Reset Level
Attribute
Value
Iop Operate level 100 % Is, ± 5 % or ± 1% In
Ireset Reset lev el <100 % Iop, ± 5 % or ± 1% In
Repeatability ± 1 %
Variation -10 °C to +55 °C 5 %
fnom - 3 Hz to fnom + 2 Hz 5 %
3.1.3 Operate and Reset Time
Attribute Value
tbasic Element basic operate time < 20ms
top Stage 1 tCBF1, ± 1 % or ± 20ms
Stage 2 tCBF2, ± 1 % or ± 20ms
Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 20ms
Overshoot < 2 x 20ms
Disengaging time < 20ms
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 48 of 50
3.2 74TCS/CCS Trip/Close Circuit Supervision
3.2.1 Reference
Parameter Value
td Delay setting 0, 0.02…60 s
3.2.2 Operate and Reset Time
Attribute
Value
tbasic Element basic operate time 30ms ± 10ms
top Operate time following delay tbasic + td, ± 1 % or ± 10ms
Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 10ms
Variation -10 °C to +55 °C 5 %
fnom - 3 Hz to fnom + 2 Hz 5 %
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 49 of 50
3.3 81HBL2 I nrush Det ector
3.3.1 Reference
Parameter Value
I Setting
(Ratio of 2nd Harmonic current to
Fundamental co mpo nent cur r e nt ) 0.10, 0.11... 0.5
3.3.2 Operate and Res et Level
Attribute Value
Iop Operate level 100 % I, ± 4 % or ± 1% In
Reset level 100 % Iop, ± 4 % or ± 1% In
Repeatability ± 1 %
Variation -10 °C to +55 °C 5 %
fnom - 3 Hz to fnom + 2 Hz 5 %
3.3.3 Operate and Reset Time
Attribute Value
tbasic Element basic operate time Will pick-up before operation of any protection element
due
to magnetic inrush
Reset Time Will operation until drop-off of any protection element due
to magnetic inrush
Chapter 3) 7SR242 Duobias Performance Specification
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 50 of 50
3.4 81HBL5 Overfluxing D ete ctor
3.4.1 Reference
Parameter Value
I Setting
(Ratio of 5th Harmonic current to
Fundamental co mpo nent cur r e nt ) 0.10, 0.11... 0.5
3.4.2 Operate and Reset Level
Attribute Value
Iop Operate level 100 % I, ± 4 % or ± 1% In
Reset level 100 % Iop, ± 4 % or ± 1% In
Repeatability ± 1 %
Variation -10 °C to +55 °C 5 %
fnom - 3 Hz to fnom + 2 Hz 5 %
3.4.3 Operate and Reset Time
Attribute Value
tbasic Element basic operate time Will pick-up before operation of any protection element
due
to overfluxing
Reset Time Will operation until drop-off of any protection element due
to overfluxing
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document, and in any model or article produced from it
(and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices
Limited. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form, in any data retrieval
system, without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited, nor shall any model or article be
reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent.
While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct, no liability shall be accepted
for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission, whether such error or omission is the result of
negligence or any other cause. Any and all such liability is disclaimed.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited
7SR242 Duobias
Multi-Function 2-Winding Transformer Protection Relay
Document Release History
This document is is sue 2017/08. The list of revisi ons up to and including t his issue is:
2017/08 Software revision 2662H85001 R8c-7d
2013/01 Software revision 2662H85001 R7c-7b
2012/08 Addition of optional IEC 61850 communication protocol and Ethernet Interface.
2010/06 Additional Comms modules option of (RS485 + IRIG-B) and (RS232 + IRIG-B) and typographical
revisions
2010/02 Document reformat due to rebrand
2010/02 Software revision 2662H80001 R4c-3
2008/07 Software revision 2662H80001R3d-2c.
2008/05 First issue
Software Revision History
2017/08 2662H85001 R8c-7d Phase currents added to 61850. 5A metering corrected
2013/01 2662H85001 R7c-7b Revised file handling during shutdown
2012/08 2662H85001 R7b-7a Addition of optional IEC 61850 communication protocol and Ethernet.
2010/02 2662H80001 R4c-3 Revisions to: VT ratio settings, 87BD 1st
bias slope limit setting
increments, CB fail function, LED CONFIG menu, DATA STORAGE
menu.
Added: Open circuit detection (46BC), CONTROL MODE menu, Close
circuit supervision (74CCS),
Measured earth fault undercurrent (37G),
Pulsed output co ntac ts.
2008/07 2662H80001R3d-2c. Demand metering. Optional DNP3.0 data comms.
2008/05 2662H80001R3-2b First Release
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 2 of 60
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 3 of 60
Contents
Document Release History ...................................................................................................................................... 1
Software Revision History ........................................................................................................................................ 1
Section 1: Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 4
Section 2: Physical Connection................................................................................................................................ 5
2.1 Communication ports .............................................................................................................................. 6
2.1.1 USB Interface (COM2) .............................................................................................................. 6
2.1.2 RS485 Interface (COM1) .......................................................................................................... 7
2.1.3 Optional Rear Fibre Optic Interfaces (COM3 and COM4) ......................................................... 8
2.1.4 Optional Rear RS485 (COM3) ................................................................................................ 12
2.1.5 Optional Rear RS232 (COM3) ................................................................................................ 12
2.1.6 Optional Rear EN100 Ethernet Module (COM3) ..................................................................... 13
Section 3: IEC 60870-5-103 Definitions ................................................................................................................. 14
3.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 14
Section 4: Modbus Definitions................................................................................................................................ 22
4.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 22
Event Format ......................................................................................................................................................... 30
Section 5: DNP3.0 Definitions ................................................................................................................................ 31
5.1 Device Profile ........................................................................................................................................ 31
5.2 Implementation Table............................................................................................................................ 34
5.3 Point List ............................................................................................................................................... 44
5.3.1 Double Bit Binary Input Points ................................................................................................ 49
5.3.2 Binary Counters ...................................................................................................................... 53
5.3.3 Frozen Counters ..................................................................................................................... 54
Section 6: IEC61850 Protoc ol Suppor t .................................................................................................................. 58
Section 7: Modems ................................................................................................................................................ 59
7.1.1 Connecting a Modem to the Relay(s) ...................................................................................... 59
7.1.2 Setting the Remote Modem .................................................................................................... 59
7.1.3 Connecting to the Remote Modem ......................................................................................... 59
Section 8: Glossary ................................................................................................................................................ 60
List of Figures
Figure 2-1 Communication to Front USB Port .................................................................................................... 6
Figure 2-2 Communication to Multiple Devices using RS485 (Standard Port) .................................................... 7
Figure 2-3 Communication to Multiple Devices using Fibre-optic Ring Network ............................................... 11
Figure 2-4 Communication to Multiple Devices from Control System and Laptop using Fibre-
optic Star Network ........................................................................................................................... 11
Figure 2-5 Additional (Optional) Rear RS485 + IRIG-B Connection to a PC .................................................... 12
Figure 2-6 Additional (Optional) Rear RS232 + IRIG-B Connection to a PC .................................................... 12
Figure 2-7 RS232 Data Comms Pin Connections............................................................................................. 12
Figure 2-8 EN100 Ethernet Module .................................................................................................................. 13
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 4 of 60
Section 1: Introduction
This section provides information on the use of the Communication Interface with a control system or interrogating
computer. Appropriate software within the control system or on the interrogating computer (e.g. Reydisp
Evolution) is required to access the interface.
The relay data communication facility incorporates user selectable protocols to provide compatibility with control
and automation sy ste ms.
This section specifies connection details and lists the events, commands and measurands available in the
IEC60870-5-103, Modbus RTU, DNP3.0 and optional IEC61850 protocols.
When IEC60870-5-103 protocol is selected the relay can communicate with PCs running Reydisp software which
provides operational information, post-fault analysis, settings interrogation and editing facilities etc. Reydisp
software can be downloaded from our website www.energy.siemens.com.
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 5 of 60
Section 2: Physical Conne ction
As standard the relay provides one ‘Front’ USB communication interface (COM2) located on the fascia and one
RS485 (COM1) located on the ‘Rear’.
Optionally additional fibre optic (x2), RS232 (x1), RS485 (x1) or Ethernet comms ports can be provided on the
rear, these are designated COM3 or COM4 as detailed below .
1. COM1-RS485: this port can be used for IEC60870-5-103, MODBUS RTU or optionally DNP3
communications to a substation SCADA or integrated control system or engineer remote access.
2. COM2-USB: this port is used for IEC60870-5-103 (default setting) communication with Reydisp software.
MODBUS RTU or optional DNP3 are also available via COM2.
An ASCII protocol, the main use of which is to allow firmware to be updated from the front connection, is
also available through this port.
Access to COM2 settings is only available from the relay front fascia via the COMMUNICATIONS MENU
3. COM3: Located on the rear of the relay this optional port can be used for IEC60870-5-103, MODBUS
RTU, DNP 3 or optional IEC6185 communications to a substation SCADA, integrated control system or
for engineer remote access.
4. COM4: Located on the rear of the relay thise optional port can be used for IEC60870-5-103, MODBUS
RTU or DNP3 communications to a substation SCADA or integrated control system or engineer remote
access.
SPDL can provide a range of interface devices, ple ase refer to product portfolio catalogue.
Full details of the interface devices can be found by referring to the website www.siemens.com/energy.
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 6 of 60
2.1 Communication ports
To allow communication to the relay the Station Address setting must be within the range of the selected protocol
i.e. 0 254 for IEC60870-5-103, 0 247 for MODBUS-RTU or 0 65520 for DNP3.
Setting name Range Default Setting Notes
Station Address 0 … 65534 0
An address within the range of
the relevant protocol must be
given to identify the relay. Each
relay must have a unique
address.
2.1.1 USB Interface (COM2)
The USB communication port is connected using a standard USB cable with a type B connection to the relay and
type A to the PC.
The PC will require a suitable USB driver to be installed, this will be carried out automatically when the Reydisp
software is installed. When the Reydisp software is running with the USB cable connected to a device an
additional conn ection is shown. Connections to these devices are not shown when they are not connected.
The USB communication interface on the relay is labelled Com 2 and its associated settings are located in the
Data communications menu. To enable communication with Reydisp via the USB port the following setting
changes must be made from the relay fascia.
Setting name Range Default Setting Notes
Station Address
0 … 65534 0 0 254
COM2-USB Pro t ocol OFF, IEC60870-5-103,
MODBUS-RTU, ASCII,
DNP3
IEC60870-5-
103 IEC60870-
5-103
Reydisp software is
compatible with IEC60870-
5-103.
COM2-USB Mode Local, Local or Remote,
Remote Local Local
Local
Engineer
Access
USB Type A
USB Data Cable
USB Type A
socket on PC
USB Type B
Figure 2-1 Communication to Front USB Port
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 7 of 60
2.1.2 RS485 Interface (COM1)
The RS485 communication port is located on the rear of the relay and can be connected using a suitable RS485
120 Ohm screened twisted pair cable.
The RS485 electrical connection can be used in a single or multi-drop configuration. The RS485 master must
support and use the Auto Device Enable (ADE) feature. The last device in the connection must be terminated
correctly in accordance with the master device driving the connection. The relays are fitted with an internal
terminating resistor which can be connected between A and B by fitting an external wire loop between terminals
18 and 20 on the power supply module.
The maximum number of relays that can be connected to the bus is 64.
Each relay has an internal terminating resistor this can be connected in circuit where necessary.
The following settings must be configured when using the RS485 interface.
Setting name Range Default Setting Notes
COM1-RS485 Protocol OFF, IEC60870-5-103,
MODBUS-RTU, DNP3.0 IEC60870-5-
103 As Required Sets the protocol used to
communicate on the
standard RS485 conn ection.
COM1-RS485 Baud
Rate
75 110 150 300 600 1200
2400 4800 9600 19200
38400 19200 As Required
The baud rate set on all of
the relays connected to the
control system must be the
same as the one set on the
master device.
COM1-RS485 Parity NONE, ODD, EVEN EVEN As Required
The parity set on all of the
relays connected to the
control system must be the
same and in accordance
with the master device.
COM1-RS485 Mode Local, Local or Remote,
Remote Remote
Unsolicited Mode DISABLED ENABLED DISABLED As Required Setting is only visible when
COM1 Protocol is set to
DNP3
Destination Address 0 … 65520 0 As Required Setting is only visible when
DNP3 Unsolicited Events
set to Enabled.
To Control
System
14
16
18
20
RS485 Screened
twisted pair
Rear terminals
14
16
18
14
16
18
RS485 Screened
twisted pair
Rear terminals
Ext Wire loop
(terminating
resistance) added
where permanent
drive from master
station available
+ve
RS485
GND
-ve
Term.
14
16
18
20
+ve
RS485
GND
-ve
Term.
14
16
18
20
+ve
RS485
GND
-ve
Term.
14
16
18
20
RS 485 Twisted pair Cable
To Control
System
Figure 2-2 Communication to Multiple Devices using RS485 (Standard Port)
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 8 of 60
2.1.3 Optional Rear Fibre Optic Interfaces (COM3 and COM4)
When connecting via the optional fibre optic interface the selection of fibre-optic cable is important. Fibres must
be terminated with STTM (BFOC/2.5) connectors.
The recommended type is 62.5/125µm glass fibre. Communication distances over 1 km are achievable using this
type of fibre.
The fibre optic data comms link will be interrupted if the relay element is withdrawn from the case.
A budget loss calculation should be made for all installations. The following table gives the launch power and
receiver sensitivity of each of the fibre optic communication ports on the Argus M relay when used with specific
fibre optic type s.
Fibre Type
Tx Launch Power (dB)
RX Receive Sensitivity (dB)
Min
Max
Min
Max
62.5/125µm
-11.7
-15.7
-24
-9.2
1mm Polymer
-6.4
-10.4
-24
-9.2
200µm PCS
-2.8
-6.8
-24
-9.2
Factors to be considered when calculating fibre-optic trans m ission di stances:
Transmitter launch power
Attenuation, based on light frequency, fibre material and fibre diameter
Number of intermediate connectors and splices
Receiver sen sit iv ity
The light power at the receiver must be above the sensitivity of the receiver in order that effective
communication can occur.
Fibre cables are supplied on reels of finite length which may necessitate additional jointing.
Typical losses at connectors are 0.5-1.0dB each. This allows for normal age related deterioration.
Consult manufacturers data for actual values.
Typical Splice losses are <0.3dB.
A 3dB safety margin is usually allowed after the budget calculation is performed.
Following installation and prior to putting into service the actual losses should be measured for each fibre using a
calibrated light source and meter. Measured and calculated values can be compared.
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 9 of 60
The following table can be used to record budget calculations:
A Launch power
dB
B Fibre Type
C Loss (dB/km)
dB/km
D Length
km
E Total fibre loss (CxD)
dB
F No. of Splices
G Loss at each splice
dB
H Tota l loss at splices (FxG)
dB
I No. of connectors
J Los s per conne ctor
dB
K Total loss at connectors (IxJ)
dB
L Total losses (E+H+K)
dB
M Receive power budget (A-L)
dB
N Safety Margin
dB
O Device Receive Sensitivity
dB
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 10 of 60
Setting name Range Default Setting Notes
Station Address 1 254 for IEC60870-5-103
0 247 for Modbus RTU
0 65520 for DNP3.0 0 As Required
An address within the range of
the relevant protocol must be
given to identify the relay. Each
relay must have a unique
address.
COM3 Protocol OFF, IEC60870-5-103,
MODBUS-RTU, DNP3.0 IEC60870-5-
103 As Required Sets the protocol used to
communicate on the connection
Com3
COM3 Baud Rate 75 110 150 300 600 1200
2400 4800 9600 19200
38400 57600 115200 19200 As Required
The baud rate set on all of the
relays connected to the control
system must be the same as
the one set on the master
device.
COM3 Pari ty NONE, ODD, EVEN EVEN As Required
The parity set on all of the
relays connected to the control
system must be the same and
in accordance with the master
device.
COM3 Lin e Idle* LIGHT ON, LIGHT OFF LIGHT OFF As Required Sets the idle state of the line in
accordanc e with master device
COM3 Data Echo* ON,OFF OFF As Required Set to ON when relays are
connect ed in a ring
configuration.
COM4 Protocol** OFF, IEC60870-5-103,
MODBUS-RTU, DNP3.0 IEC60870-5-
103 As Required Sets the protocol used to
communicate on the connection
Com4.
COM4 Baud Rate** 75 110 150 300 600 1200
2400 4800 9600 19200
38400 19200 As Required
The baud rate set on all of the
relays connected to the control
system must be the same as
the one set on the master
device.
COM4 Parity** NONE, ODD, EVEN EVEN As Required
The parity set on all of the
relays connected to the control
system must be the same and
in accordance with the master
device.
COM4 Lin e Idle** LIGHT ON, LIGHT OFF LIGHT OFF As Required Sets the idle state of the line in
accordanc e with master device
COM4 Data Echo** ON,OFF OFF As Required Set to ON when relays are
connect ed in a ring
configuration.
*Not applicable for RS 485 or RS 232 options
**COM 4 is fibre optic only
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 11 of 60
RS232 to Fibre
Optic Converter
Tx
Rx Tx
Rx
62.5/125µm fibre optic with ST
connectors
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Computer or
Control System
USB or 9 pin male
D connector
RS232 straight
through cable
25 pin male
D connector
Figure 2-3 Communication to Multiple Devices using Fibre-optic Ring Network
Computer or
Control System
Sigma 1
Tx
Rx Tx
Rx
62.5/125µm fibre optic
with ST connectors
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Master
To
Control
System
USB or 9 pin male
D connector
RS232 straight
through cable
25 pin male
D connector
Figure 2-4 Communication to Multiple Devices from Control System and Laptop using Fibre-optic Star
Network
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 12 of 60
2.1.4 Optional Rear RS485 (COM3)
COMMS MODULE
IRIG-B
COM3
GND
TERM
B
A
Laptop computer RS232 straight
through cable
USB or 9 pin male
D connector
RS485 Screened
twisted pair
7SR24
Figure 2-5 Ad d itional (Opti onal ) Rear RS485 + IRIG-B Connection to a PC
2.1.5 Optional Rear RS232 (COM3)
USB or 9 pin male
D connector
RS232 cross-over cable or RS232 to USB converter cable
Laptop computer
COMMS MODULE
IRIG-B
COM3
7SR24
Figure 2-6 Addi tional (Optional) Rear RS232 + IRIG-B Connection to a PC
Pin
Relay Function
1
Not Connected
2
Receive Data (RXD)
3
Transmit Data (TXD)
4
Output Supply +5V 50mA
5
Signal Ground (GND)
6
Output Supply +5V 50mA
7
Linked to 8 (volts free)
8
Linked to 7 (volts free)
9
Output Supply +5V 50mA
Figure 2-7 RS232 Data Comms Pin Connections
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 13 of 60
2.1.6 Optional Rear EN100 Ethernet Module (COM3)
The optio na l et hernet inter f ac e is pr imaril y pro vided f or suppor t of IE C 61 850 protocol. Sup port f or IEC
60870-5-103 is also provided over this interface to allow connection with Reydisp Evolution and
Reydisp Manager software for interrogation, editing and download of relay settings and other data.
Ordering options are available with two RJ45 electrical connectors or with two duplex LC fibre optic
connectors.
Setting name Range Default Setting Notes
LAN Protoco l OFF, IEC60870-5-103 IEC60870-5-103
If this setting is set to Off, access to relay data using Reydisp Evolution and Reydisp Manager
software via the Ethernet interface is not available.
Connections to the optional EN100 ethernet module are made on the rear underside of the relay.
Connections are made to either RJ45 sockets (electrical) or Duplex LC (fibre optic) connectors.
LED yellow
LED green
LED yellow
LED green
Ch 1 Ch 2
Ethernet – EN100-E
EN100 Module – RJ45 Interface
Ethernet – EN100-O
Ch 1 Ch 2
EN100 Module – Duplex-LC Interface
Green LED (Physical Link)
Off – No link
On – Link present
Yellow LED (Activity)
Off – No traffic
On/flashing - Traffic
Figure 2-8 EN100 Ethernet Module
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 14 of 60
Section 3: IEC 60870-5-103 Definitions
3.1 Introduction
This section describes the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol implementation in the relays. This protocol is used for the
communication with REYDISP software and can also be used for communication with a suitable control system.
The control system or local PC acts as the master in the system with the relay operating as a slave responding to
the masters commands. The implementation provides event information, time synchronising, commands and
measurands and al so supports the transfer of disturbance records.
This protocol can be set to use any or all of the relays hardware interfaces (USB, Fibre Optic and RS485) and is
the standard protocol used by the USB port. The relay can communicate simultaneously on all ports regardless
of protocol used.
Each relay must be given an address to enable communication and can be set by the Communication
Interface:Relay Address. Valid settings are within the range 1 254, a relay with the default address of 0 will not
be able to communicate.
Cause of Transmission
The cause of transmission (COT) column of the ‘Information Number and Function’ table lists possible causes of
transmission for these frames. The following abbreviations are used:
Abbreviation Description
SE spontaneous event
T test mode
GI general interrogation
Loc local operation
Rem remote operation
Ack command acknowledge
Nak Negative comma nd ack nowledge
Note: Events listing a GI cause of transmission can be raised and cleared; other events are raised only.
Function Type
Abbreviation Description
1 Time tagged message (monitor direction)
2 Time tagged message (relative time) (monitor direction)
3.1 M easurands I
4 Time-tagged measurands with relative time
5 Identifi cati on mes sag e
6 Time synchronisation
7 General Interr ogation Initializ ation
9 Measurands II
20 General co mma nd
Information Number and Function
The following table lists information number and function definitions together with a description of the message
and function type and cause of transmission that can result in that message. Definitions with shaded area are not
available on all relay models.
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 15 of 60
Function
Information
Number
Description
Function
Type
Cause of Transmi ssion
60 4 Remote Mode
1
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
60 5 Out of Service Mode
1
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
60 6 Local Mode
1
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
60 7 Local & Remote Mode
1
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
60
12
Control Received
1
SE
60
13
Command Received
1
SE
60
128
Cold Start
1
SE
60
129
W arm Start
1
SE
60
130
Re-start
1
SE
60
131
Expected Restart
1
SE, GI
60
132
Unexpected Restart
1
SE, GI
60
135
Trigger Storage
1
SE
60
136
Clear Wavef orm Records
1
SE
60
137
Clear Fault Records
1
SE
60
138
Clear Event Records
1
SE
60
140
Demand metering reset
1
SE
60
170
General Alarm 1
1
SE, GI,
60
171
General Alarm 2
1
SE, GI,
60
172
General Alarm 3
1
SE, GI,
60
173
General Alarm 4
1
SE, GI,
60
174
General Alarm 5
1
SE, GI,
60
175
General Alarm 6
1
SE, GI,
60
176
General Alarm 7
1
SE, GI,
60
177
General Alarm 8
1
SE, GI,
60
178
General Alarm 9
1
SE, GI,
60
179
General Alarm 10
1
SE, GI,
60
180
General Alarm 11
1
SE, GI,
60
181
General Alarm 12
1
SE, GI,
60
182
Quick Logic E1
1
SE, GI,
60
183
Quick Logic E2
1
SE, GI,
60
184
Quick Logic E3
1
SE, GI,
60
185
Quick Logic E4
1
SE, GI,
60
186
Quick Logic E5
1
SE, GI,
60
187
Quick Logic E6
1
SE, GI,
60
188
Quick Logic E7
1
SE, GI,
60
189
Quick Logic E8
1
SE, GI,
60
190
Quick Logic E9
1
SE, GI,
60
191
Quick Logic E10
1
SE, GI,
60
192
Quick Logic E11
1
SE, GI,
60
193
Quick Logic E12
1
SE, GI,
60
194
Quick Logic E13
1
SE, GI,
60
195
Quick Logic E14
1
SE, GI,
60
196
Quick Logic E15
1
SE, GI,
60
197
Quick Logic E16
1
SE, GI,
70
5
Binary Input 5
1
SE, GI,
70
6
Binary Input 6
1
SE, GI,
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 16 of 60
Function
Information
Number
Description
Function
Type
Cause of Transmi ssion
70
7
Binary Input 7
1
SE, GI,
70
8
Binary Input 8
1
SE, GI,
70
9
Binary Input 9
1
SE, GI,
70
10
Binary Input 10
1
SE, GI,
70
11
Binary Input 11
1
SE, GI,
70
12
Binary Input 12
1
SE, GI,
70
13
Binary Input 13
1
SE, GI,
70
14
Binary Input 14
1
SE, GI,
70
15
Binary Input 15
1
SE, GI,
70
16
Binary Input 16
1
SE, GI,
70
17
Binary Input 17
1
SE, GI,
70
18
Binary Input 18
1
SE, GI,
70
19
Binary Input 19
1
SE, GI,
75
1
Virtual Input 1
1
SE, GI
75
2
Virtual Input 2
1
SE, GI
75
3
Virtual Input 3
1
SE, GI
75
4
Virtual Input 4
1
SE, GI
75
5
Virtual Input 5
1
SE, GI
75
6
Virtual Input 6
1
SE, GI
75
7
Virtual Input 7
1
SE, GI
75
8
Virtual Input 8
1
SE, GI
75
9
Virtual Input 9
1
SE, GI
75
10
Virtual Input 10
1
SE, GI
75
11
Virtual Input 11
1
SE, GI
75
12
Virtual Input 12
1
SE, GI
75
13
Virtual Input 13
1
SE, GI
75
14
Virtual Input 14
1
SE, GI
75
15
Virtual Input 15
1
SE, GI
75
16
Virtual Input 16
1
SE, GI
80 1 Binary Output 1
1
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
80 2 Binary Output 2
1
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
80 3 Binary Output 3
1
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
80 4 Binary Output 4
1
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
80 5 Binary Output 5
1
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
80 6 Binary Output 6
1
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
80 7 Binary Output 7
1
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
80 8 Binary Output 8
1
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
80 9 Binary Output 9
1
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
80 10 Binary Output 10
1
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
80
11
Binary Output 11
1
SE, GI,
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 17 of 60
Function
Information
Number
Description
Function
Type
Cause of Transmi ssion
20
Ack, Nak
80 12 Binary Output 12
1
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
80 13 Binary Output 13
1
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
80 14 Binary Output 14
1
SE, GI,
20
Ack, Nak
90
1
Led 1
1
SE, GI
90
2
Led 2
1
SE, GI
90
3
Led 3
1
SE, GI
90
4
Led 4
1
SE, GI
90
5
Led 5
1
SE, GI
90
6
Led 6
1
SE, GI
90
7
Led 7
1
SE, GI
90
8
Led 8
1
SE, GI
90
9
Led 9
1
SE, GI
90
10
Led 10
1
SE, GI
90
11
Led 11
1
SE, GI
90
12
Led 12
1
SE, GI
90
13
Led 13
1
SE, GI
90
14
Led 14
1
SE, GI
90
15
Led 15
1
SE, GI
90
16
Led 16
1
SE, GI
90
17
Led 17
1
SE, GI
90
18
Led 18
1
SE, GI
90
19
Led 19
1
SE, GI
90
20
Led 20
1
SE, GI
90
21
Led 21
1
SE, GI
90
22
Led 22
1
SE, GI
90
23
Led 23
1
SE, GI
90
24
Led 24
1
SE, GI
91
1
Led PU 1
1
SE, GI
91
2
Led PU 2
1
SE, GI
91
3
Led PU 3
1
SE, GI
91
4
Led PU 4
1
SE, GI
91
5
Led PU 5
1
SE, GI
91
6
Led PU 6
1
SE, GI
91
7
Led PU 7
1
SE, GI
91
8
Led PU 8
1
SE, GI
91
9
Led PU 9
1
SE, GI
91
10
Led PU 10
1
SE, GI
91
11
Led PU 11
1
SE, GI
91
12
Led PU 12
1
SE, GI
91
13
Led PU 13
1
SE, GI
91
14
Led PU 14
1
SE, GI
91
15
Led PU 15
1
SE, GI
91
16
Led PU 16
1
SE, GI
91
17
Led PU 17
1
SE, GI
91
18
Led PU 18
1
SE, GI
91
19
Led PU19
1
SE, GI
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 18 of 60
Function
Information
Number
Description
Function
Type
Cause of Transmi ssion
91
20
Led PU 20
1
SE, GI
91
21
Led PU 21
1
SE, GI
91
22
Led PU 22
1
SE, GI
91
23
Led PU 23
1
SE, GI
91
24
Led PU 24
1
SE, GI
176
0
Data lost
5
Data lost
176
2
Reset F CB
5
Reset F CB
176
3
Reset CU
5
Reset CU
176
4
Start/Restart
5
Start/Restart
176
5
Power On
5
SE
176 19 LEDs reset (Reset Flag & Outputs)
1
SE
20
Ack, Nak
176
22
Settings chan ged
1
SE
176 23 Settings Group 1 Select
1
SE, GI
20
Ack, Nak
176 24 Settings Group 2 Select
1
SE, GI
20
Ack, Nak
176 25 Settings Group 3 Select
1
SE, GI
20
Ack, Nak
176 26 Settings Group 4 Select
1
SE, GI
20
Ack, Nak
176
27
Binary Input 1
1
SE, GI
176
28
Binary Input 2
1
SE, GI
176
29
Binary Input 3
1
SE, GI
176
30
Binary Input 4
1
SE, GI
176
36
Trip circuit fail
1
SE, GI
176
48
EF L1
2
SE
176
49
EF L2
2
SE
176
50
EF L3
2
SE
176
64
Starter/Pick Up L1
1
SE, GI
176
65
Starter/Pick Up L2
1
SE, GI
176
66
Starter/Pick Up L3
1
SE, GI
176
67
Starter/Pick Up N
1
SE, GI
176
68
General Trip
2
SE
176
69
Trip L1
2
SE
176
70
Trip L2
2
SE
176
71
Trip L3
2
SE
176
84
General Starter/Pick Up
1
SE, GI
177
8
87BD
2
SE, GI
177
9
87HS
2
SE, GI
177
10
51-1
2
SE, GI
177
11
50-1
2
SE, GI
177
12
51N-1
2
SE, GI
177
13
50N-1
2
SE, GI
177
14
51G-1
2
SE, GI
177
15
50G-1
2
SE, GI
177
16
51-2
2
SE, GI
177
17
50-2
2
SE, GI
177
18
51N-2
2
SE, GI
177
19
50N-2
2
SE, GI
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 19 of 60
Function
Information
Number
Description
Function
Type
Cause of Transmi ssion
177
20
51G-2
2
SE, GI
177
21
50G-2
2
SE, GI
177
26
51G-3
2
SE, GI
177
32
51G-4
2
SE, GI
177
34
50BF-1-1
2
SE, GI
177
35
50BF-1-2
2
SE, GI
177
36
50BF-2-1
2
SE, GI
177
37
50BF-2-2
2
SE, GI
177
38
Thermal Alarm
2
SE, GI
177
39
Thermal Trip
2
SE, GI
177
41
46IT-1
2
SE, GI
177
42
46DT-1
2
SE, GI
177
43
46IT-2
2
SE, GI
177
44
46DT-2
2
SE, GI
177
45
64H-1
2
SE, GI
177
46
64H-2
2
SE, GI
177
48
37-1
2
SE, GI
177
49
37-2
2
SE, GI
177
52
27/59-1
2
SE, GI
177
53
27/59-2
2
SE, GI
177
54
27/59-3
2
SE, GI
177
55
27/59-4
2
SE, GI
177
56
59NIT
2
SE, GI
177
57
59NDT
2
SE, GI
177
58
81-1
2
SE, GI
177
59
81-2
2
SE, GI
177
60
81-3
2
SE, GI
177
61
81-4
2
SE, GI
177
62
81-5
2
SE, GI
177
63
81-6
2
SE, GI
177
64
24DT-1
2
SE, GI
177
65
24DT-2
2
SE, GI
177
66
24IT
2
SE, GI
177
67
Trip Circuit Fail 1
2
SE, GI
177
68
Trip Circuit Fail 2
2
SE, GI
177
69
Trip Circuit Fail 3
2
SE, GI
177
70
Trip Circuit Fail 4
2
SE, GI
177
71
Trip Circuit Fail 5
2
SE, GI
177
72
Trip Circuit Fail 6
2
SE, GI
177 77 Settings Group 5 Selected
1
SE, GI
20
Ack, Nak
177 78 Settings Group 6 Selected
1
SE, GI
20
Ack, Nak
177 79 Settings Group 7 Selected
1
SE, GI
20
Ack, Nak
177 80 Settings Group 8 Selected
1
SE, GI
20
Ack, Nak
177
83
CB 1 Total Trip Count
1
SE, GI
177
84
CB 1 Delta Trip Count
1
SE, GI
177
86
Reset CB 1 Total Trip Count
1
SE, GI
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 20 of 60
Function
Information
Number
Description
Function
Type
Cause of Transmi ssion
20
Ack, Nak
177 87 Reset CB 1 Delta Trip Count
1
SE, GI
20
Ack, Nak
177
89
I2t CB 1 W ear
1
SE, GI
177 90 Reset I2t CB 1 W ear
1
SE, GI
20
Ack, Nak
177
91
I2t CB 2 W ear
1
SE, GI
177 92 Reset I2t CB 2 W ear
1
SE, GI
20
Ack, Nak
177
93
CB 2 Total Trip Count
1
SE, GI
177
94
CB 2 Delta Trip Count
1
SE, GI
177 96 Reset CB 2 Total Trip Count
1
SE, GI
20
Ack, Nak
177 97 Reset CB 2 Delta Trip Count
1
SE, GI
20
Ack, Nak
177
99
81HBL2
2
SE, GI
177
100
81HBL5
2
SE, GI
177
101
CB 1 Total Trip Count
2
SE, GI
177
102
CB 1 Delta Trip Count
2
SE, GI
177
103
37G-1
2
SE, GI
177
104
37G-2
2
SE, GI
177
105
Close CB 1
2
SE, GI
177
106
CB1 Fail To Close
2
SE, GI
177
107
CB1 DBI
2
SE, GI
177
108
Open CB1
2
SE, GI
177
109
CB1 Fail To Open
2
SE, GI
177
110
Close CB 2
2
SE, GI
177
111
CB2 Fail To Close
2
SE, GI
177
112
CB2 DBI
2
SE, GI
177
113
Open CB2
2
SE, GI
177
114
CB2 Fail To Open
2
SE, GI
177
115
Close Circuit Fail 1
2
SE, GI
177
116
Close Circuit Fail 2
2
SE, GI
177
117
Close Circuit Fail 3
2
SE, GI
177
118
Close Circuit Fail 4
2
SE, GI
177
119
Close Circuit Fail 5
2
SE, GI
177
120
Close Circuit Fail 6
2
SE, GI
177
125
CB1 Trip Time Alarm
2
SE, GI
177
126
CB2 Trip Time Alarm
2
SE, GI
177
127
E/F Out
2
SE, GI
177
128
CB 2 Total Trip Count
2
SE, GI
177
129
CB 2 Delta Trip Count
2
SE, GI
178
63
Trip General
2
SE, GI
178
64
Trip Phase A
2
SE, GI
178
65
Trip Phase B
2
SE, GI
178
66
Trip Phase C
2
SE, GI
178
70
W1 Ia
4
SE, GI
178
71
W1 Ib
4
SE, GI
178
72
W1 Ic
4
SE, GI
178
73
W2 Ia
4
SE, GI
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 21 of 60
Function
Information
Number
Description
Function
Type
Cause of Transmi ssion
178
74
W2 Ib
4
SE, GI
178
75
W2 Ic
4
SE, GI
178
76
V
4
SE, GI
178
77
Ig-1
4
SE, GI
178
78
Ig-2
4
SE, GI
200 1 CB1
1
SE, GI
20
Ack, Nak
200 2 CB2
1
SE, GI
20
Ack, Nak
200
255
Blocked by Inter loc kin g
1
255
0
GI Initiation
7
End of GI
255
0
GI End
8
End of GI
255
0
Time Synchronisation
6
Time Synchronisation
Measurand
Function
Information
Number Description
Function
Type Cause of Transmission
178 230
W1 I
L1,2,3
IL1 (2.4 x)
IL2 (2.4 x)
IL3 (2.4 x)
9 Cyclic Refresh rate 5
seconds or value change
greater than 1%.
178 231
W2 I
L1,2,3
IL1 (2.4 x)
IL2 (2.4 x)
IL3 (2.4 x)
9 Cyclic Refresh rate 5
seconds or value change
greater than 1%.
178 220
V,f
V (1.2 x)
f (1.2 x)
9 Cyclic Refresh rate 5
seconds or value change
greater than 1%.
Disturbance Recorder Actual Channel (ACC) Numbers
Function
ACC Number
Description
183
0
Global
183
1
W1 Ia
183
2
W1 Ib
183
3
W1 Ic
183
4
IG1
183
5
W2 Ia
183
6
W2 Ib
183
7
W2 Ic
183
8
IG2
183
9
Vx
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 22 of 60
Section 4: Modbus Definitions
4.1 Introduction
This section describes the MODBUS-RTU protocol implementation in the relays. This protocol is used for
communication with a suitable control system.
This protocol can be set to use the Fibre Optic and RS485 ports. The relay can communicate simultaneously on
all ports regardless of protocol used.
Each relay must be given an address to enable communication and can be set by the Communication
Interface:Relay Address. Valid settings are within the range 1 247, a relay with the default address of 0 will not
be able to communicate.
Definitions with shaded area are not available on all relay models.
Coils (Read Write Binary values)
Address
Description
00001
Binary Output 1
00002
Binary Output 2
00003
Binary Output 3
00004
Binary Output 4
00005
Binary Output 5
00006
Binary Output 6
00007
Binary Output 7
00008
Binary Output 8
00009
Binary Output 9
00010
Binary Output 10
00011
Binary Output 11
00012
Binary Output 12
00013
Binary Output 13
00014
Binary Output 14
00100
LED Reset (Write only location)
00101
Settings Group 1
00102
Settings Group 2
00103
Settings Group 3
00104
Settings Group 4
00105
Settings Group 5
00106
Settings Group 6
00107
Settings Group 7
00108
Settings Group 8
00109
CB1
00110
CB2
00111
Reset CB1 Total Trip Count, write only location.
00112
Reset CB1 Delta Trip Count, write only location.
00113
Reset CB1 Lockout Trip Count, write only location.
00114
Reset I^2t CB1 Wear, write only location.
00115
Reset I^2t CB2 Wear, write only location.
00116
Reset CB2 Total Trip Count, write only location.
00117
Reset CB2 Delta Trip Count, write only location.
00118
Reset CB2 Lockout Trip Count, write only location.
00119
Demand Metering Reset
00120
Local Mode
00121
Remote Mode
00122
Service Mode
00123
Local & Remote Mode
00124
E/F Out
Inputs (Read Only Binary values)
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 23 of 60
Address
Description
10001
Binary Input 1
10002
Binary Input 2
10003
Binary Input 3
10004
Binary Input 4
10005
Binary Input 5
10006
Binary Input 6
10007
Binary Input 7
10008
Binary Input 8
10009
Binary Input 9
10010
Binary Input 10
10011
Binary Input 11
10012
Binary Input 12
10013
Binary Input 13
10014
Binary Input 14
10015
Binary Input 15
10016
Binary Input 16
10017
Binary Input 17
10018
Binary Input 18
10019
Binary Input 19
10101
General Start/Pick-up
10102
General Trip
10103
Start/Pick-up L1
10104
Start/Pick-up L2
10105
Start/Pick-up L3
10106
Start/Pick-up N
10107
Trip/Operation L1
10108
Trip/Operation L2
10109
Trip/Operation L3
10110
Trip/Operation N
10111
Trip Circuit Fail
10120
LOCAL Mode
10121
REMOT E Mo de
10122
SERVICE Mode
10123
Local & Remote
10130
Trip Cct Fail 1
10131
Trip Cct Fail 2
10132
Trip Cct Fail 3
10133
Trip Cct Fail 4
10134
Trip Cct Fail 5
10135
Trip Cct Fail 6
10200
87 Operated A
10201
87 Operated B
10202
87 Operated C
10203
87 Harmonic Detector A
10204
87 Harmonic Detector B
10205
87 Harmonic Detector C
10206
87 BD
10207
87HS Operated A
10208
87HS Operated B
10209
87HS Operated C
10210
87HS Trip
10220
64H-1 Operated
10221
64H-1 Starter
10223
64H-2 Operated
10224
64H-2 Starter
10225
64H-3 Operated
10226
64H-3 Starter
10230
51G-1 Starter
10231
51G-1 Operated
10233
51G-2 Starter
10234
51G-2 Operated
10242
UVGuardBlock
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 24 of 60
10243
27/59-1 Operated
10244
27/59-1 Starter
10246
27/59-2 Operated
10247
27/59-2 Starter
10249
27/59-3 Operated
10250
27/59-3 Starter
10252
27/59-4 Operated
10253
27/59-4 Starter
10260
81-1 Operated
10261
81-1 Starter
10263
81-2 Operated
10264
81-2 Starter
10266
81-3 Operated
10267
81-3 Starter
10269
81-4 Operated
10270
81-4 Starter
10272
81-5 Operated
10273
81-5 Starter
10275
81-6 Operated
10276
81-6 Starter
10280
24DT-1 Operated
10281
24DT-1 Starter
10283
24DT-2 Operated
10284
24DT-2 Starter
10286
24IT Starter
10287
24IT Operated
10290
49 Trip
10291
49 Alarm
10310
50G-1 Operated
10311
50G-1 Starter
10320
50G-2 Operated
10321
50G-2 Starter
10333
51G-3 Starter
10334
51G-3 Operated
10336
51G-4 Starter
10337
51G-4 Operated
10501
Virtual Input 1
10502
Virtual Input 2
10503
Virtual Input 3
10504
Virtual Input 4
10505
Virtual Input 5
10506
Virtual Input 6
10507
Virtual Input 7
10508
Virtual Input 8
10509
Virtual Input 9
10510
Virtual Input 10
10511
Virtual Input 11
10512
Virtual Input 12
10513
Virtual Input 13
10514
Virtual Input 14
10515
Virtual Input 15
10516
Virtual Input 16
10601
Led 1
10602
Led 2
10603
Led 3
10604
Led 4
10605
Led 5
10606
Led 6
10607
Led 7
10608
Led 8
10609
Led 9
10610
Led 10
10611
Led 11
10612
Led 12
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 25 of 60
10613
Led 13
10614
Led 14
10615
Led 15
10616
Led 16
10617
Led 17
10618
Led 18
10619
Led 19
10620
Led 20
10621
Led 21
10622
Led 22
10623
Led 23
10624
Led 24
10701
Led PU 1
10702
Led PU 2
10703
Led PU 3
10704
Led PU 4
10705
Led PU 5
10706
Led PU 6
10707
Led PU 7
10708
Led PU 8
10709
Led PU 9
10710
Led PU 10
10711
Led PU 11
10712
Led PU 12
10713
Led PU 13
10714
Led PU 14
10715
Led PU 15
10716
Led PU 16
10717
Led PU 17
10718
Led PU 18
10719
Led PU 19
10720
Led PU 20
10721
Led PU 21
10722
Led PU 22
10723
Led PU 23
10724
Led PU 24
10800
Cold Start
10801
W arm Start
10802
Re-Start
10803
Power On
10804
S W Forced Restart
10805
Unexpected Restart
10806
Reset Start Count
12100
51-1 Starter A
12101
51-1 Starter B
12102
51-1 Starter C
12103
51-1 Operated A
12104
51-1 Operated B
12105
51-1 Operated C
12107
50-1 Starter A
12108
50-1 Starter B
12109
50-1 Starter C
12110
50-1 Operated A
12111
50-1 Operated B
12112
50-1 Operated C
12114
51N-1 Starter
12115
51N-1 Operated
12117
50N-1 Starter
12118
50N-1 Operated
12120
51-1
12121
50-1
12200
51-2 Starter A
12201
51-2 Starter B
12202
51-2 Starter C
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 26 of 60
12203
51-2 Operated A
12204
51-2 Operated B
12205
51-2 Operated C
12207
50-2 Starter A
12208
50-2 Starter B
12209
50-2 Starter C
12210
50-2 Operated A
12211
50-2 Operated B
12212
50-2 Operated C
12214
51N-2 Starter
12215
51N-2 Operated
12217
50N-2 Starter
12218
50N-2 Operated
12220
51-1
12221
50-1
12400
50BF-1 ReTrip
12401
50BF-1 BackTrip
12402
50BF-2 ReTrip
12403
50BF-2 BackTrip
12405
59NIT Starter
12406
59NDT Starter
12407
59NIT Operated
12408
59NDT Operated
12410
46IT-1 Starter
12411
46IT-2 Starter
12412
46IT-1 Operated
12413
46IT-2 Operated
12414
46DT-1 Operated
12415
46DT-2 Operated
12416
37-1 Starter
12417
37-2 Starter
12418
37-1 Operated
12419
37-2 Operated
12500
General Alarm 1
12501
General Alarm 2
12502
General Alarm 3
12503
General Alarm 4
12504
General Alarm 5
12505
General Alarm 6
12506
General Alarm 7
12507
General Alarm 8
12508
General Alarm 9
12509
General Alarm 10
12510
General Alarm 11
12511
General Alarm 12
12512
Quick Logic E1
12513
Quick Logic E2
12514
Quick Logic E3
12515
Quick Logic E4
12516
Quick Logic E5
12517
Quick Logic E6
12518
Quick Logic E7
12519
Quick Logic E8
12520
Quick Logic E9
12521
Quick Logic E10
12522
Quick Logic E11
12523
Quick Logic E12
12524
Quick Logic E13
12525
Quick Logic E14
12526
Quick Logic E15
12527
Quick Logic E16
12544
Close Circuit Fail 1
12545
Close Circuit Fail 2
12546
Close Circuit Fail 3
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 27 of 60
12547
Close Circuit Fail 4
12548
Close Circuit Fail 5
12549
Close Circuit Fail 6
12560
46BC-1
12561
46BC-2
12562
CB1 Total Trip Count
12563
CB1 Delta Trip Count
12565
I^2t CB1 Wear
12566
I^2t CB2 Wear
12567
CB2 Total Trip Count
12568
CB2 Delta Trip Count
12570
81HBL2
12571
81HBL5
12572
37G-1
12573
37G-2
12574
Close CB 1
12575
CB1 Fail To Close
12576
CB1 DBI Alarm
12577
Open CB1
12578
CB1 Fail To Open
12579
Close CB 2
12580
CB2 Fail To Close
12581
CB2 DBI Alarm
12582
Open CB2
12583
CB2 Fail To Open
12584
CB1 Trip Time Alarm
12585
CB2 Trip Time Alarm
12820
CB1
12821
CB2
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 28 of 60
Registers
Address
Name
Format
Multiplier
Description
30001
No.of Events In Store
1 Register
0
30002
Event Record
8 Registers3
0
30010
Number of Fault Records
UINT16
30012
Number of Event Records
UINT16
30014
Number of Wavefor m
Records
UINT16
30016
Number of CPU resets
UINT16
30018
Number of CPU warmstarts
UINT16
30100
Operate Ia
FP_32BITS_3DP1
Ia x Inom
30102
Operate Ib
FP_32BITS_3DP1
30104
Operate Ic
FP_32BITS_3DP1
30106
Restrain Ia
FP_32BITS_3DP1
30108
Restrain Ib
FP_32BITS_3DP1
30110
Restrain Ic
FP_32BITS_3DP1
30112
W1 2nd Ha rmonic Ia
FP_32BITS_3DP1
30114
W1 2nd Ha rmonic Ib
FP_32BITS_3DP1
30116
W1 2nd Ha rmonic Ic
FP_32BITS_3DP1
30118
W2 2nd Ha rmonic Ia
FP_32BITS_3DP1
30120
W2 2nd Ha rmonic Ib
FP_32BITS_3DP1
30122
W2 2nd Ha rmonic Ic
FP_32BITS_3DP1
30200
Primary Ig-1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
Ig kA
30202
Secondary Ig-1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
Ig A
30204
Nominal Ig-1
FP_32BITS_3DP1
Ig x Inom
30206
Primary Ig-2
FP_32BITS_3DP1
Ig kA
30208
Seondary Ig-2
FP_32BITS_3DP1
Ig A
30210
Nominal Ig-2
FP_32BITS_3DP1
Ig x Inom
30400
Primary Voltage kV
FP_32BITS_3DP1
kV
30402
Secondary Voltage V
FP_32BITS_3DP1
V
30404
Nominal Voltage xVn
FP_32BITS_3DP1
X Vnom
30406
Frequency Hz
FP_32BITS_3DP1
30420
CB1 Wear A
FP_32BITS_3DP1
0.000001
CB1 Wear A
30421
CB1 Wear B
FP_32BITS_3DP1
0.000001
CB1 Wear B
30422
CB1 Wear C
FP_32BITS_3DP1
0.000001
CB1 Wear C
30423
CB1 Wear A Remaining
FP_32BITS_3DP1
CB1 Wear A Remain ing
30424
CB1 Wear B Remaining
FP_32BITS_3DP1
CB1 Wear B Remain ing
30425
CB1 Wear C Remaining
FP_32BITS_3DP1
CB1 Wear C Rem aining
30426
CB1 Wear Minimum
FP_32BITS_3DP1
CB1 Wear Mi nimum
30430
CB2 Wear A
FP_32BITS_3DP1
0.000001
CB2 Wear A
30431
CB2 Wear B
FP_32BITS_3DP1
0.000001
CB2 Wear B
30432
CB2 Wear C
FP_32BITS_3DP1
0.000001
CB2 W ear C
30433
CB2 Wear A Remaining
FP_32BITS_3DP1
CB2 Wear A Remain ing
30434
CB2 Wear B Remaining
FP_32BITS_3DP1
CB2 Wear B Remain ing
30435
CB2 Wear C Remaining
FP_32BITS_3DP1
CB2 Wear C Rem aining
30436
CB2 Wear Minimum
FP_32BITS_3DP1
CB2 Wear Mi nimum
30502
V/f Value xVn/fn
FP_32BITS_3DP1
30504
V/f IDMTL Status %
FP_32BITS_3DP1
30602
Thermal Status Ph A
FP_32BITS_3DP1
%
30604
Thermal Status Ph B
FP_32BITS_3DP1
%
30606
Thermal Status Ph C
FP_32BITS_3DP1
%
30610
CB1 Total Trip Count
UINT32
CB1 Total Trip Count
30612
CB1 Delta Trip Count
UINT32
CB1 Delta Trip Count
30614
CB2 Total Trip Count
UINT32
CB2 Total Trip Count
30616
CB2 Delta Trip Count
UINT32
CB2 Delta Trip Count
30700
W1 Ia Last Trip
FP_32BITS_3DP1
Ia Fault
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 29 of 60
Address
Name
Format
Multiplier
Description
30702
W1 Ib Last Trip
FP_32BITS_3DP1
Ib Fault
30704
W1 Ic Last Trip
FP_32BITS_3DP1
Ic Fault
30706
W2 Ia Last Trip
FP_32BITS_3DP1
Ia Fault
30708
W2 Ib Last Trip
FP_32BITS_3DP1
Ib Fault
30710
W2 Ic Last Trip
FP_32BITS_3DP1
Ic Fault
30714
Ig-1 Last Trip
FP_32BITS_3DP1
In Fault
30716
Ig-2 Last Trip
FP_32BITS_3DP1
In Fault
31100
W1 Primary Ia
FP_32BITS_3DP1
A
31102
W1 Primary Ib
FP_32BITS_3DP1
A
31104
W1 Primary Ic
FP_32BITS_3DP1
A
31106
W1 Secondary Ia
FP_32BITS_3DP1
A
31108
W1 Secondary Ib
FP_32BITS_3DP1
A
31110
W1 Secondary Ic
FP_32BITS_3DP1
A
31112
W1 Nominal Ia
FP_32BITS_3DP1
x Inom
31114
W1 Nominal Ib
FP_32BITS_3DP1
x Inom
31116
W1 Nominal Ic
FP_32BITS_3DP1
x Inom
31118
W1 Line Ia
FP_32BITS_3DP1
kA
31120
W1 Line Ib
FP_32BITS_3DP1
kA
31122
W1 Line Ic
FP_32BITS_3DP1
kA
31124
W1 Relay Ia
FP_32BITS_3DP1
x Inom
31126
W1 Relay Ib
FP_32BITS_3DP1
x Inom
31128
W1 Relay Ic
FP_32BITS_3DP1
x Inom
31200
W2 Primary Ia
FP_32BITS_3DP1
A
31202
W2 Primary Ib
FP_32BITS_3DP1
A
31204
W2 Primary Ic
FP_32BITS_3DP1
A
31206
W2 Secondary Ia
FP_32BITS_3DP1
A
31208
W2 Secondary Ib
FP_32BITS_3DP1
A
31210
W2 Secondary Ic
FP_32BITS_3DP1
A
31212
W2 Nominal Ia
FP_32BITS_3DP1
x Inom
31214
W2 Nominal Ib
FP_32BITS_3DP1
x Inom
31216
W2 Nominal Ic
FP_32BITS_3DP1
x Inom
31218
W2 Line Ia
FP_32BITS_3DP1
kA
31220
W2 Line Ib
FP_32BITS_3DP1
kA
31222
W2 Line Ic
FP_32BITS_3DP1
kA
31224
W2 Relay Ia
FP_32BITS_3DP1
x Inom
31226
W2 Relay Ib
FP_32BITS_3DP1
x Inom
31228
W2 Relay Ic
FP_32BITS_3DP1
x Inom
31300
W3 Primary Ia
FP_32BITS_3DP
W3 Ia kA
31302
W3 Primary Ib
FP_32BITS_3DP
W3 Ib kA
31304
W3 Primary Ic
FP_32BITS_3DP
W3 Ic kA
31306
W3 Secondary Ia
FP_32BITS_3DP
W3 Ia A
31308
W3 Secondary Ib
FP_32BITS_3DP
W3 Ib A
31310
W3 Secondary Ic
FP_32BITS_3DP
W3 Ic A
31312
W3 Nominal Ia
FP_32BITS_3DP
W3 Ia xIn
31314
W3 Nominal Ib
FP_32BITS_3DP
W3 Ib xIn
31316
W3 Nominal Ic
FP_32BITS_3DP
W3 Ic xIn
31318
W3 Line Ia
FP_32BITS_3DP
W3 Line Ia xIn
31320
W3 Line Ib
FP_32BITS_3DP
W3 Line Ib xIn
31322
W3 Line Ic
FP_32BITS_3DP
W3 Line Ic xIn
31324
W3 Relay Ia
FP_32BITS_3DP
W3 Relay I a xIn
31326
W3 Relay Ib
FP_32BITS_3DP
W3 Relay I b xIn
31328
W3 Relay Ic
FP_32BITS_3DP
W3 Relay Ic xIn
32400
W1 I Phase A Max
FP_32BITS_3DP
Max Current W1 Ia
32402
W1 I Phase B Max
FP_32BITS_3DP
Max Current W1 Ib
32404
W1 I Phase C Max
FP_32BITS_3DP
Max Current W1 Ic
32406
W2 I Phase A Max
FP_32BITS_3DP
Max Current W2 Ia
32408
W2 I Phase B Max
FP_32BITS_3DP
Max Current W2 Ib
32410
W2 I Phase C Max
FP_32BITS_3DP
Max Current W2 Ic
32412
W3 I Pha se A Max
FP_32BITS_3DP
W3 Max Current Ia
32414
W3 I Pha se B Max
FP_32BITS_3DP
W3 Max Current Ib
32416
W3 I Phase C Max
FP_32BITS_3DP
W3 Max Current Ic
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 30 of 60
1) FP_32BITS_3DP: 2 registers - 32 bit fixed point, a 32 bit integer containing a value to 3 decimal places e.g. 50000 sent = 50.000
2) UINT16: 1 register - standard 16 bit unsigned intege r
3) Sequence of 8 registers containing an event record. Read address 30002 for 8 registers (16 bytes), each read returns the earliest event record and removes it from the
internal store. Repeat this process for the number of events in the register 30001, or until no more events are returned. (the error condition exception code 2)
Holding Registers (Read Write values)
Address
Description
40001
Time Meter
Event Format
The format of the event record is defined by the zero byte. It signifies the type of record which is used to decode
the event information. The zero byte can be one of the following.
Type
Description
1
Event
2
Event with Relative Time
4
Measurand Event with Relative Time
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 31 of 60
Section 5: DNP3.0 De finiti ons
5.1 Device Profile
The following table provides a “Device Profile Document” in the standard format defined in the DNP 3.0 Subset
Definitions Document. While it is referred to in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions as a “Document,” it is in fact a
table, and only a component of a total interoperability guide. The table, in combination with the Implementation
Table provided in Section 5.2 (beginning on page 34), and the Point List Tables provided in Section 5.3
(beginning on page 44), should provide a complete configuration/interoperability guide for communicating with a
device implementing the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave Source Code Library.
DNP V3.0
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
(Also see the DNP 3.0 Implementation Table in Section 5.2, beginning on page 34.)
Vendor Name: Siemens Protection Devices Ltd.
Device Name: 7SR242, using the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP3 Slave Source Code Library, Version
3.
Highest DNP Level Supported:
For Requests: Level 3
For Responses: Level 3
Device Function:
Master
Slave
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the
complete list is described in the attached table):
For static (non-change-event) object requests, request qualifier codes 07 and 08 (limited quantity), and 17 and
28 (index) are supported. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers
00 or 01.
Output Event Object 11 is supported.
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets):
Transmitted: 256
Received 256
Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):
Transmitted: 2048
Received 2048
Maximum Data Link Re-tries:
None
Fixed (3)
Configurable from 0 to 65535
Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:
None
Configurable
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:
Never
Always
Sometimes
Configurable as: Never, Only for multi-frame messages, or Always
Requires Application Layer Confirmation:
Never
Always
When reporting Event Data (Slave devices only)
When sending multi-fragment responses (Slave devices only)
Sometimes
Configurable as: “Only when reporting event data”, or “When reporting event data or multi-fragment
messages.”
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 32 of 60
DNP V3.0
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
(Also see the DNP 3.0 Implementation Table in Section 5.2, beginning on page 34.)
Timeouts while waiting for:
Data Link Confirm: None Fixed - 2sec Variable Configurable.
Complete Appl. Fr ag ment : None Fixed at ____ Variable Configurable
Application Confirm: None Fixed - 10sec Variable Configurable.
Complete Appl. Response: None Fixed at ____ Variable Configurable
Others: Transmission Delay, (0 sec)
Select/Operate Arm Timeout, (5 sec)
Need Time Interval, (30 minutes)
Application File Timeout, (60 sec)
Unsolicited Notification Delay, (5 seconds)
Unsolicited Response Retry Delay, (between 3 9 seconds)
Unsolicited Offline Interval, (30 seconds)
Binary Change Event Scan Period, (Polled, Not Applicable)
Double Bit Change Event Scan Period, (Unsupported - Not Applicable)
Analog Change Event Scan Period, (Unsupported - Not Applicable)
Counter Change Event Scan Period, (Unsupported - Not Applicable)
Frozen Counter Change Event Scan Period, (Unsupported - Not Applicable)
String Change Event Scan Period, (Unsupported - Not Applicable)
Virtual Terminal Event Scan Period, (Unsupported - Not Ap plicable)
Sends/Executes Control Operations:
WRITE Binary Outputs Never Always Sometimes Configurable
SELECT/OPERATE Never Always Sometimes Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE Never Always Sometimes Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE NO ACK Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Count > 1 Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Pulse On Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Pulse Off Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Latch On Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Latch Off Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Queue Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Clear Queue Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Attach explanation if 'Sometimes' or 'Configurable' was checked for any operation.
Reports Binary Input Change Events when no
specific variation requested:
Never
Only time-tagged
Only non-time-tagged
Configurable to send one or the
other
Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events
when no specific variation requested:
Never
Binary Input Change With Time
Binary Input Change With Relative Time
Configurable
Sends Unsolicited Responses :
Never
Configurable
Only certain objects
Sometimes (attach explanation)
ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED
Function codes supported
Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:
Never
When Device Restarts
When Status Flags Change
No other options are permitted.
Default Counter Object/Variation:
No Counters Reported
Configurable
Default Object
Default Variation:
Point-by-point list attached
Counters Roll Over at:
No Counters Reported
Configurable (attach explanation)
16 Bits
32 Bits
Other Value: _____
Point-by-point list attached
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 33 of 60
DNP V3.0
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
(Also see the DNP 3.0 Implementation Table in Section 5.2, beginning on page 34.)
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:
Yes
No
Configurable
Sequential File Transfer Support:
File Transfer Support Yes No
Append File Mode Yes No
Custom Status Code Strings Yes No
Permissions Field Yes No
File Events Assigned to Class Yes No
File Events Send Immediately Yes No
Multiple Blocks in a Fragment Yes No
Max Number of Files Open 0
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 34 of 60
5.2 Implem entation Table
The following table identifies which object variations, function codes, and qualifiers the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc.
DNP 3.0 Slave Source Code Library supports in both request messages and in response messages. For static
(non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00
or 01. Requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or 28. For change-event
objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.
In the table below, text shaded as 00, 01 (start stop) indicates Subset Level 3 functionality (beyond Subset Level
2).
In the table below, text shaded as 07, 08 (limited qty) indicates functionality beyond Subset Level 3.
OBJECT REQUEST
(Library will parse)
RESPONSE
(Library will respond with)
Object
Number
Variation
Number
Description Function Codes
(dec)
Qualifier Codes (hex) Function
Codes (dec)
Qualifier
Codes (hex)
1 0 Binary Input Any
Variation
1 (read)
22 (assign
class)
00, 01(start-stop)
06(no range, or all)
07, 08(limit ed qty )
17, 27, 28(index)
1
1
(default
see
note 1)
Binary Input 1 (read)
00, 01(start-stop)
06(no range, or all)
07, 08(limit ed qty )
17, 27, 28(index)
129
(response)
00, 01(start-
sto
17, 28(index
see note 2)
1 2
Binary Input with
Status 1 (read)
00, 01(start-stop)
06(no range, or all)
07, 08(limit ed qty )
17, 27, 28(index)
129
(response)
00, 01(start-
sto
17, 28(index
see note 2)
2 0 Binary Input
Change Any
Variation
1 (read)
06(no range, or all)
07, 08(limit ed qty )
2 1 Binary Input
Change without
Time 1 (read) 06(no range, or all)
07, 08(limit ed qty )
129
(response)
130 (unsol.
resp)
17, 28
(index)
2 2
Binary Input
Change with Time 1 (read) 06(no range, or all)
07, 08(limit ed qty )
129
(response)
130 (unsol.
resp)
17, 28
(index)
2
3
(default
see
note 1)
Binary Input
Change with
Relative Time 1 (read) 06(no range, or all)
07, 08(limit ed qty )
129
(response)
130 (unsol.
resp)
17, 28
(index)
3 0 Double Bit Input
Any Variation
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 35 of 60
OBJECT REQUEST
(Library will parse)
RESPONSE
(Library will respond with)
Object
Number
Variation
Number
Description Function Codes
(dec)
Qualifier Codes (hex) Function
Codes (dec)
Qualifier
Codes (hex)
3
1
(default
see note
1)
Double Bit Input 1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-
stop)
17, 28 (index
see note 1)
3 2
Double Bit Input
with Status 1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-
stop)
17, 28 (index
see note 1)
4 0 Double Bit Input
Change Any
Variation
1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
4 1 Double Bit Input
Change without
Time
1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp)
17, 28
(index )
4 2
Double Bit Input
Change with Time 1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp)
17, 28
(index )
4 3
(default
see note 1)
Double Bit Input
Change with
Relative Time
1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp)
17, 28
(index )
10 0 Binary Output Any
Variation
1 (read)
22 (assign
class)
00, 01(start-stop)
06(no range, or all)
07, 08(limit ed qty )
17, 27, 28(index)
10 1
Binary Output
1 (read)
00, 01(start-stop)
06(no range, or all)
07, 08(limit ed qty )
17, 27, 28(index)
129
(response)
00, 01(start-
sto
17, 28(index
see note 1)
1 (write
00, 01(start-stop)
10
2
(default
see
note 1)
Binary Output
Status 1 (read)
00, 01(start-stop)
06(no range, or all)
07, 08(limit ed qty )
17, 27, 28(index)
129
(response)
00, 01(start-
sto
17, 28(index
see note 2)
11 0 Binary Output
Change Any
Variation
1 (read)
06(no range, or all)
07, 08(limit ed qty )
11
1
(default
see
note 1)
Binary Output
Change without
Time
1 (read)
06(no range, or all)
07, 08(limit ed qty )
129
(response)
130 (unsol.
resp)
17, 28
(index )
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 36 of 60
OBJECT REQUEST
(Library will parse)
RESPONSE
(Library will respond with)
Object
Number
Variation
Number
Description Function Codes
(dec)
Qualifier Codes (hex) Function
Codes (dec)
Qualifier
Codes (hex)
11 2
Binary Output
Change with Time 1 (read)
06(no range, or all)
07, 08(limit ed qty )
129
(response)
130 (unsol.
resp)
17, 28
(index )
12 0 Control Relay
Output Block 22 (assign
class)
00, 01(start-stop)
06(no range, or all)
07, 08(limit ed qty )
17, 27, 28(index)
12 1 Control Relay
Output Block
3 (select)
4 (operate)
5 (direct op)
6(dir. op, noack)
17, 28 (index) 129
(response) echo of
request
12 2 Pattern Control
Block
3 (select)
4 (operate)
5 (direct op)
6(dir. op, noack)
7(limited quant ity ) 129
(response) echo of
request
12 3 Pattern Mask
3 (select)
4 (operate)
5 (direct op)
6(dir. op, noack)
00, 01(start-stop) 129
(response) echo of
request
13 0 Binary Output
Command Event
Any Variation
1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
13 1 Binary Output
Command Event
without Time
1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp) 17, 28
(index )
13 2
Binary Output
Command Event
with Time
1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp) 17, 28
(index )
20 0 Binary Input Any
Variation 1 (read)
22 (assign class)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty
17, 27, 28 (index)
7 (freeze)
8 (freeze noack)
9 (freeze clear)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
20 1 32-Bit Binary Counter
(with Flag)
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-
stop)
17, 28 (index
see note 2)
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 37 of 60
OBJECT REQUEST
(Library will parse)
RESPONSE
(Library will respond with)
Object
Number
Variation
Number
Description Function Codes
(dec)
Qualifier Codes (hex) Function
Codes (dec)
Qualifier
Codes (hex)
20 2 16-Bit Binary Counter
(with Flag)
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-
stop)
17, 28 (index
see note 2)
20 3 32-Bit Delta Count er
(with Flag)
20 4 16-Bit Delta Count er
(with Flag)
20
5
(default
see
note 1)
32-Bit Binary Counter
without Flag
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 27, 28
(index)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-
stop)
17, 28 (index
see note 2)
20 6 16-Bit Binary Counter
without Flag
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-
stop)
17, 28 (index
see note 2)
20 7 32-Bit Delta Count er
without Flag
20 8 16-Bit Delta Count er
without Flag
21 0 Frozen Counter Any
Variation
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
21 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter
(with Flag) 1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-
stop)
17, 28 (index
see note 2)
21 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter
(with Flag) 1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-
stop)
17, 28 (index
see note 2)
21 3 32-Bit Frozen Delta
Counter
(with Flag)
21 4 16-Bit Frozen Delta
Counter
(with Flag)
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 38 of 60
OBJECT REQUEST
(Library will parse)
RESPONSE
(Library will respond with)
Object
Number
Variation
Number
Description Function Codes
(dec)
Qualifier Codes (hex) Function
Codes (dec)
Qualifier
Codes (hex)
21 5 32-Bit Frozen Counter
with Time Of Freeze 1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
129 (response)
00, 01(start-
stop
17, 28 (index
see note 1)
21 6 16-Bit Frozen Counter
with Time Of Freeze 1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
129 (response)
00, 01(start-
stop
17, 28 (index
see note 1)
21 7 32-Bit Frozen Delta
Counter with Time Of
Freeze
21 8 16-Bit Frozen Delta
Counter with Time Of
Freeze
21 9
(default
see note 1)
32-Bit Frozen Counter
without Flag 1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-
stop)
17, 28 (index
see note 2)
21 10
16-Bit Frozen Counter
without Flag 1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-
stop)
17, 28 (index
see note 2)
21 11 32-Bit Frozen Delta
Counter without Flag
21 12 16-Bit Frozen Delta
Counter without Flag
22 0 Counter Change
Event Any Variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
22 1
(default
see note 1)
32-Bit Counter
Change Event without
Time
1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp) 17, 28
(index)
22 2
16-Bit Counter
Change Event without
Time
1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp) 17, 28
(index)
22 3 32-Bit Delta Count er
Change Event without
Time
22 4 16-Bit Delta Count er
Change Event without
Time
22 5 32-Bit Count er
Change Event with
Time
1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp)
17, 28
(index)
22 6 16-Bit Count er
Change Event with
Time
1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp)
17, 28 (index)
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 39 of 60
OBJECT REQUEST
(Library will parse)
RESPONSE
(Library will respond with)
Object
Number
Variation
Number
Description Function Codes
(dec)
Qualifier Codes (hex) Function
Codes (dec)
Qualifier
Codes (hex)
22 7 32-Bit Delta Count er
Change Event with
Time
22 8 16-Bit Delta Count er
Change Event with
Time
23 0
Frozen Counter Event
(Variation 0 is used to
request default
variation)
1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
23 1
(default
see note 1)
32-Bit Frozen Counter
Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp)
17,28 (index)
23 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter
Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp)
17,28 (index)
23 3 32-Bit Frozen Delta
Counter Event
23 4 16-Bit Frozen Delta
Counter Event
23 5 32-Bit Frozen Counter
Event with Time 1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp)
17, 28
(index)
23 6 16-Bit Frozen Counter
Event with Time 1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp)
17, 28
(index)
23 7 32-Bit Frozen Delta
Counter Event with
Time
23 8 16-Bit Frozen Delta
Counter Event with
Time
30 0 Analog Input - Any
Variation
1 (read)
22(assign class)
00, 01(start-stop)
06(no range, or all)
07, 08(limit ed qty )
17, 27, 28(index)
30 1 32-Bit Analog Input 1 (read)
00, 01(start-stop)
06(no range, or all)
07, 08(limit ed qty )
17, 27, 28(index)
129
(response)
00, 01(start-
sto
17, 28(index
see note 2)
30 2
16-Bit Analog Input 1 (read)
00, 01(start-stop)
06(no range, or all)
07, 08(limit ed qty )
17, 27, 28(index)
129
(response)
00, 01(start-
sto
17, 28(index
see note 2)
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 40 of 60
OBJECT REQUEST
(Library will parse)
RESPONSE
(Library will respond with)
Object
Number
Variation
Number
Description Function Codes
(dec)
Qualifier Codes (hex) Function
Codes (dec)
Qualifier
Codes (hex)
30
3
(default
see
note 1)
32-Bit Analog Input
without Flag 1 (read)
00, 01(start-stop)
06(no range, or all)
07, 08(limit ed qty )
17, 27, 28(index)
129
(response)
00, 01(start-
sto
17, 28(index
see note 2)
30 4 16-Bit Analog Input
without Flag 1 (read)
00, 01(start-stop)
06(no ran ge, or all)
07, 08(limit ed qty )
17, 27, 28(index)
129
(response)
00, 01(start-
sto
17, 28(index
see note 2)
30 5 short floating point 1 (read)
00, 01(start-stop)
06(no range, or all)
07, 08(limit ed qty )
17, 27, 28(index)
129
(response)
00, 01(start-
sto
17, 28(index
see note 2)
30 6 long floating point 1 (read)
00, 01(start-stop)
06(no range, or all)
07, 08(limit ed qty )
17, 27, 28(index)
129
(response)
00, 01(start-
sto
17, 28(index
see note 1)
31 0 Frozen Analog Input
Any Variation
31 1 32-Bit Frozen Analog
input
31 2 16-Bit Frozen Analog
input
31 3 32-Bit Frozen Analog
input with Time of
freeze
31 4 16-Bit Frozen Analog
input with Time of
freeze
31 5 32-Bit Frozen Analog
input without Flag
31 6 16-Bit Frozen Analog
input without Flag
32 0 Analog Change Event
Any Variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
32 1
(default
see note 1)
32-Bit Analog Change
Event without Time 1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp) 17, 28
(index)
32 2 16-Bit Analog Change
Event without Time 1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp)
17, 28
(index)
32 3 32-Bit Analog Change
Event with Time 1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
129
(response)
130
(unsol. resp)
17, 28 (index)
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 41 of 60
OBJECT REQUEST
(Library will parse)
RESPONSE
(Library will respond with)
Object
Number
Variation
Number
Description Function Codes
(dec)
Qualifier Codes (hex) Function
Codes (dec)
Qualifier
Codes (hex)
32 4 16-Bit Analog Change
Event with Time 1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
129
(response)
130
(unsol. resp)
17, 28 (index)
32 5 short floating point
Analog Change Event
without Time
1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
129
(response)
130
(unsol. resp)
17, 28 (index)
32 6 long floating point
Analog Change Event
without Time
1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
129
(response)
130
(unsol. resp)
17, 28 (index)
32 7 short floating point
Analog Change Event
with Time
1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp)
17, 28 (index)
32 8 long floating point
Analog Change Event
with Time
1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp)
17, 28 (index)
33 0 Frozen Analog Event
Any Variation
33 1 32-Bit Frozen Analog
Event without Time
33 2 16-Bit Frozen Analog
Event without Time
33 3 32-Bit Frozen Analog
Event with Time
33 4 16-Bit Frozen Analog
Event wit h T i me
33 5 Short Floating Point
Frozen Analog Event
33 6 Long Floating Point
Frozen Analog Event
33 7 Extended Floating
Point Frozen Analog
Event
34 0
Analog Input
Deadband
(Variation 0 is used
to request default
variation)
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
34 1 16 bit Analog Input
Deadband
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-
stop)
17, 28 (index
see note 2)
2 (write)
00, 01 (start-stop)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 42 of 60
OBJECT REQUEST
(Library will parse)
RESPONSE
(Library will respond with)
Object
Number
Variation
Number
Description Function Codes
(dec)
Qualifier Codes (hex) Function
Codes (dec)
Qualifier
Codes (hex)
34
2
(default
see note
1)
32 bit Analog Input
Deadband
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-
stop)
17, 28 (index
see note 2)
2 (write)
00, 01 (start-stop)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
34 3 Short Floating Point
Analog Input
Deadband
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-
stop)
17, 28 (index
see note
2)
2 (write)
00, 01 (start-stop)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 27, 28 (index)
50
0
Time and Date
50
1
(default
see
note 1)
Time and Date
1 (read)
07, (limited qty = 1) 129
(response)
07
(limited qt
2 (write)
07(limited qty = 1)
50 3 Time and Date Last
Recorded Time
2
(write)
07(limited qt y )
51 1 Time and Date CTO
129
(response)
130 (unsol.
resp)
07
(limited qty)
(qty = 1)
51 2 Unsynchronized
Time and Date CTO
129
(response)
130 (unsol.
resp)
07
(limited qty)
(qty = 1)
52 1 Time Delay Coarse 129
(response) 07
(limited qty)
(qty = 1)
52 2 Time Delay Fine 129
(response) 07
(limited qty)
(qty = 1)
60
0
Not Defined
60
1
Class 0 Data
1 (read)
06(no range, or all)
60 2 Class 1 Data
1 (read)
06(no range, or all)
07, 08(lim ited qty )
20(enbl. unsol.)
21(dab. unsol.)
22(assign cla ss )
06(no range, or all)
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 43 of 60
OBJECT REQUEST
(Library will parse)
RESPONSE
(Library will respond with)
Object
Number
Variation
Number
Description Function Codes
(dec)
Qualifier Codes (hex) Function
Codes (dec)
Qualifier
Codes (hex)
60 3 Class 2 Data
1 (read) 06(no range, or all)
07, 08(lim ited qty )
20(enbl. unsol.)
21(dab. unsol.)
22(assign cla ss )
06(no range, or all)
60 4 Class 3 Data
1 (read)
06(no range, or all)
07, 08(lim ited qty )
20(enbl. unsol.)
21(dab. unsol.)
22(assign cla ss )
06(no range, or all)
80 1 Internal Indications
1 (read) 00, 01(start-stop) 129
(respons
00, 01 (start-
stop)
2 (write)
(see note 3) 00 (start-stop)
index=7
No Object (function
code only)
13(cold restart)
No Object (function
code only)
14(warm restart)
No Object (function
code only)
23(delay meas.)
No Object (function
code only) 24
(record current time)
Note 1: A Default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2,
or 3 scans. Default variations are configurable; however, default settings for the configuration parameters are
indicated in the table above.
Note 2: For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with
qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be
responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. (For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.)
Note 3: Writes of Internal Indications are only supported for index 7 (Restart IIN1-7)
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 44 of 60
5.3 Point List
The tables below identify all the default data points provided by the implementation of the Triangle MicroWorks,
Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave Source Code Library.
Binary Input Points
The default binary input event buffer size is set to allow 100 events.
Note, not all points listed here apply to all builds of devices.
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input 2 with status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 3 (Binary Input Change with Relative Time)
Point Index Name/Description Default Class Default Variation
Static Object 1 Default Variation Event
Object 2
1
Binary Input 1
2
2
2
2
Binary Input 2
2
2
2
3
Binary Input 3
2
2
2
4
Binary Input 4
2
2
2
5
Binary Input 5
2
2
2
6
Binary Input 6
2
2
2
7
Binary Input 7
2
2
2
8
Binary Input 8
2
2
2
9
Binary Input 9
2
2
2
10
Binary Input 10
2
2
2
11
Binary Input 11
2
2
2
12
Binary Input 12
2
2
2
13
Binary Input 13
2
2
2
14
Binary Input 14
2
2
2
15
Binary Input 15
2
2
2
16
Binary Input 16
2
2
2
17
Binary Input 17
2
2
2
18
Binary Input 18
2
2
2
19
Binary Input 19
2
2
2
20
Binary Input 20
2
2
2
21
Binary Input 21
2
2
2
22
Binary Input 22
2
2
2
23
Binary Input 23
2
2
2
24
Binary Input 24
2
2
2
25
Binary Input 25
2
2
2
26
Binary Input 26
2
2
2
27
Binary Input 27
2
2
2
28
Binary Input 28
2
2
2
29
Binary Input 29
2
2
2
30
Binary Input 30
2
2
2
31
Binary Input 31
2
2
2
32
Binary Input 32
2
2
2
35
Remote mode
2
2
2
36
Service mode
2
2
2
37
Local mode
2
2
2
38
Local & Remote
2
2
2
40
General Trip
2
2
2
41
Trip Circuit Fail
2
2
2
42
A-Starter
2
2
2
43
B-Starter
2
2
2
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 45 of 60
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input 2 with status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 3 (Binary Input Change with Relative Time)
Point Index Name/Description Default Class Default Variation
Static Object 1 Default Variation Event
Object 2
44
C-Starter
2
2
2
45
General Starter
2
2
2
47
Trip L1
2
2
2
48
Trip L2
2
2
2
49
Start/Pick-up N
2
2
2
50
Trip L3
2
2
2
52
87BD
2
2
2
53
87HS
2
2
2
54
51-1
2
2
2
55
50-1
2
2
2
56
51N-1
2
2
2
57
50N-1
2
2
2
58
51G-1
2
2
2
59
50G-1
2
2
2
60
51-2
2
2
2
61
50-2
2
2
2
62
51N-2
2
2
2
63
50N-2
2
2
2
64
51G-2
2
2
2
65
50G-2
2
2
2
66
51-3
2
2
2
67
50-3
2
2
2
68
51N-3
2
2
2
69
50N-3
2
2
2
70
51G-3
2
2
2
71
50G-3
2
2
2
78
50BF-1-1
2
2
2
79
50BF-1-2
2
2
2
80
50BF-2-1
2
2
2
81
50BF-2-2
2
2
2
82
49-Alarm
2
2
2
83
49-Trip
2
2
2
84
60 CTS
2
2
2
85
46IT-1
2
2
2
86
46DT-1
2
2
2
87
46IT-2
2
2
2
88
46DT-2
2
2
2
89
64H-1
2
2
2
90
64H-2
2
2
2
91
64H-3
2
2
2
92
37-1
2
2
2
93
37-2
2
2
2
94
46BC-1
2
2
2
95
46BC-2
2
2
2
96
27/59-1
2
2
2
97
27/59-2
2
2
2
98
27/59-3
2
2
2
99
27/59-4
2
2
2
100
59NIT
2
2
2
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 46 of 60
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input 2 with status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 3 (Binary Input Change with Relative Time)
Point Index Name/Description Default Class Default Variation
Static Object 1 Default Variation Event
Object 2
101
59NDT
2
2
2
102
81-1
2
2
2
103
81-2
2
2
2
104
81-3
2
2
2
105
81-4
2
2
2
106
81-5
2
2
2
107
81-6
2
2
2
108
24DT-1
2
2
2
109
24DT-2
2
2
2
110
24IT
2
2
2
111
Trip Circuit Fail 1
2
2
2
112
Trip Circuit Fail 2
2
2
2
113
Trip Circuit Fail 3
2
2
2
114
Trip Circuit Fail 4
2
2
2
115
Trip Circuit Fail 5
2
2
2
116
Trip Circuit Fail 6
2
2
2
121
CB1 Total Trip Count
2
2
2
122
CB1 Delta Trip Count
2
2
2
124
I^2t CB1 Wear
2
2
2
125
I^2t CB2 Wear
2
2
2
126
CB2 Total Trip Count
2
2
2
127
CB2 Delta Trip Count
2
2
2
129
General Alarm 1
2
2
2
130
General Alarm 2
2
2
2
131
General Alarm 3
2
2
2
132
General Alarm 4
2
2
2
133
General Alarm 5
2
2
2
134
General Alarm 6
2
2
2
135
General Alarm 7
2
2
2
136
General Alarm 8
2
2
2
137
General Alarm 9
2
2
2
138
General Alarm 10
2
2
2
139
General Alarm 11
2
2
2
140
General Alarm 12
2
2
2
141
Quick Logic E1
2
2
2
142
Quick Logic E2
2
2
2
143
Quick Logic E3
2
2
2
144
Quick Logic E4
2
2
2
145
Quick Logic E5
2
2
2
146
Quick Logic E6
2
2
2
147
Quick Logic E7
2
2
2
148
Quick Logic E8
2
2
2
149
Quick Logic E9
2
2
2
150
Quick Logic E10
2
2
2
151
Quick Logic E11
2
2
2
152
Quick Logic E12
2
2
2
153
Quick Logic E13
2
2
2
154
Quick Logic E14
2
2
2
155
Quick Logic E15
2
2
2
156
Quick Logic E16
2
2
2
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 47 of 60
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input 2 with status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 3 (Binary Input Change with Relative Time)
Point Index Name/Description Default Class Default Variation
Static Object 1 Default Variation Event
Object 2
191
81HBL2
2
2
2
192
81HBL5
2
2
2
193
37G-1
2
2
2
194
37G-2
2
2
2
195
Close Circuit Fail 1
2
2
2
196
Close Circuit Fail 2
2
2
2
197
Close Circuit Fail 3
2
2
2
198
Close Circuit Fail 4
2
2
2
199
Close Circuit Fail 5
2
2
2
200
Close Circuit Fail 6
2
2
2
201
Close Circuit Fail 7
2
2
2
202
Close Circuit Fail 8
2
2
2
203
Close Circuit Fail 9
2
2
2
204
Close Circuit Fail 10
2
2
2
205
CB1 Trip Time Alarm
2
2
2
206
CB2 Trip Time Alarm
2
2
2
207
Close CB 1
2
2
2
208
CB1 Fail To Close
2
2
2
209
CB1 DBI
2
2
2
210
Open CB1
2
2
2
211
CB1 Fail To Open
2
2
2
212
Close CB 2
2
2
2
213
CB2 Fail To Close
2
2
2
214
CB2 DBI
2
2
2
215
Open CB2
2
2
2
216
CB2 Fail To Open
2
2
2
217
E/F Out
2
2
2
221
RL 1
2
2
2
222
RL 2
2
2
2
223
RL 3
2
2
2
224
RL 4
2
2
2
225
RL 5
2
2
2
226
RL 6
2
2
2
227
RL 7
2
2
2
228
RL 8
2
2
2
229
RL 9
2
2
2
230
RL 10
2
2
2
231
RL 11
2
2
2
232
RL 12
2
2
2
233
RL 13
2
2
2
234
RL 14
2
2
2
254
Setting G1 selected
2
2
2
255
Setting G2 selected
2
2
2
256
Setting G3 selected
2
2
2
257
Setting G4 selected
2
2
2
258
Setting G5 selected
2
2
2
259
Setting G6 selected
2
2
2
260
Setting G7 selected
2
2
2
261
Setting G8 selected
2
2
2
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 48 of 60
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input 2 with status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 3 (Binary Input Change with Relative Time)
Point Index Name/Description Default Class Default Variation
Static Object 1 Default Variation Event
Object 2
262
CB 1
2
2
2
263
CB 2
2
2
2
268
Reset I^2t CB1 Wear
2
2
2
269
Reset I^2t CB2 Wear
2
2
2
277
CB 3
2
2
2
278
CB 4
2
2
2
279
CB 5
2
2
2
501
Virtual Input 1
2
2
2
502
Virtual Input 2
2
2
2
503
Virtual Input 3
2
2
2
504
Virtual Input 4
2
2
2
505
Virtual Input 5
2
2
2
506
Virtual Input 6
2
2
2
507
Virtual Input 7
2
2
2
508
Virtual Input 8
2
2
2
509
Virtual Input 9
2
2
2
510
Virtual Input 10
2
2
2
511
Virtual Input 11
2
2
2
512
Virtual Input 12
2
2
2
513
Virtual Input 13
2
2
2
514
Virtual Input 14
2
2
2
515
Virtual Input 15
2
2
2
516
Virtual Input 16
2
2
2
601
Led 1
2
2
2
602
Led 2
2
2
2
603
Led 3
2
2
2
604
Led 4
2
2
2
605
Led 5
2
2
2
606
Led 6
2
2
2
607
Led 7
2
2
2
608
Led 8
2
2
2
609
Led 9
2
2
2
610
Led 10
2
2
2
611
Led 11
2
2
2
612
Led 12
2
2
2
613
Led 13
2
2
2
614
Led 14
2
2
2
615
Led 15
2
2
2
616
Led 16
2
2
2
617
Led 17
2
2
2
618
Led 18
2
2
2
619
Led 19
2
2
2
620
Led 20
2
2
2
621
Led 21
2
2
2
622
Led 22
2
2
2
623
Led 23
2
2
2
624
Led 24
2
2
2
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 49 of 60
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input 2 with status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 3 (Binary Input Change with Relative Time)
Point Index Name/Description Default Class Default Variation
Static Object 1 Default Variation Event
Object 2
701
Led PU1
2
2
2
702
Led PU 2
2
2
2
703
Led PU 3
2
2
2
704
Led PU 4
2
2
2
705
Led PU 5
2
2
2
706
Led PU 6
2
2
2
707
Led PU 7
2
2
2
708
Led PU 8
2
2
2
709
Led PU 9
2
2
2
710
Led PU 10
2
2
2
711
Led PU 11
2
2
2
712
Led PU 12
2
2
2
713
Led PU 13
2
2
2
714
Led PU 14
2
2
2
715
Led PU 15
2
2
2
716
Led PU 16
2
2
2
717
Led PU 17
2
2
2
718
Led PU 18
2
2
2
719
Led PU 19
2
2
2
720
Led PU 20
2
2
2
721
Led PU 21
2
2
2
722
Led PU 22
2
2
2
723
Led PU 23
2
2
2
724
Led PU 24
2
2
2
5.3.1 Double Bit Binary Input Points
Double Bit Binary Inputs are by default returned in a class zero interrogation.
Double Bit Input Points
Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 3
Change Event Object Number: 4
Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Double Bit Binary Input packed format)
Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 3 (Double Bit Binary Input Event with
relative time)
Point
Index Name/Description
Default
Change Event
Assigned C las s
(1, 2, 3 or none)
0 CB 1 2
1 CB 2 2
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 50 of 60
Binary Output Status Points and Control Relay Output Blocks
The following table lists both the Binary Output Status Points (Object 10) and the Control Relay Output Blocks
(Object 12).
While Binary Output Status Points are included here for completeness, they are not often polled by DNP 3.0
Masters. It is recommended that Binary Output Status points represent the most recent DNP “commanded” value
for the corresponding Control Relay Output Block (CROB) point. Because many, if not most, Control Relay
Output Block points are controlled through pulse mechanisms, the value of the output status may in fact be
meaningless. Binary Output Status points are not recommended to be included in class 0 polls.
As an alternative, it is recommended that “actual” status values of Control Relay Output Block points be looped
around and mapped as Binary Inputs. (The “actual” status value, as opposed to the “commanded” status value, is
the value of the actuated control. For example, a DNP control command may be blocked through hardware or
software mechanisms; in this case, the actual status value would indicate the control failed because of the
blocking. Looping Control Relay Output Block actual status values as Binary Inputs has several advantages:
it allows actual statuses to be included in class 0 polls,
it allows change event reporting of the actual statuses, which is a more efficient and time-accurate
method of communicating control values,
and it allows reporting of time-based information associated with controls, including any delays before
controls are actuated, and any durations if the controls are pulsed.
The default select/control buffer size is large enough to hold 10 of the largest select requests possible.
Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status)
Control Relay Output Blocks
Object Number:
12
Point
Index Name/
Description
Default
Class
Default
Static
Object 10
Variation
Default
Event
Object 11
Variation
Supported
CROB
Fields
Default
CROB
Fields
1 Binary Output 1 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
2 Binary Output 2 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
3 Binary Output 3 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
4 Binary Output 4 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
5 Binary Output 5 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
6 Binary Output 6 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
7 Binary Output 7 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
8 Binary Output 8 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
9 Binary Output 9 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
10 Binary Output 10 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
11 Binary Output 11 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
12 Binary Output 12 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
13 Binary Output 13 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
14 Binary Output 14 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
0
33 LED reset 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
34 Settings Group 1 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Latch On
35 Settings Group 2 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Latch On
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 51 of 60
Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status)
Control Relay Output Blocks
Object Number: 12
Point
Index Name/
Description
Default
Class
Default
Static
Object 10
Variation
Default
Event
Object 11
Variation
Supported
CROB
Fields
Default
CROB
Fields
36 Settings Group 3 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Latch On
37 Settings Group 4 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Latch On
38 Settings Group 5 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Latch On
39 Settings Group 6 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Latch On
40 Settings Group 7 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Latch On
41 Settings Group 8 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Latch On
42 CB 1 0 2 2
Pulse On
Pulse Off
Latch On
Latch Off
Pulse On
Pulse Off
43 CB 2 0 2 2
Pulse On
Pulse Off
Latch On
Latch Off
Pulse On
Pulse Off
44
Demand metering reset, write
only location.
0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
45
Reset CB1 Total Trip Count,
write only location.
0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
46
Reset CB1 Delta Trip Count,
write only location.
0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
47
Reset CB1 Lockout Trip Count,
write only location.
0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
48 Reset I^2t CB1 Wear 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
49 Reset I^2t CB2 Wear 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
50
Reset CB2 Total Trip Count,
write only location.
0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
51
Reset CB2 Delta Trip Count,
write only location.
0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
52
Reset CB2 Lockout Trip Count,
write only location.
0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
53 Remote mode 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
54 Serv ice mode 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
55 Local mode 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
56 Local & Remote 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
60 E/F Out 0 2 2
Pulse On
Pulse Off
Latch On
Latch Off
Pulse On
Pulse Off
96 User SP Command 1 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
97 User SP Command 2 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
98 User SP Command 3 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
99 User SP Command 4 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 52 of 60
Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status)
Control Relay Output Blocks
Object Number: 12
Point
Index Name/
Description
Default
Class
Default
Static
Object 10
Variation
Default
Event
Object 11
Variation
Supported
CROB
Fields
Default
CROB
Fields
100 User SP Command 5 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
101 User SP Command 6 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
102 User SP Command 7 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
103 User SP Command 8 0 2 2
Pulse On
Latch On
Pulse On
104 User DP Command 1 0 2 2
Pulse On
Pulse Off
Latch On
Latch Off
Pulse On
Pulse Off
105 User DP Command 2 0 2 2
Pulse On
Pulse Off
Latch On
Latch Off
Pulse On
Pulse Off
106 User DP Command 3 0 2 2
Pulse On
Pulse Off
Latch On
Latch Off
Pulse On
Pulse Off
107 User DP Command 4 0 2 2
Pulse On
Pulse Off
Latch On
Latch Off
Pulse On
Pulse Off
108 User DP Command 5 0 2 2
Pulse On
Pulse Off
Latch On
Latch Off
Pulse On
Pulse Off
109 User DP Command 6 0 2 2
Pulse On
Pulse Off
Latch On
Latch Off
Pulse On
Pulse Off
110 User DP Command 7 0 2 2
Pulse On
Pulse Off
Latch On
Latch Off
Pulse On
Pulse Off
111 User DP Command 8 0 2 2
Pulse On
Pulse Off
Latch On
Latch Off
Pulse On
Pulse Off
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 53 of 60
5.3.2 Binary Counters
The following table lists both the Counters (Object 20) and Counter change events (Onbject 22).
The “Default Deadband,” and the “Default Change Event Assigned Class” columns are used to represent the
absolute amount by which the point must change before a Counter change event will be generated, and once
generated in which class poll (1, 2, 3, or none) will the change event be reported.
Counters are by default returned in a class zero interrogation.
Counters
Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 20
Change Event Object Number: 22
Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 5 (32-Bit Counter without Flag)
Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Change Event with Flag)
Point # Default
Class
Default
Static
Variant
Default
Event
Variant
Name Deadband
0
3 5 1
Waveform Records
1
1
3 5 1
Fault Records
1
2
3 5 1
Event Records
1
3
3 5 1
Data Log Records
1
4
3 5 1
Number User Files
1
5
3 5 1
Start Count
1
6
3 5 1
Start Count Target
1
7
3 5 1
Active Setting Group
1
21
3 5 1
E1 Counter
1
22
3 5 1
E2 Counter
1
23
3 5 1
E3 Counter
1
24
3 5 1
E4 Counter
1
25
3 5 1
E5 Counter
1
26
3 5 1
E6 Counter
1
27
3 5 1
E7 Counter
1
28
3 5 1
E8 Counter
1
29
3 5 1
E9 Counter
1
30
3 5 1
E10 Counter
1
31
3 5 1
E11 Counter
1
32
3 5 1
E12 Counter
1
33
3 5 1
E13 Counter
1
34
3 5 1
E14 Counter
1
35
3 5 1
E15 Counter
1
36
3 5 1
E16 Counter
1
42
3 5 1
CB1 Total Open Count
1
43
3 5 1
CB1 Delta Open Count
1
44
3 5 1
CB2 Total Open Count
1
45
3 5 1
CB2 Delta Open Count
1
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 54 of 60
5.3.3 Frozen Counters
The following table lists both the Frozen Counters (Object 21) and Frozen Counter Change Events (Object 23).
The “Default Change Event Assigned Class” column is used to define which class poll (1, 2, 3, or none) the
change event will be reported.
Note the point number of the Frozen Counter must match that of the corresponding Counter.
Frozen Counters are by default not returned in a class zero interrogation.
Frozen Counters
Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 21
Change Event Object Number: 23
Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 9 (32-Bit Counter without Flag)
Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Change Event with Flag)
Point # Default
Class
Default
Static
Variant
Default
Event
Variant
Name Resettable
0
2 9 1
Waveform Records
1
2 9 1
Fault Records
2
2 9 1
Event Records
3
2 9 1
Data Log Records
4
2 9 1
Number User Files
5
2 9 1
Start Count
6
2 9 1
Start Count Target
7
2 9 1
Active Setting Group
21
2 9 1
E1 Counter
22
2 9 1
E2 Counter
23
2 9 1
E3 Counter
24
2 9 1
E4 Counter
25
2 9 1
E5 Counter
26
2 9 1
E6 Counter
27
2 9 1
E7 Counter
28
2 9 1
E8 Counter
29
2 9 1
E9 Counter
30
2 9 1
E10 Counter
31
2 9 1
E11 Counter
32
2 9 1
E12 Counter
33
2 9 1
E13 Counter
34
2 9 1
E14 Counter
35
2 9 1
E15 Counter
36
2 9 1
E16 Counter
42
2 9 1
CB1 Total Open Count
43
2 9 1
CB1 Delta Open Count
44
2 9 1
CB2 Total Open Count
45
2 9 1
CB2 Delta Open Count
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 55 of 60
Analog Inputs
The following table lists Analog Inputs (Object 30). It is important to note that 16-bit and 32-bit variations of
Analog Inputs, Analog Output Control Blocks, and Analog Output Statuses are transmitted through DNP as
signed numbers.
The “Default Deadband,” and the “Default Change Event Assigned Class” columns are used to represent the
absolute amount by which the point must change before an analog change event will be generated, and once
generated in which class poll (1, 2, 3, or none) will the change event be reported.
The default analog input event buffer size is set 30.
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 3 (32-Bit Analog Input w/o Flag), 4 (16-Bit Analog
Input w/o Flag)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Change Event w/o Time)
Point
Index Name/Description Default
Class
Default
Static
Object 30
Variation
Default
Event
Object 32
Variation
Multiplier Deadband
0
Frequency (Hz)
3
2
4
100
1
1
V Primary (kV)
3
2
4
0.001
1000
2
Voltage Secondary
3
2
4
100
1
3
Voltage Nominal
3
2
4
100
1
4
Operate Ia
3
2
4
100
1
5
Operate Ib
3
2
4
100
1
6
Operate Ic
3
2
4
100
1
7
Restrain Ia
3
2
4
100
1
8
Restrain Ib
3
2
4
100
1
9
Restrain Ic
3
2
4
100
1
10
W1 2nd Ha rmonic Ia
3
2
4
100
1
11
W1 2nd Ha rmonic Ib
3
2
4
100
1
12
W1 2nd Ha rmonic Ic
3
2
4
100
1
13
W2 2nd Ha rmonic Ia
3
2
4
100
1
14
W2 2nd Ha rmonic Ib
3
2
4
100
1
15
W2 2nd Ha rmonic Ic
3
2
4
100
1
16
Primary Ig-1
3
2
4
100
1
17
Secondary Ig-1
3
2
4
100
1
18
Nominal Ig-1
3
2
4
100
1
19
Primary Ig-2
3
2
4
100
1
20
Secondary Ig-2
3
2
4
100
1
21
Nominal Ig-2
3
2
4
100
1
22
V/f V
3
2
4
100
1
23
V/f
3
2
4
100
1
24
V/f 24IT
3
2
4
100
1
25
Thermal Status Ph A
3
2
4
100
1
26
Thermal Status Ph B
3
2
4
100
1
27
Thermal Status Ph C
3
2
4
100
1
28
W1 Primary Ia
3
2
4
0.001
1000
29
W1 Primary Ib
3
2
4
0.001
1000
30
W1 Primary Ic
3
2
4
0.001
1000
31
W1 Secondary Ia
3
2
4
100
1
32
W1 Secondary Ib
3
2
4
100
1
33
W1 Secondary Ic
3
2
4
100
1
34
W1 Nominal Ia
3
2
4
100
1
35
W1 Nominal Ib
3
2
4
100
1
36
W1 Nominal Ic
3
2
4
100
1
37
W1 Line Ia
3
2
4
100
1
38
W1 Line Ib
3
2
4
100
1
39
W1 Line Ic
3
2
4
100
1
40
W1 Relay Ia
3
2
4
100
1
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 56 of 60
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 3 (32-Bit Analog Input w/o Flag), 4 (16-Bit Analog
Input w/o Flag)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Change Event w/o Time)
Point
Index Name/Description Default
Class
Default
Static
Object 30
Variation
Default
Event
Object 32
Variation
Multiplier Deadband
41
W1 Relay Ib
3
2
4
100
1
42
W1 Relay Ic
3
2
4
100
1
43
W2 Primary Ia
3
2
4
0.001
1000
44
W2 Primary Ib
3
2
4
0.001
1000
45
W2 Primary Ic
3
2
4
0.001
1000
46
W2 Secondary Ia
3
2
4
100
1
47
W2 Secondary Ib
3
2
4
100
1
48
W2 Secondary Ic
3
2
4
100
1
49
W2 Nominal Ia
3
2
4
100
1
50
W2 Nominal Ib
3
2
4
100
1
51
W2 Nominal Ic
3
2
4
100
1
52
W2 Line Ia
3
2
4
100
1
53
W2 Line Ib
3
2
4
100
1
54
W2 Line Ic
3
2
4
100
1
55
W2 Relay Ia
3
2
4
100
1
56
W2 Relay Ib
3
2
4
100
1
57
W2 Relay Ic
3
2
4
100
1
58
W3 Primary Ia A
3
2
4
0.001
1000
59
W3 Primary Ib A
3
2
4
0.001
1000
60
W3 Primary Ic A
3
2
4
0.001
1000
61
W3 Secondary Ia A
3
2
4
100.0
1
62
W3 Secondary Ib A
3
2
4
100.0
1
63
W3 Secondary Ic A
3
2
4
100.0
1
64
W3 Ia xIn
3
2
4
100.0
1
65
W3 Ib xIn
3
2
4
100.0
1
66
W3 Ic xIn
3
2
4
100.0
1
67
W3 Line Ia xIn
3
2
4
100.0
1
68
W3 Line Ib xIn
3
2
4
100.0
1
69
W3 Line Ic xIn
3
2
4
100.0
1
70
W3 Relay I a xIn
3
2
4
100.0
1
71
W3 Relay I b xIn
3
2
4
100.0
1
72
W3 Relay Ic xIn
3
2
4
100.0
1
73
Fault Records
3
4
4
1
1
74
Event Records
3
4
4
1
1
75
Waveform Records
3
4
4
1
1
76
W1 I Phase A Max
3
2
4
100
1
77
W1 I Pha se B Max
3
2
4
100
1
78
W1 I Phase C Max
3
2
4
100
1
79
W2 I Pha se A Max
3
2
4
100
1
80
W2 I Pha se B Max
3
2
4
100
1
81
W2 I Phase C Max
3
2
4
100
1
82
W3 Max Current Ia
3
2
4
100.0
1
83
W3 Max Current Ib
3
2
4
100.0
1
84
W3 Max Current Ic
3
2
4
100.0
1
91
Data Log Records
3
4
4
1
1
92
Number User Files
3
4
4
1
1
110
W1 Ia Fault
3
2
4
111
W1 Ib Fault
3
2
4
112
W1 Ic Fault
3
2
4
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 57 of 60
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 3 (32-Bit Analog Input w/o Flag), 4 (16-Bit Analog
Input w/o Flag)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Change Event w/o Time)
Point
Index Name/Description Default
Class
Default
Static
Object 30
Variation
Default
Event
Object 32
Variation
Multiplier Deadband
113
W2 Ia Fault
114
W2 Ib Fault
115
W2 Ic Fault
116
Ph-Ph Fault Voltage
117
Ig-1 Last
118
Ig-2 Last
119
CB1 Wear A
120
CB1 Wear B
121
CB1 Wear C
122
CB2 Wear A
123
CB2 Wear B
124
CB2 Wear C
Data
Type Static
Variant Description
DT1 3
Data is sent as a 32 bit integer in fixed point to 3 decimal places format. E.g. a
value of 1023 = 1.023
DT2 4 Data is sent as a 16 bit integer.
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 58 of 60
Section 6: IEC6 1850 Protocol Support
The relay can optionally be provided with IEC61850 comms.
For further details refer to the following publications:
Model Implementation Conformance Statement (MICS)
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS)
Protocol Implementation Extra Information for Testing (PIXIT)
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 59 of 60
Section 7: Modems
The communications interface has been designed to allow data transfer via modems. However, IEC 60870-5-103
defines the data transfer protocol as an 11 bit format of 1 start, 1 stop, 8 data and even parity, which is a mode
most commercial modems do not support. High performance modems will support this mode, but are expensive.
For this reason, a parity setting is provided to allow use of easily available and relatively inexpensive commercial
modems. This will result in a small reduction in data security and the system will not be compatible with true IEC
60870-5-103 control systems.
7.1.1 Connecting a Modem to the Relay(s)
RS232C defines devices as being either Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) e.g. computers, or data
Communications Equipment (DCE), e.g. modems, where one is designed to be connected to the other.
Where two DCE devices e.g. the modem and the fibre-optic converter are being connected together a null
terminal connector is required which switches various control lines. The fibre-optic converter is then connected to
the relay Network Tx to Relay Rx and Network Rx to Relay Tx.
7.1.2 Setting the Remote Modem
The exact settings of the modem are dependent on the type of modem. Although most modems support the basic
Hayes ‘AT’ command format, different manufacturers use different commands for the same functions. In addition,
some modems use DIP switches to set parameters, others are entirely software configured.
Before applying settings, the modem’s factory default settings should be applied, to ensure it is in a known state.
Several factors must be considered to allow remote dialling to the relays. The first is that the modem at the
remote end must be configured as auto answer. This will allow it to initiate communications with the relays. Next,
the user should set the data configuration at the local port, i.e. baud rate and parity, so that communication will be
at the same rate and format as that set on the relay and the error correction is disabled.
Auto-answer usually requires two parameters to be set. The auto-answer setting should be switched on and the
number of rings after which it will answer. The Data Terminal Ready (DTR) settings should be forced on. This tells
the modem that the device connected to it is ready to receive data.
The parameters of the modem’s RS232C port are set to match those set on the relay, set baud rate and parity to
be the same as the settings on the relay and number of data bits to be 8 and stop bits 1. Note, although the
device may be able to communicate with the modem at say 19200 bps, the modem may only be able to transmit
over the telephone lines at 14400 bps. Therefore, a baud rate setting on which the modem can transmit should be
chosen. In this ex ample, a bau d rate of 9600 sho uld be cho s en.
As the modems are required to be transparent, simply passing on the data sent from the controller to the device
and vice versa, error correction and buffering is turned off.
If possible, Data Carrier Detect (DCD) should be forced on, as this control line will be used by the Fibre-optic
converter.
Finally, these settings should be stored in the modem’s memory for power on defaults.
7.1.3 Connecting to the Remote Modem
Once the remote modem has been configured correctly, it should be possible to make connection to the relay.
Where a ‘dial-up’ modem system is installed the settings on the remote modem are fixed so the local modem
should negotiate with it on connection, choosing suitable matching settings. Where this is not possible the local
modem should be set with settings equivalent to those of the remote modem as described above.
Chapter 4) 7SR242 Duobias Data Communications
©20177 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 60 of 60
Section 8: Glossary
Baud Rate
Data transmission speed.
Bit
The smallest measure of computer data.
Bits Per Second (bps)
Measurement of data transmission speed.
Data Bits
A number of bits containing the data. Sent after the start bit.
Data Echo
When connecting relays in an optical ring architecture, the data must be passed from one relay to the next,
therefore when connecting in this method all relays must have the Data Echo ON.
Half-Duplex Asynchronous Communications
Communications in two directions, but only one at a time.
Hayes ‘AT’
Modem command set developed by Hayes Microcomputer products, Inc.
Line Idle
Determines when the device is not communicating if the idle state tran smit s light .
Modem
MOdulator / DEModulator device for connecting computer equipment to a telephone line.
Parity
Method of error checking by counting the value of the bits in a sequence, and adding a parity bit to make the
outcome, for example, even.
Parity Bit
Bit used for implementing parity checking. Sent after the data bits.
RS232C
Serial Communications Standard. Electronic Industries Association Recommended Standard Number 232,
Revisio n C.
RS485
Serial Communications Standard. Electronic Industries Association Recommended Standard Number 485.
Start Bit
Bit (logical 0) sent to signify the start of a byte during data transmission.
Stop Bit
Bit (logical 1) sent to signify the end
USB
Universal Serial Bus standard for the transfer of data.
Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide
The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document, and in any model or article produced from it
(and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices
Limited. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form, in any data retrieval
system, without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited, nor shall any model or article be
reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent.
While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct, no liability shall be accepted
for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission, whether such error or omission is the result of
negligence or any other cause. Any and all such liability is disclaimed.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited
7SR242 Duobias
Multi-Function 2-Winding Transformer Protection Relay
Inst allati on G uide
Document Release History
This document is is sue 2017/08. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is:
2017/08 Software revision 2662H85001 R8c-7d
2016/11 Ethernet redundancy added to electrical interface
2015/11 7SR2424 E12 case dimensions (Figure 3.1-3) added, wiring diagra m (Figure 5.1-1) revised.
2014/04 Revision to section 1.2
2013/01 Software revision 2662H85001 R7c-7b
2012/08 Addition of optional IEC 61850 communication protocol and Ethernet Interface.
2010/06 Additional Comms modules option of (RS485 + IRIG-B) and (RS232 + IRIG-B) and typographical
revisions
2010/02 Document reformat due to rebrand
2010/02 Third issue. Software revision 2662H80001 R4c-3
2008/07 Second issue. Software revision 2662H80001R3d-2c.
2008/05 First issue
Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 2 of 28
Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 3 of 28
Contents
Installation Guide ................................................................................................................................... 1
Document Release History .................................................................................................................... 1
Contents .................................................................................................................................................. 3
List of Figur es ......................................................................................................................................... 4
Sectio n 1: Installation ............................................................................................................................ 5
1.1 Packaging ................................................................................................................................. 5
1.2 Unpacking, Stora ge and Handling ............................................................................................ 5
1.3 Recommended Mounting Position ............................................................................................ 5
1.4 Wiring ........................................................................................................................................ 5
1.5 Earthing ..................................................................................................................................... 5
1.6 Anci llary Equipm ent .................................................................................................................. 5
1.7 Disposal .................................................................................................................................... 6
Sectio n 2: Equipment Operating Conditions ....................................................................................... 7
Sectio n 3: Dimensions and Panel Fixin gs ........................................................................................... 8
3.1 Relay Dimensions ..................................................................................................................... 8
3.2 Fixings ..................................................................................................................................... 11
3.2.1 Crimps ........................................................................................................................ 11
3.2.2 Panel Fixings .............................................................................................................. 11
Section 4: Rear Terminal Drawings .................................................................................................... 12
4.1 E8 CASE ................................................................................................................................. 12
4.2 E10 CA SE ............................................................................................................................... 14
Sectio n 5: Connection/Wiring/Diagrams ............................................................................................ 17
5.1 Wiring Diagram: 7SR242 Relay .............................................................................................. 17
Sectio n 6: Data Comms Connections ................................................................................................ 19
6.1 RS485 Connection .................................................................................................................. 19
6.2 IRIG-B Connections ................................................................................................................ 19
6.3 Optional Fibre Optic Connections ........................................................................................... 20
6.4 Optional Additional RS485 Connections ................................................................................. 21
6.5 Optional RS232 Connections.................................................................................................. 21
6.6 Additional (Optional) Ethernet Connection for IEC 61850 ...................................................... 22
6.7 Ethernet Network Redundancy IEC 61850 ............................................................................. 23
6.7.1 RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol ..................................................................... 24
6.7.2 PRP Parallel Redundancy Protocol ........................................................................ 25
6.7.3 HSR Hi gh Avai la bi lity Seam less Redundancy Protoc ol .......................................... 26
Sectio n 7: Connection Diagrams ........................................................................................................ 27
7.1 Typical AC Connections: 7SR242 .......................................................................................... 27
Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 4 of 28
List of Figures
Figure 3.1-1 Overall Dimensions and panel Drilling for Size E8 Epsilon case ........................................ 8
Figure 3.1-2 Overall Dimensions and panel Drilling for Size E10 Epsilon case ...................................... 9
Figure 3.1-3 Overall Dimensions and panel Drilling for Size E12 Epsilon case .................................... 10
Figure 5.1-1 7SR242 Wiring Diagram .................................................................................................... 17
Figure 6.1-1 RS485 Data Comms Connections ..................................................................................... 19
Figure 6.3-1 Data Comms to Multiple Devices Using Sigma 1 and F.O. Star Network ......................... 20
Figure 6.3-2 Data Comms to Multiple Devices Using Sigma 3 and F.O. Ring Network ........................ 20
Figure 6.5-1 RS232 Data Comms Pin Connections............................................................................... 21
Figure 6.6-1 Ethernet connection for IEC 61850 (star connection) ........................................................ 22
Figure 6.6-2 Ethernet connection for Fibre Optic IEC 61850 (ring connection) ..................................... 22
Figure 6.7-1 RSTP Ethernet Network Ring Configuration ..................................................................... 24
Figure 6.7-2 PRP Ethernet Net work Conf igurat io n ................................................................................ 25
Figure 6.7-3 HSR Ether ne t Network Ring Config ur ati on ....................................................................... 26
Figure 7.1-1 7SR24 Typical Connections .............................................................................................. 27
Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 5 of 28
Section 1: Installation
1.1 Packaging
Relays are supplied in packaging designed to mechanically protect them while in both transit and storage.
This packaging should be recycled where systems exist, or disposed of in a manner which does not provide a
threat to health or the environment. All laws and regulations specific to the country of disposal should be adhered
to.
1.2 Unpack ing, Storage and Handling
On receipt remove the relay from the container in which it was received and inspect it for obvious damage. It is
recommended that the relay not be removed from its case.
If damage has been sustained a claim should be immediately be made against the carrier, also inform Siemens
Protection Devices Limited and to the nearest Siemens agent, using the Defect Report Form in the Maintenance
section of this manual.
When not required for immediate use the relay should be returned to its original carton and stored in a clean, dry
place.
The relay contains static sensitive devices, which are susceptible to damage due to static discharge. The relay’s
electronic circuits are protected from damage by static discharge when the relay is housed in its case. The relay
element should not be w ithdra wn or reinserted into the relay case w hile auxiliary voltage is present.
There can be no requirement to disassemble any relay, since there are no user serviceable parts in the relay. If
any modules have been tampered with the guarantee will be invalidated. Siemens Protection Devices Limited
reserves the right to charge for any subsequent repairs.
1.3 Recommended Mounting Position
The relay uses a liquid crystal display (LCD) which is used in the programming and for operation. The LCD has a
vertical viewing angle of ± 30˚ and is backlit. However, the best viewing position is at eye level, and this is
particularly important given its control features.
The relay should be mounted on the circuit breaker (or protection panel) to allow the operator the best access to
the relay functions
1.4 Wiring
The product should be wired according to the scheme requirements, with reference to the appropriate wiring
diagram. Refer to the appropriate Diagrams and Parameters document for a cross reference of wiring diagrams
and models.
1.5 Earthing
Terminal 28 of the PSU (Power Supply Unit) should be solidly earthed by a direct connection to the panel earth.
The relay case earth stud con nect ion should be connected to terminal 28 of the PSU.
It is normal practice to additionally 'daisy chain' together the case (safety) earths of all the relays installed in a
panel to prevent earth current loops posing a risk to personnel.
1.6 Ancillary Equipment
The relay can be interrogated locally or remotely. For local interrogation a portable PC with suitable version of
MS Windows and Reydisp™ s/w using USB port situated on front of the relay.
Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 6 of 28
1.7 Disposal
The Relay should be disposed of in a manner which does not provide a threat to health or the environment. All
laws and regulations specific to the country of disposal should be adhered to.
The relays and protection systems manufactured under the Reyrolle brand currently do not come within the scope
of either the European W EEE or RoHS directives as they are equipment making up a fixed installation.
Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 7 of 28
Section 2: Equipment Operat ing Conditions
General Safety Precautions
Current Transformer Circuits
The secondary circuit of a live CT must not be open circuited. Non-observance of this precaution can result in
injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
External Resistors
Where external resistors are fitted to relays, these may present a danger of electric shock or burns, if touched.
Fibre O ptic C ommunication
Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly. Optical power meters
should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device.
Front Cover
The front cover provides additional securing of the relay element within the case. The relay cover should be in
place during nor mal oper atin g cond itions.
Disposal
The Relay should be disposed of in a manner which does not provide a threat to health or the environment. All
laws and regulations specific to the country of disposal should be adhered to.
The relays and protection systems manufactured under the Reyrolle brand currently do not come within the scope
of either the European W EEE or RoHS directives as they are equipment making up a fixed installation.
!
!
!
!
Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 8 of 28
Section 3: Dimensions and Pane l Fixings
3.1 Relay Dimensions
Relays are supplied in size E8, E10 and E12 cases.
Panel cut-out requirements and case dimensions are shown below.
PANEL CUT-OUT
168
182
201.5
159
9.75
FRONT VIEW
207.5
177
Diameter 3.6 - 4 holes (see note 1)
Case Earth connection
TOP VIEW
75mm MIN CLEARANCE BELOW EN100 MODULE
FOR ETHERNET COMMS CONNECTIONS
Optional
ethernet
comms
module
FRONT
SIDE VIEW
31 216.5
25mm MIN CLEARANCE FOR TERMINAL WIRING
70mm MIN CLEARANCE FOR F/O COMMS CABLE
151.5
11
Case Earth connection
Typical
when
fitted
Optional ethernet
comms module
254.5
See note 2
NOTES:
1) THE 3.6 HOLES ARE FOR M4 THREAD FORMING (TRILOBULAR) SCREWS. THESE ARE SUPPLIED AS STANDARD AND
ARE SUITABLE FOR USE IN FERROUS / ALUMINIUM PANELS 1.6mm THICK AND ABOVE. FOR OTHER PANELS, HOLES TO
BE M4 CLEARANCE (TYPICALLY 4.5 DIAMETER) AND RELAYS MOUNTED USING M4 MACHINE SCREWS, NUTS AND
LOCKWASHERS (SUPPLIED IN PANEL FIXING KIT).
2) ACCESS CLEARANCE REQUIRED FOR OPTIONAL ETHERNET COMMS MODULE RETAINING SCREW
Figure 3.1-1 Overall Dimensions and panel Drilling for Size E8 Epsilon case
Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 9 of 28
PANEL CUT-OUT
168
252.5
159
9.25
FRONT VIEW
260
177
74.25178.25
243.25
Diameter 3.6 - 8 holes (see note 1)
75mm MIN CLEARANCE BELOW EN100 MODULE
FOR ETHERNET COMMS CONNECTIONS
SIDE VIEW
31 216.5
25mm MIN CLEARANCE FOR TERMINAL WIRING
70mm MIN CLEARANCE FOR F/O COMMS CABLE
151.5
11
Case Earth connection
Typical
when
fitted
Optional ethernet
comms module
254.5
Case Earth connection
TOP VIEW
Optional
ethernet
comms
module
FRONT
See note 2
NOTES:
1) THE 3.6 HOLES ARE FOR M4 THREAD FORMING (TRILOBULAR) SCREWS. THESE ARE SUPPLIED AS STANDARD AND
ARE SUITABLE FOR USE IN FERROUS / ALUMINIUM PANELS 1.6mm THICK AND ABOVE. FOR OTHER PANELS, HOLES TO
BE M4 CLEARANCE (TYPICALLY 4.5 DIAMETER) AND RELAYS MOUNTED USING M4 MACHINE SCREWS, NUTS AND
LOCKWASHERS (SUPPLIED IN PANEL FIXING KIT).
2) ACCESS CLEARANCE REQUIRED FOR OPTIONAL ETHERNET COMMS MODULE RETAINING SCREW
Figure 3.1-2 Overall Dimensions and panel Drilling for Size E10 Epsilon case
Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 10 of 28
PANEL CUT-OUT
168
304.5
159
9.25
FRONT VIEW
311.5
177
100.25204.25
295.25
Diameter 3.6 - 8 holes (see note 1)
75mm MIN CLEARANCE BELOW EN100 MODULE
FOR ETHERNET COMMS CONNECTIONS
SIDE VIEW
31 216.5
25mm MIN CLEARANCE FOR TERMINAL WIRING
70mm MIN CLEARANCE FOR F/O COMMS CABLE
151.5
11
Case Earth connection
Typical
when
fitted
Optional ethernet
comms module
254.5
NOTES:
1) THE 3.6 HOLES ARE FOR M4 THREAD FORMING (TRILOBULAR) SCREWS. THESE ARE SUPPLIED AS STANDARD AND
ARE SUITABLE FOR USE IN FERROUS / ALUMINIUM PANELS 1.6mm THICK AND ABOVE. FOR OTHER PANELS, HOLES TO
BE M4 CLEARANCE (TYPICALLY 4.5 DIAMETER) AND RELAYS MOUNTED USING M4 MACHINE SCREWS, NUTS AND
LOCKWASHERS (SUPPLIED IN PANEL FIXING KIT).
2) ACCESS CLEARANCE REQUIRED FOR OPTIONAL ETHERNET COMMS MODULE RETAINING SCREW
Case Earth connection
TOP VIEW
Optional
ethernet
comms
module
FRONT
See note 2
Figure 3.1-3 Overall Dimensions and panel Drilling for Size E12 Epsilon case
Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 11 of 28
3.2 Fixings
3.2.1 Crimps
M4 Ring tongued crimps with 90˚ bend are recommended for connection to the standard M4 terminal screws and
RS485 port connections.
3.2.2 Pane l Fixings
Typical mo unti ng screw kit per Relay)
Consists of 4 off M4x10mm Screws
4 off M4 Nuts
4 off M4 Lock Washer
Typical rear terminal block fixing kit (1kit per terminal block fitted to relay) Consists of:
28 x M4, 8mm Screws
28 x M4 Lock Washer
Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 12 of 28
Section 4: Rear Terminal Drawings
4.1 E8 CASE
E8 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL PORTS
USB FRONT PORT, RS485 (SEE NOTE 2), 2 X F.O. (S.T. CONNECTORS), IRIG B
Β
Χ
Α
Β
Χ
Α
E8 STANDARD COMMS
:- USB FRONT PORT,RS485 (SEE NOTE 2)
Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 13 of 28
E8 STANDARD COMM S + ADDITIONAL PORTS
USB FRONT PORT, 2 x RS485 (SEE NOTE 2), IRIG B
E8 STANDARD COMM S + ADDITIONAL PORTS
USB FRONT PORT, RS485 (SEE NOTE 2), RS232, IRIG B
Notes
1) Recommended terminations are pre-insulated & must be crimped us ing approv ed too lin g.
2) RS485 (block ”B” terminals 14, 16, 18, 20 and optional COMMS MODULE) connections are by screened,
twisted pair RS485 compliant cable. When wiring to the relay ensure that these terminals are not obscured by
other wiring runs.
Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 14 of 28
4.2 E10 CASE
E10 STANDARD COMMS:- USB FRONT PORT,RS485 (SE E NOTE 2 )
E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL PORTS
USB FRONT PORT, RS485 (SEE NOTE 2), 2 X F.O. (S.T. CONNECTORS), IRIG B
Χ
Β
Α
Χ
Β
Α
Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 15 of 28
E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL PORTS
USB FRONT PORT, 2 x RS485 (SEE NOTE 2), IRIG B
E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL PORTS
USB FRONT PORT, RS485 (SEE NOTE 2), RS232, IRIG B
Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 16 of 28
E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL ETHERNET PORTS
(RJ45 shown, Fibre optic LC similar)
Notes
1) Recommended terminations are pre-insul ated & must be crimped using approved tooling.
2) RS485 (block ”B” terminals 14, 16, 18, 20 and optional COMMS MODULE) connections are by screened,
twisted pair cable.
Ensure that these terminals are not obscured by other wiring runs.
Cable should be RS485 compliant.
Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 17 of 28
Section 5: Connection/Wiring/Diagrams
5.1 Wiring Diagram: 7SR242 Relay
Rear View: Arrangement of terminals and modules
Shows contacts internal
to relay case assembly.
Contacts close when the
relay chassis is
withdrawn from case
NOTES
BI = Binary Input
BO = Binary Output
BI 10
+ve
-ve
2
4
BI 11
+ve
-ve
6
8
BI 12
+ve
10
BO 7
BO 8
BO 9
BI 13
+ve
12
BI 14
+ve
14
BI 15
+ve
-ve
16
18
BI 16
20
BI 17
+ve
22
BI 18
+ve
24
BI 19
+ve
-ve
26
28
+ve
BO 10
BO 11
BO 12
BO 13
BO 14
D
21
19
17
23
25
27
3
1
7
5
11
9
15
13
BO 1
GND.
BI 1
+ve
-ve
+ve
-ve
22
24
28
2
4
BI 2
+ve
-ve
6
8
BI 3
+ve
-ve
10
12
BO 2
BO 3
BO 4
BO 5
7SR242
C
A
RS485
Screen
B
Term.
14
16
18
20
13
14
15
16
1A
5A
1
2
3
4
1A
5A
5
6
7
8
1A
5A
9
10
11
12
1A
5A
A
Ig-1
V
27
28
17
18
19
20
5A
BI 4
+ve
18
BI 5
+ve
22
BI 6
+ve
-ve
26
28
1A
5A
1
2
3
4
1A
5A
5
6
7
8
1A
5A
9
10
11
12
B
-ve
20
-ve
24
BI 7
+ve
17
BI 8
+ve
21
BI 9
+ve
-ve
25
27
-ve
19
-ve
23
W1-Ia
W1-Ib
W1-Ic
W2-Ic
W2-Ib
W2-Ia
Ig-2
BO 6
9
5
7
27
3
1
15
11
13
19
17
23
21
25
26
BI 20
+ve
-ve
2
4
BI 21
+ve
-ve
6
8
BI 22
+ve
10
BI 23
+ve
12
BI 24
+ve
14
BI 25
+ve
-ve
16
18
BI 26
20
BI 27
+ve
22
BI 28
+ve
24
BI 29
+ve
-ve
26
28
+ve
E
BI 30
+ve
-ve
1
3
BI 31
+ve
-ve
5
7
BI 32
+ve 9
BI 33
+ve 11
BI 34
+ve 13
BI 35
+ve
-ve
15
17
BI 36
19
BI 37
+ve 21
BI 38
+ve 23
BI 39
+ve
-ve
25
27
+ve
A
CT/VT
B
CT
D
Optional
I/O
1 2
27 28
1 21 2
27 28
27 28
Data
Comms
(Optional)
C
PSU
1 2
27 28
E
Optional
I/O
1 2
27 28
Figure 5.1-1 7SR242 Wiring Diagram
Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 18 of 28
Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 19 of 28
Section 6: Data Comms Connections
6.1 RS485 Connection
The RS485 communication port terminals are located on the rear of the relay and can be connected using a
suitable RS485 120Ω screened twisted pair cable.
The RS485 electrical connection can be used in a single or multi-drop configuration. When used with Reydisp the
RS485 master must support and use the Auto Device Enable (ADE) feature.
The last device in the connection must be terminated correctly in accordance with the master driving the
connection. A terminating resistor is fitted in each relay, when required this is connected in circuit using an
external wire loop between termina ls 18 and 20 of the power supply module.
Up to 64 relays can be connected to the RS485 bus.
Each relay has an internal terminating resistor this can be connected in circuit where necessary.
To Control
System
14
16
18
20
RS485 Screened
twisted pair
Rear terminals
14
16
18
14
16
18
RS485 Screened
twisted pair
Rear terminals
Ext Wire loop
(terminating
resistance) added
where permanent
drive from master
station available
A
RS485
Screen
B
Term.
14
16
18
20
A
RS485
Screen
B
Term.
14
16
18
20
A
RS485
Screen
B
Term.
14
16
18
20
RS 485 Twisted pair Cable
To Control
System
Bus Termination
Polarity
5V
GND
B
A
Figure 6.1-1 RS485 Data Comms Connections
6.2 IRIG-B Connections
A BNC plug is provided to connect a co-axial cable carrying IRIG-B time synchronisation signals. The length of
the stub s hou ld b e minimised by connecting the tee-connector directly to the rear of the relay. A suitable co-axial
cable would be type RG 58 50ohms.
Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 20 of 28
6.3 Optional Fibre Optic Connections
Where fitted rear Data Comms ports 3 and 4 comprise Fibre–Optic ST™ (BFOC/2.5) bayonet connectors-4 per
product. 62.5 / 125μm glass fibre is recommended for all lead lengths.
When installing fibre, ensure that the fibres’ bend radii comply with the recommended minimum for the fibre used-
typically 50mm is acceptable.
The fibre optic data comms link will be interrupted if the relay element is withdrawn from the case.
Computer or
Control System
Sigma 1
Tx
Rx Tx
Rx
62.5/125µm fibre optic
with ST connectors
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Master
To
Control
System
USB or 9 pin male
D connector
RS232 straight
Through cable
25 pin male
D connector
Figure 6.3-1 Data Comms to Multiple Devices Using Sigma 1 and F.O. Star Network
RS232 to Fibre
Optic Converter
Tx
Rx Tx
Rx
62.5/125µm fibre optic with ST
connectors
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Computer or
Control System
USB or 9 pin male
D connector
RS232 straight
Through cable
25 pin male
D connector
Figure 6.3-2 Data Comms to Multiple Devices Using Sigma 3 and F.O. Ring Network
Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 21 of 28
6.4 Optional Addit ional RS485 Connections
The additional (optional) RS485 communication port is located at the rear of the relay and can be connected
using a suitable RS485 120 ohm screened twisted pair cable.
The RS485 electrical connection can be used in a single or multi-drop configuration. When used with Reydisp the
RS485 master must support and use the Auto Device Enable (ADE) feature.
The last device in the connection must be terminated correctly in accordance with the master device driving the
connection. The relays are fitted with an internal terminating resistor which can be connected between the A and
B by fitting an external wire loop between terminals 18 and 20 on the power supply module.
6.5 Optional RS232 Connections
The additional (optional) RS232 (9 pin plug) (DTE) communication port is located at the rear of the relay and can
be connected using a suitable RS232 cable.
Where there is a requirement for multi-drop RS232 connection, a suitable device to facilitate this should be
obtained.
Pin
Relay Function
1
Not Connected
2
Receive Data (RXD)
3
Transmit Data (TXD)
4
Output Supply +5V 50mA
5
Signal Ground (GND)
6
Output Supply +5V 50mA
7
Linked to 8 (volts free)
8
Linked to 7 (volts free)
9
Output Supply +5V 50mA
Figure 6.5-1 RS232 Data Comms Pin Connections
Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 22 of 28
6.6 Addit ional (Optional) Ether net Connection for IEC 6185 0
Rear Ethernet Comms port Ch 1 and Ch 2 comprises FibreOptic Duplex LC connectors or electrical RJ45
connectors.
When installing fibre, ensure that the fibres’ bend radii comply with the recommended minimum for the fibre used-
typically 50mm is acceptable, 62.5 / 125μm glass fibre is recommended for all distances.
Switch
Ch n
Ch 2
Ch 1
62.5/125µm fibre optic
with Duplex LC
connectors or RJ45
electrical connectors
Ch 2
Ch 1
Ch 1
Ch 3
Ch 2
Ch 1
Input
To
Control
System
Ch 2
Figure 6.6-1 Ethernet conne cti on for IEC 61850 ( star con nec t ion)
Switch
Ch n
Ch 2
Ch 1
Ch 2
Ch 1
Ch 1
Ch 3
Ch 2
Ch 1
Input
To
Control
System
Ch 2
62.5/125µm fibre optic
with Duplex LC
connectors or RJ45
electrical connectors
Figure 6.6-2 Ethernet connection for Fibre Optic IEC 61850 (ring connection)
Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 23 of 28
6.7 Ethernet Network Redundancy IEC 61850
The EN100+ module is used on current Reyrolle devices (from 7SR242 hardware /DD) to provide
Ethernet/IEC61850 functionality and supports RSTP, PRP and HSR redundancy protocols.
Earlier 7SR242 (/CC) devices were manufactured with the EN100 (not EN100+) module and the electrical version
cannot support redundancy. The optical version can support PRP and HSR redundancy if firmware is updated to
version 4.2 or later and FPGA is updated to version 515 or later. Earlier 7SR242 devices do not support the
EN100+ module and cannot be updated by simply exchanging the EN100 module.
All current 7SR242 IEC618 50 v ariants are deliv er ed with th e EN100+ (Plus) mod ule and firmware 4.24 or later.
The EN100 module firmware and FPGA can be updated by connecting to the relay via the rear Ethernet port. For
more information on connecting to the relay via the Ethernet port, please see the Reydisp Manager Userguide or
the Guidance Note available from the product website. Depending on the EN100 module type and Firmware
version, the fol low ing prot oc ol optio ns are avai lab le,
Interface Type
EN100
Firmware
Line Mode
Switch Mode
RSTP
OSM
PRP
HSR
Electrical RJ45 EN100+
4.21and later
Optical EN100+
4.21and later
Electrical RJ45 EN100+
4.08 or earlier
Optical EN100+
4.08 or earlier
Electrical RJ45 EN100
4.21and later
Optical EN100
4.21and later
Electrical RJ45 EN100
4.08 or earlier
Optical EN100
4.08 or earlier
Table 1: EN100 Redundancy availability
Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 24 of 28
6.7.1 RSTPRapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RSTP is a redundancy protocol with a minimal response time that has been standardized in IEEE-802.1D (2004).
The reconfiguration time depend on the topology and start at 50ms.
RSTP need to be enabled on the device within Reydisp Manager (See Reydisp Manager userguide). Network
rings with up to 30 devices is possible.
Figure 6.7-1 RSTP Ethernet Network Ring Configuration
Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 25 of 28
6.7.2 PRP Parallel Redundancy Protocol
The HSR redundancy protocol according to the IEC 62439-3 standard is based on double transmission of
message frames over ring-topology networks in both directions. In the case of an error, the message frame will be
transmitted without any delay. No reconfiguration time is necessary for the network, as is the case for RSTP.
PRP need to be enabled on the device within Reydisp Manager (See Reydisp Manager userguide).
Figure 6.7-2 PRP Ethernet Network Configuration
Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 26 of 28
6.7.3 HSR High Availability Seamless Redundancy Protocol
The HSR redundancy protocol according to the IEC 62439-3 standard is based on double transmission of
message frames over ring-topology networks in both directions. In the case of an error, the message frame will be
transmitted without any delay. No reconfiguration time is necessary for the network.
HSR needs to be enabled on the device within Reydisp Manager (See Reydisp Manager user guide). Network
rings with up to 50 devices is possible.
Figure 6.7-3 HSR Ethernet Network Ring Configuration
Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 27 of 28
Section 7: Connection Diagrams
7.1 Typical AC Connections: 7SR242
GND.
BI 1
+ve
-ve
+ve
-ve
22
24
28
2
4
BI 2
+ve
-ve
6
8
BI 3
+ve
-ve
10
12
A
RS485
Screen
B
Term.
14
16
18
20
13
14
15
16
1A
5A
1
2
3
41A
5A
5
6
7
81A
5A
9
10
11
12 1A
5A
I
G1
V
1
(V
X
)
27
28
17
18
19
20
5A
BI 4
BI 5
BI 6
1A
5A
1
2
3
4
1A
5A
5
6
7
8
1A
5A
9
10
11
12
B
BI 7
BI 8
BI 9
W1-I
L1
(I
A
)
W1-I
L2
(I
B
)
W1-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L2
(I
B
)
W2-I
L1
(I
A
)
I
G2
A
B
C
POWER TRANSFORMER
A
B
C
NLR
R
STAB
NLR
R
STAB
R
STAB
64H Stabilising resistor
NLR
64H Voltage limiting resistor
A
C
BO 1
BO 2
BO 3
BO 4
BO 5
BO 6
9
5
7
27
3
1
15
11
13
19
17
23
21
25
26
+ve
18
+ve
22
+ve
-ve
26
28
-ve
20
-ve
24
+ve
17
+ve
21
+ve
-ve
25
27
-ve
19
-ve
23
Figure 7.1-1 7SR24 T ypical Connections
Chapter 5) 7SR242 Duobias Installation Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 28 of 28
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document, and in any model or article produced from it
(and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices
Limited. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form, in any data retrieval
system, without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited, nor shall any model or article be
reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent.
While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct, no liability shall be accepted
for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission, whether such error or omission is the result of
negligence or any other cause. Any and all such liability is disclaimed.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited
7SR242 Duobias
Multi-Function 2-Winding Transformer Protection Relay
Commissioning and Maintenance
Document Release History
This document is is sue 2017/08. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is:
2017/08
Software release 2662H85001R8C-7b
2013/01 Software revision 2662H85001 R7c-7b
2012/08 Addition of optional IEC 61850 communication protocol and Ethernet Int erfac e.
2010/06 Defect Report Form revised
2010/02 Document reformat due to rebrand
2010/02 Third issue. Software revision 2662H80001 R4c-3
2008/07 Second issue. Software revision 2662H80001R3d-2c.
2008/05 First issue
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 2 of 62
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 3 of 62
Contents
Commissioning and Maintenance ........................................................................................................ 1
Document Release History .................................................................................................................... 1
Contents .................................................................................................................................................. 3
Sectio n 1: Commo n F un ctions ............................................................................................................. 7
1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 7
1.2 Before Testing ........................................................................................................................... 7
1.2.1 Safety ........................................................................................................................... 7
1.2.2 Sequence of Tests ....................................................................................................... 7
1.2.3 Test Equipment ............................................................................................................ 8
1.2.4 Precautions .................................................................................................................. 8
1.2.5 Applying Settings ......................................................................................................... 9
1.3 Tests ....................................................................................................................................... 10
1.3.1 Inspection ................................................................................................................... 10
1.3.2 Secondary Injection Tests .......................................................................................... 10
1.3.3 Primary Injection Tests ............................................................................................... 10
1.3.4 Putting into Service .................................................................................................... 10
1.4 AC Energising Quantities ........................................................................................................ 11
1.5 Binar y Inputs ........................................................................................................................... 12
1.6 Binary Outputs ........................................................................................................................ 13
1.7 Relay Case Short ing Con ta c ts ................................................................................................ 13
Sectio n 2: Protection Functions ......................................................................................................... 15
2.1 Biased Differential (87BD, 87HS) ........................................................................................... 17
2.1.1 Secondary Injection Testing ....................................................................................... 17
2.1.2 Primary Injection Testing ............................................................................................ 20
2.1.3 Phase Overcurrent (50, 51)........................................................................................ 21
2.1.4 Definite Time Overcurrent (50) ............................................................................... 22
2.1.5 Inverse Time Overcurrent (51) ................................................................................. 22
2.2 Derived Earth fault (50N,51N)................................................................................................. 24
2.2.1 Definite Time Overcurrent (50N) ............................................................................. 25
2.2.2 Inverse Time Overcurrent (51N) .............................................................................. 25
2.2.3 ANSI Reset................................................................................................................. 26
2.3 Measured Earth fault (50G, 51G)............................................................................................ 27
2.3.1 Definite Time Overcurrent (50G) ............................................................................. 28
2.3.2 Inverse Time Overcurrent (51G) .............................................................................. 28
2.3.3 ANSI Reset................................................................................................................. 29
2.4 Restricted Earth fault (64H) .................................................................................................. 30
2.5 Open Circuit (46BC) .............................................................................................................. 32
2.6 Negat ive Phas e Sequ ence O verc urr ent (46NPS) .................................................................. 34
2.6.1 Definite Time NPS Overcurrent (46DT) .................................................................. 35
2.6.2 Inverse Time NPS Overcurrent (46IT) ..................................................................... 35
2.7 Undercurrent (37, 37G) ......................................................................................................... 37
2.7.1 37-n Elem ents ............................................................................................................ 37
2.7.2 37G-n Elements ......................................................................................................... 38
2.8 Thermal Overload (49) ............................................................................................................ 39
2.9 Under/Over Voltage (27/59) ................................................................................................... 41
2.9.2 Undervoltage Guard (27/59UVG) .............................................................................. 43
2.10 Neutral Over Voltage (59N) .................................................................................................. 44
2.10.1 Definite Time (59NDT) ............................................................................................... 45
2.10.2 Inverse Time (59NIT) ................................................................................................. 45
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 4 of 62
2.11 Under/Over Frequency (81) .................................................................................................... 46
2.12 Overfluxing (24) ...................................................................................................................... 48
2.12.1 definite time (24DT) .................................................................................................... 48
2.12.2 inverse time (24IT) ..................................................................................................... 49
Sectio n 3: Supervision Functions ...................................................................................................... 51
3.1 CB Fail (50BF) ........................................................................................................................ 51
3.2 Trip/Close Circuit Supervision (74TCS, 74CCS) .................................................................. 53
3.3 Magnetising Inrush Detector (81HBL2) ................................................................................ 54
3.4 Overfluxing Detector (81HBL5) ............................................................................................. 56
Sectio n 4: Control & Logic Functions ................................................................................................ 57
4.1 Quick Logic ............................................................................................................................. 57
Sectio n 5: Testing and Maintenance .................................................................................................. 59
5.1 Periodic Tests ......................................................................................................................... 59
5.2 Maintenance............................................................................................................................ 59
5.3 Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................... 60
Section 6: Relay Softw are Upgrade Instructions .............................................................................. 61
6.1 General ................................................................................................................................... 61
6.2 Replacing firmware on a product installed on site .................................................................. 61
6.2.1 Identify Which Software Is Currently Loaded ............................................................. 61
6.2.2 Overall Software Information...................................................................................... 61
6.2.3 Product Configuration Information ............................................................................. 61
6.2.4 Things To Do Before Loading New Firmware/Software ............................................ 62
6.2.5 Loading Firmware using front USB port ..................................................................... 62
6.2.6 Solving Software Upload Problems ........................................................................... 62
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 5 of 62
List of Figures
Figure 2-1 Biased Differential .............................................................................................................. 17
Figure 2-2 Secondary Injection using a Variac ................................................................................... 18
Figure 2-3 Phase Overcurrent ............................................................................................................. 21
Figure 2-4 Measured Earth Fault .......................................................................................................... 24
Figure 2-5 Measured Earth Fault .......................................................................................................... 27
Figure 2-6 Restricted Earth Fault .......................................................................................................... 30
Figure 2-7 Open Circuit .......................................................................................................................... 32
Figure 2-8 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent ............................................................................... 34
Figure 2-9 Undercurrent ......................................................................................................................... 37
Figure 2-10 Thermal Overload ............................................................................................................... 39
Figure 2-11 Phase Under/Over Voltage ................................................................................................. 41
Figure 2-12 Neutral Overvoltage ............................................................................................................ 44
Figure 2-13 Under /O ver Frequency ....................................................................................................... 46
Figure 2-14 Under/Over Frequency ....................................................................................................... 48
Figure 3-1 CB Fail .................................................................................................................................. 51
Figure 3-2 Trip Circuit Supervision ......................................................................................................... 53
Figure 3-3 Magnetising Inrush Detector ................................................................................................. 54
Figure 3-4 Magnetising Inrush Detector ................................................................................................. 56
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 6 of 62
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 7 of 62
Section 1: Commo n Functi ons
1.1 Overview
Commission ing tes ts are car ri ed out to prove:
a) Equipment has not been damaged in transit.
b) Equipment has been correctly connected and installed.
c) Prove characteristics of the protection and settings which are based on calculations.
d) Confirm that settings have been correctly applied.
e) To obtain a set of test results for future reference.
1.2 Before Testing
1.2.1 Safety
The commissioning and maintenance of this equipment should only be carried out by skilled personnel trained in
protective relay maintenance and capable of observing all the safety precautions and regulations appropriate to
this type of equipment and als o the assoc iate d pr imary plant .
Ensure that all test equipment and leads have been correctly maintained and are in good condition. It is
recommended that all power supplies to test equipment be connected via a Residual Current Device (RCD),
which should be located as close to the supply source as possible.
The choice of test instrument and test leads must be appropriate to the application. Fused instrument leads
should be used when measurements of power sources are involved, since the selection of an inappropriate range
on a multi-range instrument could lead to a dangerous flashover. Fused test leads should not be used where the
measurement of a current transformer (C.T.) secondary current is involved, the failure or blowing of an instrument
fuse or the operation of an instrument cut-out could cause the secondary winding of the C.T. to become an open
circuit.
Open circuit secondary windings on energised current transformers are a hazard that can produce high voltages
dangerou s to personn el and damaging to equipment, test procedures must be devised so as to eliminate this risk.
1.2.2 Seque nce of Tests
If other equipment is to be tested at the same time, then such testing must be co-ordinated to avoid danger to
personnel and/or equipment.
When all cabling and wiring is completed, a comprehensive check of all terminations for tightness and compliance
with the approved diagrams must be carried out. This can then be followed by the insulation resistance tests
which, if satisfactory allows the wiring to be energised by either the appropriate station supply or test supply.
When primary injection tests are completed satisfactorily, all remaining systems can be functionally tested before
the primary circuit is energ is ed . Some circu its may requir e further tests before being put on load.
Protection relay testing will require access to the protection system wiring diagrams, relay configuration
information and protection settings. The following sequence of tests is loosely based on the arrangement of the
relay menu structure. A test log based on the actual tests completed should be recorded for each relay tested. A
typical example of this Site Test Sheet is included.
The Description of Operationsection of this manual provides detailed information regarding the operation of
each function of the relay.
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 8 of 62
1.2.3 Test Equipment
Required test equipment is:
Secondary injection equipment with integral time interval meter
Primary i njec tion equipment
A d.c. supply with nominal voltage within the working range of the relay's d.c. auxiliary supply rating
A d.c. supply with nominal voltage within the working range of the relays d .c. binary input rating
Other equipment as appropriate to the protection being commissioned this will be specifi ed in the prod uct
specific documentation.
The secondary injection equipment should be appropriate to the protection functions to be tested. Additional
equipment for general tests and for testing the communications channel is:
Portable PC with appropriate interface equipment.
Printer to operate from the above PC (Optional).
Use of PC to facilitate testing
The functions of ReyDisp Evolution (see Section 2: Settings and Instruments) can be used during the
commissioning tests to assist with test procedures or to provide documentation recording the test and test
parameters. One method is to clear both the waveform and event records before each test is started, then, after
the test upload from the relay the settings, events and waveform files generated as a result of application of the
test. These can then be saved off to retain a comprehensive record of that test.
Relay settings files can be prepared on the PC (offline) or on t he relay before testing commences. These settings
should be saved for reference and compared with the settings at the end of t esting t o check that errors have not
been introduced during testing and that any temporary changes to settings to suit the test process are returned to
the required service state.
A copy of the Relay Settings as a Rich Text Format (.rtf) file suitable for printing or for record purposes can be
produced from ReyDisp as follows. From the File menu select Save As, change the file type to Export
Default/Actual Setting (.RTF) and input a suitable filename.
When testing is completed the event and waveform records should be cleared and the settings file checked to
ensure that the required in-service settings are being applied.
1.2.4 Precautions
Before electrical testing commences the equipment should be isolated from the current and voltage transformers.
The current transformers should be short-circuited in line with the local site procedure. The tripping and alarm
circuits should also be isolated where practical. The provision and use of secondary injection test sockets on the
panel simplifies the isolation and test procedure.
Ensure that the correct auxiliary supply voltage and polarity is applied. See the relevant scheme diagrams for the
relay connections.
Check that the nominal secondary current rating of the current and voltage transformers has been correc tl y set in
the System Config menu of the relay.
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 9 of 62
1.2.5 Applying Settings
The relay settings for the particular application should be applied before any secondary testing occurs. If they are
not available then the relay has default settings that can be used for pre-commissioning tests. See the Relay
Settings section of this manual for the default settings.
Note that the tripping and alarm contacts for any function must be programmed correctly before any scheme tests
are carried out.
The relay features multiple settings groups, only one of which is active at a time. In applications where more than
one settings group is to be used it may be necessary to test the relay in more than one configurat ion.
Note. One group may be used as a ‘Test’ group to hold test-only settings that can be used for regular
maintenance testing, eliminating the need for the Test Engineer to interfere with the actual in-service settings in
the normally active group. This Test group may also be used for functional testing where it is necessary to disable
or change settings to facilitate testing.
When using settings groups it is important to remember that the relay need not necessarily be operating
according to the settings that are currently being displayed. There is an ‘active settings group’ on which the relay
operates and an ‘edit/view settings group’ which is visible on the display and which can be altered. This allows the
settings in one group to be altered from the relay fascia while the protection continues to operate on a different
unaffected group. The ‘Active Settings Group’ and the ‘Edit Settings Group’ are selected in the ‘System
Configuration Menu’.
The currently Active Group and the group currently Viewed are shown at the top of the display in the Settings
display screen. If the View Group is not shown at the top of the display, this indicates that the setting is common
to all groups. CT/VT ratio, I/O mapping and other settings which are directly related to hardware are common to
all groups.
If the relay is allowed to trip during testing then the instruments display will be interrupted and replaced by the
‘Trip Alert’ screen which displays fault data information. If this normal operation interferes with testing then this
function can be temporarily disabled for the duration of testing by use of the Trip Alert Enabled/Disabled setting in
the System Config Menu.
After applying a settings change to the relay, which may involve a change to the indication and output contacts,
the TEST/RESET key should be pressed to ensure any existing indication and output is correctly cleared.
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 10 of 62
1.3 Tests
1.3.1 Inspection
Ensure that all connections are tight and correct to the relay wiring diagram and the scheme diagram. Record any
deviations. Check that the relay is correctly programmed and that it is fully inserted into the case. Refer to
Section 2: Settings and Instruments’ for information on programming the relay.
1.3.2 Secondary Injection Tests
Select the required relay configuration and settings for the application.
Isolate the auxiliary D.C. supplies for alarm and tripping from the relay and remove the trip and intertrip links.
Carry out injection tests for each relay function, as described in th is doc um ent
For all high current tests it must be ensured that the test equipment has the required rating and stability and that
the relay is not stressed beyond its thermal limit.
1.3.3 Primary Injection Tests
Primary injection tests are essential to check the ratio and polarity of the current transformers as well as the
secondary wiring. Primary injection testing of the 87BD Biased Differential protection is recommended to avoid
relay operation during first energisation of the transformer if incorrect values are applied to the ICT Connection
protection setting.
Note. If the current transformers associated with the protection are located in power transformer bushings it may
not be possible to apply test connections between the current transformer and the power transformer windings.
Primary injection is needed however, to verify the polarity of the CTs. In these circumstances primary current
must be injected through the associated power transformer winding. It may be necessary to short circuit another
winding in order to allow current to flow. During these primary injection tests the injected current is likely to be
small due to the impedance of the transformer.
Phase current transformer polarities and connections can be checked by examination of the relay Current Meters
and Differential Meters in the Instruments Menu when the protected plant is carrying load but Earth Fault CT
polarity can only be checked during primary injection.
1.3.4 Putting into Se r vice
After tests have been performed satisfactorily the relay should be put back into service as follows:-
Remove all test connections.
Replace all secondary circuit fuses and links, or close m.c.b.
Ensure the Protection Healthy LED is on, steady, and that all LED indications are correct. If necessary press
CANCEL until the Relay Identifier screen is displayed, then press TEST/RESET to reset the indication LEDs.
The relay meters should be checked in Instruments Mode with the relay on load
The relay settings should be downloaded to a computer and a printout of the settings produced. The installed
settings should then be compared against the required settings supplied before testing began. Automated setting
comparison can be carried out by ReyDisp using the Compare Settings Groups function in the Edit menu. Any
modified settings will be clearly highlighted.
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 11 of 62
1.4 AC Energi sing Quantities
Voltage and current measurement for each input channel is displayed in the Instrumentation Mode sub-menus,
each input should be checked for correct connection and measurement accuracy by single phase secondary
injection at nominal levels. Ensure that the correct instrument displays the applied signal within limits of the
Performance Specification.
Applied Current Applied
Voltage
W1-IA
W1-IB
W1-IC
IG1
W2-IA
W2-IB
W2-IC
IG2
V1(VX)
Secondary
Primary
Apply 3P balanced Current at nominal levels and ensure that the measured Zero Phase Sequence and Negative
Phase Sequence quantities are approximately zero.
ZPS
NPS
Current
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 12 of 62
1.5 Binary Inputs
The operation of the binary input(s) can be monitored on the ‘Binary Input Meters’ display shown in ‘Instruments
Mode’. Apply the required supply voltage onto each binary input in turn and check for correct operation.
Depending on the application, each binary input may be programmed to perform a specific function; each binary
should be checked to prove that its mapping and functionality is as set as part of the Scheme Operation tests.
W here t he pic k-up timers associated with a binary input are set these delays should be checked either as part of
the scheme logic or individually. To check a binary pick-up time delay, temporarily map the binary to an output
relay that has a normally open contact. This can be achieved in the Output Matrix sub-menu by utilising the BI n
Operated settings. Use an external timer to measure the interval between binary energisation and closure of the
output contacts. Similarly, to measure the drop-off delay, map to an output relay that has a normally closed
contact, ti me the interv al between binary de-energisation and closure of the output contacts.
Note. The time measured will include an additional delay, typically less than 20ms, due to the response time of
the binary input hardware, software processing time and the operate time of the output relay.
BI Tested DO
Delay
Measure
d
PU
Delay
Measured Notes (method of initiation)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 13 of 62
1.6 Binary Outputs
A minimum of six output relays are provided. Two of these have change over contacts, BO2 & BO3, one has a
normally clos ed cont act, BO1 and the remainder have normally open contacts.
Care should be observed with regard to connected devices when forcing contacts to operate for test purposes.
Short duration energisation can cause contact failure due to exceeding the break capacity when connected to
inductive load such as electrically reset trip relays.
Close each output relay in turn from the ReyDisp Evolution PC programme, Relay Control - Close output relay.
This function will energise the output for its minimum operate time. This time is specified in the Output Config -
Binary Output Config menu for each output relay and may be too short to measure with a continuity tester.
An alternative method of energising an output permanently so that wiring can be checked is to temporarily map
the relay being tested to the ‘Protection Healthy’ signal in the Output Matrix, as this signal is permanently
energised the mapped relay will be held energised, normally open con tact s will be closed and vice versa.
BO
Checked
Notes (method of test)
1NC
2NO
2NC
3NO
3NC
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1.7 Relay Cas e Short ing Conta cts
CT inputs and terminals C25-C26 (Relay W ithdrawn Alarm) are fitted with case mounted shorting contacts which
provide a closed contact when the relay is withdrawn from the case. The operation of these contacts should be
checked.
CT Shorting contacts checked
Relay Withdrawn Alarm Checked
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 14 of 62
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 15 of 62
Section 2: Prot ection Functions
This section details the procedures for testing each protection function of the 7SR24 relay. These tests are carried
out to verify the accuracy of the protection pick-ups and time delays at setting and to confirm correct operation of
any associated input and output functiona lity .
Guidance for calculating test input quantities is given in the relevant test description where required. In many
cases it may be necessary to disable some functions during the testing of other functions, this prevents any
ambiguity caused by the operation of multiple functions from one set of input quantities. The ‘Function Config’
Menu provides a convenient high level point at which all elements of a particular function can be
Enabled/Disabled to suit testing. The ‘Config’ tab in ReyDisp Evolution’ can be used to ‘Enable/Disable’ individual
elements. Note that this screen disables functions by applying setting changes to the relay and that any changes
must be sent to the relay to take effect and settings must be returned to their correct value after testing.
The table below indicates functions where function conflicts may occur during testing, consideration should be
given to disabling functions to avoid interference.
Function
Under
Test
Biased Differential
Differential Highset
Phase Overcurrent
Derived E/F
Measured E/F
Restricted E/F
Open Circuit
NPS Overcurrent
Undercurrent
Thermal
U/O voltage
Neutral Overvoltage
U/O Frequency
Overfluxing
CB Fail
Trip cct Supervision
Inrush Detector
Overfluxing Detector
Biased Diff. O O O O O O O O O O
Diff. Highset O O O O O O O O
Phase OC O O O O O O O O O
Derived E/F O O O O O O O O O O
Measured E/F O O O O O O O O O O
Restricted E/F O O O O O O O O O O
Open Circuit O O O O
O O O
NPS OC O O O O O
O O O
Undercurrent O O O O O
O
O O
Thermal O O O O O
O
O O
U/O voltage
O O O O
Neutral OV
O O O
U/O Frequency
O O
Overfluxing
O O O
CB Fail O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O
74TCS/74CCS
Inrush Detector
O/fluxing Detector
The General Pickup LED can be used to assess operation of functions during testing if other functions are
disabled or if the setting allocating General Pickup is temporarily modified.
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 16 of 62
Particular care should be taken when testing overcurrent functions that the thermal rating of the current inputs is
not exceeded.
It should be considered that where several overlapping elements are used simultaneously, the overall protection
operate time may be dependent on the operation of different individual elements at the various levels of applied
current or voltage. The resulting composite characteristic may be tested by enabling all of the relevant applicable
elements or the element operations can be separated or disabled and tested individually.
All relay settings should be checked before testing begins. It is recommended that the relay settings are extracted
from the relay using ReyDisp Evolution software and a copy of these settings is stored for reference during and
after testing. It may be necessary to disable some protection functions during the testing of other functions to
allow unambiguous results to be obtained.
Care must be taken to reset or re-enable any settings that have been temporarily altered during the testing before
the relay can be put into service. At the end of testing the relay settings should be compared to the file extracted
at the start to ensure that errors have not been introduced.
An example ‘Test Sheet’ summary document is inc lud ed at the end of this Guide.
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 17 of 62
2.1 Biased Differential (87BD, 87H S )
50G
(x2)
51G
(x4) 64H
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
74
TCS
(x6)
59N
(x2)
27
59
(x4)
81
(x6)
7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0
81
HBL2
81
HBL2
87HS 87BD
ICT
ICT
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
50N
(x2)
51N
(x2)
46
BC
(x2)
37 49
37 49
50N
50
BF-2
50
BF-2
46
NPS
51N
51
51
50
50
50G 51G 64H
81
HBL
2
81
HBL
2
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
Each function element
can be assigned to W1
or W2 CT inputs.
NOTE: The use of some
functions are mutually
exclusive
24
(x3)
37G
(x2)
50
BF-1
I4
37G
50
BF-2
I4
74
CCS
(x6)
46
BC
46
NPS
(x4)
81
HBL5
81
HBL2
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37 49
50
BF-2 51
50 81
HBL2
81
HBL5
I
G1
W1-I
L1
(I
A
)
V
1
(V
X
)
I
G2
W1-I
L2
(I
B
)
W1-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L2
(I
B
)
W2-I
L1
(I
A
)
Figure 2-1 Biased Differential
Voltage Inputs: None
Current Inputs: W1-IL1 (IA),W1-IL2 (IB),W1-IL3 (IC), and W2-IL1 (IA),W2-IL2 (IB),W2-IL3 (IC),
Disable: 46, 49, 50, 51, 50N, 51N, 50BF,
Map Pickup LED: 87BD, 87HS - Self Reset
The differential elements are subjected to CT multipliers, Vector Group Compensation and Zero Sequence filters
when applied to power transformers. The complexity of these features can cause confusion during testing and
lead to incorrect relay settings being applied. It is recommended that the accuracy of the differential elements are
tested by secondary injection with simplif ied differential sett i ngs applied to avoid ambiguity before reinstating the
required site settings which can be tested more thoroughly by primary injection followed by final checking with the
protected transformer on load.
2.1.1 Sec ondary Injection Testing
The settings used for Secondary Injection test purposes should be:
W1 ICT Mu ltiplier 1x W1 ICT
Connection Yy0,0deg W2 ICT
Multiplier 1x W2 ICT
Connection Yy0,0deg
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 18 of 62
Secondary testing of the bias chara cter ist ic will be gr eatly simplified by the use of automated numeric protection
test equipment such as the Omicron CMC256. This equipment can be programmed using setting which match
those of the relay to test for accuracy over the whole operating range and give a clear easy to use graphical
display of relay performance against the specified characteristic.
The relay characteristic can however be tested manually by recording a sequence of operating points for
increasing lev el s of Restrain current. This can be achieved phase by phase using a single current source such as
a Variac with two independently variable curr ent limiting res istors as shown in figure 2-2 or from two independent
single or three phase curr ent s ource s. When two separate sources are used the phase of the two sinusoidal
supplies must be the same and the Restrain and Operate currents must be calculated from the sum and
difference of the two currents.
During manual testing the Operate and Restrain currents can be monitored on the relay in the Differential Meters
in the In stru ment s menu .
For manual testing, the bias slope is usually checked for Restrain current up to 250% of nominal current. For
testing above this level the continuous current rating of the relay inputs is likely to be exceeded, equipment or test
procedure should be arranged in such a way that the short term thermal withstand of the relay current inputs is
not exceeded during testing.
A2
A1
A6A5
A9
A13
R
M
IRESTRAIN
B2B1
B6B5
B9
R
M
Neutral
Phase C
Phase B
Phase A
Neutral
Phase C
Phase B
Phase A
Winding 1 Current
Transformers Winding 2 Current
Transformers
AI
RESTRAIN
I
OPERATE
A
IOPERATE
IRESTRAIN
Test
Transformer
IRESTRAIN + IOPERATE
IRESTRAIN + IOPERATE
Relay Terminals are for 1 amp CTs
I
A
IRESTRAIN
IRESTRAIN
+
IOPERATE
A14
A10
A17
A18
B10
IRESTRAIN
IRESTRAIN + IOPERATE
IRESTRAIN + IOPERATE
IRESTRAIN + IOPERATE
I
B
I
C
I
G
I
A
I
B
I
C
I
G
Figure 2-2 Secondary Inject ion usi ng a V ariac
2.1.1.1 Results for testing 87BD with a Variac
87BD
I
NITIAL
SETTING
87BD
1
ST
B
IAS
S
LOPE
SETTING
B
IAS
C
URRENT
(
X
I
N
)
MEASURED ON AMMETER A1
0.00
1.00
1.50
2.00
2.50
Operate Current Measured on Ammeter A2
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.11
0.16
0.21
0.26
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.22
0.33
0.44
0.56
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.35
0.53
0.71
0.88
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.50
0.75
1.00
1.25
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.67
1.00
1.33
1.67
0.50
0.60
0.50
0.86
1.29
1.71
2.14
0.50
0.70
0.50
1.08
1.62
2.15
2.69
Selected Settings
Test Results
0.00
1.00
1.50
2.00
2.50
Phase A Pickup
Phase B Pickup
Phase C Pickup
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 19 of 62
2.1.1.2 Results for testing 87BD with 2 curr ent sour ce s
87BD
I
NITIAL
SETTING
87BD
1
ST
B
IAS
SLOPE SETTING
W1
C
URRENT
(
X
I
N
)
0.00
1.00
1.50
2.00
2.50
W 2 Current (x In)
0.10
0.10
0.1
1.11
1.66
2.21
2.76
0.20
0.20
0.2
1.22
1.83
2.44
3.06
0.30
0.30
0.3
1.35
2.03
2.71
3.38
0.40
0.40
0.4
1.5
2.25
3.0
3.75
0.50
0.50
0.5
1.67
2.5
3.33
4.17
0.50
0.60
0.5
1.86
2.79
3.71
4.64
0.50
0.70
0.5
2.08
3.12
4.15
5.19
Selected Settings
Test Results
0.00
1.00
1.50
2.00
2.50
Phase A Pickup
Phase B Pickup
Phase C Pickup
2.1.1.3 Differential Highset 87H S
Differential Highset can be tested by single phase secondary current injection. 87HS settings will usually be
higher than the continuous thermal rating of the relay current inputs and equipment or test procedure should be
arranged in such a way that the short term thermal withstand of the relay current inputs is not exceeded during
testing. 50% of relay setting current can be injected into each of the 2 winding inputs simultaneously to achieve a
differential current level of 100% if test current is limited by test equipment capacity.
The settings used for Secondary Injection test purposes should be:
W1 ICT Mu ltiplier 1x
W1 ICT Connectio n Yy0,0deg
W2 ICT Mu ltiplier 1x
W2 ICT Connectio n Yy0,0deg
These settings ensure a 1:1 ratio between the injected current and the relay setting. Note that operation of the
element can be achieved at a lower level of current if a higher ICT multiplier setting is applied.
During testing the Operate current can be monitored on the relay in the Instruments menu.
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 20 of 62
2.1.2 Primary Injection Testing
Primary injection is recommended to prove the relay connections, CT polarity and settings before putting the
protection scheme into service. Primary injection is essential to fully prove the connections of the Biased
Differential and REF protections. To provide a useful test the relay should have the final site specific settings
applied for primary injection tests.
WARNING!
It is important before carrying out any primary injection to ensure appropriate CTs are shorted to avoid operation
of mesh corner or busbar type unit protection. If the injected primary current is large enough, the bus zones
protectio n may opera te.
Sufficient primary current to prove the connections and settings is required so that a minimum secondary current
of about 10mA rms circulates in the relay inputs. This is difficult to achieve using high current primary injection
equipment due to the relatively high impedance of the transformer windings. An alternative method is to apply 415
LVAC to one side of the transformer with a short circuit applied to the other side. The external three-phase
primary short is usually applied to the HV side so that the LVAC supply is connected to the winding with lowest
impedance which will result in a higher current level. The test current that will be produced can be predicted
based on the impedance of the transformer and the applied test voltage. The primary test current is injected
through all of the biased differential CT’s on the LV side.
Injection of 3 phase current in this way will simulate balanced load conditions, or through fault. During injection,
check that the W1 and W2 relay currents are in anti-phase by examination of the relay ‘Differential Meters’ in
‘Instruments Mode’. Check each phase in turn, ensuring that the phase angle for W 1 Relay ’ is in anti-phase with
‘W2 Relay’.
When the transformer is ev ent ually ener gi sed and carry ing lo ad current , the above examination of the W1 and W2
relay current phase angle should be re-checked for anti-phase to ensure that the correct ICT Connection settings
are applied to the differential protection.
It should be noted that checking of Vector Grouping by phase alignment between W1 and W2 by 3 phase primary
injection or on-load will highlight phase cross-over or connection polarity but will not show incorrect applic ation of
zero sequence filters.
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 21 of 62
2.1.3 Phase Overcurrent (50, 51)
50G
(x2)
51G
(x4) 64H
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
74
TCS
(x6)
59N
(x2)
27
59
(x4)
81
(x6)
7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0
81
HBL2
81
HBL2
87HS 87BD
ICT
ICT
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
50N
(x2)
51N
(x2)
46
BC
(x2)
37 49
37 49
50N
50
BF-2
50
BF-2
46
NPS
51N
51
51
50
50
50G 51G 64H
81
HBL
2
81
HBL
2
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
Each function element
can be assigned to W1
or W2 CT inputs.
NOTE: The use of some
functions are mutually
exclusive
24
(x3)
37G
(x2)
50
BF-1
I4
37G
50
BF-2
I4
74
CCS
(x6)
46
BC
46
NPS
(x4)
81
HBL5
81
HBL2
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37 49
50
BF-2 51
50 81
HBL2
81
HBL5
I
G1
W1-I
L1
(I
A
)
V
1
(V
X
)
I
G2
W1-I
L2
(I
B
)
W1-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L2
(I
B
)
W2-I
L1
(I
A
)
Figure 2-3 Phase Overcurrent
Voltage Inputs: None
Current Inputs: W1-IL1 (IA), W1-IL2 (IB), W1-IL3 (IC), or W2-IL1 (IA), W2-IL2 (IB), W2-IL3 (IC),
Disable: 46, 49, 50BF, 8 7 BD, 87HS
Map Pickup LED: 51-n/50-n - Self Reset
Other protection functions may overlap with these functions during testing, it may be useful to disable some
functions to avoid ambiguity.
These elements can be allocated to W1 or W2 current inputs by relay settings, ensure that current is injected on
the correct input.
Particular care should be taken when testing overcurrent functions that the thermal rating of the current inputs is
not exceeded.
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 22 of 62
2.1.4 Definite Time Overcurrent (50)
If DTL setting is small, gradually increase current until element operates.
If DTL is large apply 0.9x setting, check for no operation, apply 1.1x setting, check operation
Apply 2x setting current if possible and record operating time
Phas
e
Dir.
Is
(Amps)
DTL
(sec)
P.U. Current
Amps
Operate Time
2 x Is
NOTES
I
L1
(I
A
)
I
L2
(I
B
)
I
L3
(I
C
)
Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record.
2.1.5 Inverse Time Overcurrent (51)
It will be advantageous to map the function being tested to temporarily drive the relevant Pickup output in the
Pickup Config sub-menu in the Output Config menu as thi s will allow the P ick-up LED to operate for the function.
Gradually increase current until Pickup LED operates.
Apply 2x setting current and record operating time,
Apply 5x setting current and record operating time.
Compare to calculated values for operating times
P.U.
D.O.
&
TIMIN
G
TESTS
Ph.
Dir
Char.
(NI EI VI
LTI, DTL)
Is
(A)
TM
Operate Current
Operate Time
NOTES
P.U.
(Amps)
D.O.
(Amps)
2 x Is
(sec)
5 x Is
(sec)
I
L1
(I
A
)
I
L2
(I
B
)
I
L3
(I
C
)
Calculated Timing values in seconds for TM =1.0
Curve 2 xIs 5 xIs
IEC-NI 10.03 4.28
IEC-VI 13.50 3.38
IEC-EI 26.67 3.33
IEC-LTI 120.00 30.00
ANSI-MI 3.80 1.69
ANSI-VI 7.03 1.31
ANSI-EI 9.52 1.30
Note that the operate time may be subject to the Minimum op time setting for the element and/or may have a
Follower DTL applied.
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 23 of 62
2.1.5.1 Element Blocking
The Phase Overcurrent elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit and Inrush Detector operation. This
functionality should be checked.
Element
BI Inhibits
Inrush Detector
51-1
51-2
50-1
50-2
2.1.5.2 ANSI Reset
If the element is configured as an ANSI characteristic, it may have an ANSI (decaying) reset delay applied. If
ANSI reset is selected for an IEC characteristic element, the reset will be instantaneous.
ANSI reset times from operated condition to fully reset are as follows for zero applied current and Time multiplier
(TM) = 1.0. The reset curve characteristic type and TM is defined by the operating characteristic.
Curve Fully operated to reset with Zero current applied & TM=1 (secs)
ANSI-MI 4.85
ANSI-VI 21.6
ANSI-EI 29.1
Apply current in the following sequence, a) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation, b) Zero current for
the reset time above (xTM), c) 2 x setting for a time to ensure element operation. Check that the second operation
(c) is similar to the first (a) and in line with the expected operate time for the element at this current level.
Repeat the test with the reset time (b) reduced to 50% of the previous value. Ensure that the second operate time
(c) is 50% of the first (a) operate time.
Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record.
Operate time
(expected)
Reset time
(calculated)
Operate time
(measured)
50% Reset
Time
(calculated)
50% operate
time
(calculated)
50% operate
time
(measured)
First test (c) Second Test (c)
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 24 of 62
2.2 Derived Earth fault (50N,51N)
50G
(x2)
51G
(x4) 64H
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
74
TCS
(x6)
59N
(x2)
27
59
(x4)
81
(x6)
7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0
81
HBL2
81
HBL2
87HS 87BD
ICT
ICT
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
50N
(x2)
51N
(x2)
46
BC
(x2)
37 49
37 49
50N
50
BF-2
50
BF-2
46
NPS
51N
51
51
50
50
50G 51G 64H
81
HBL
2
81
HBL
2
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
Each function element
can be assigned to W1
or W2 CT inputs.
NOTE: The use of some
functions are mutually
exclusive
24
(x3)
37G
(x2)
50
BF-1
I4
37G
50
BF-2
I4
74
CCS
(x6)
46
BC
46
NPS
(x4)
81
HBL5
81
HBL2
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37 49
50
BF-2 5150 81
HBL2
81
HBL5
I
G1
W1-I
L1
(I
A
)
V
1
(V
X
)
I
G2
W1-I
L2
(I
B
)
W1-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L2
(I
B
)
W2-I
L1
(I
A
)
Figure 2-4 Measured Earth Fault
Voltage Inputs: None
Current Inputs: W1-IL1 (IA), W1-IL2 (IB), W1-IL3 (IC), or W2-IL1 (IA), W2-IL2 (IB), W2-IL3 (IC),
Disable: 50BF, 50, 51, 49, 37
Map Pickup LED: 51N-n/50N-n - Self Reset
Other protection functions may overlap with these functions during testing, it may be useful to disable some
functions to avoid ambiguity. Measured EF & Restricted EF protections can be Enabled/Disabled individually or
as groups in the ‘Function Config’ menu.
These elements can be allocated to W1 or W 2 current inputs by relay settings, ensure that current is injected on
the correct input.
Derived EF elements can be separated from Measured EF by secondary injection of current through the phase
input circuit only.
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 25 of 62
2.2.1 Definite Time Overcurrent (50N)
If DTL setting is small, gradually increase current until element operates.
If DTL is large apply 0.9x setting, check for no operation, apply 1.1x setting, check operation
Apply 2x setting current if possible and record operating time
Input
Is
(Amps)
DTL
(sec)
P.U. Current
Amps
Operate Time
2 x Is
NOTES
Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record.
2.2.2 Inverse Time Overcurrent (51N)
It will be advantageous to map the function being tested to temporarily drive the relevant Pickup output in the
Pickup Config sub-menu in the Output Config menu as this will allow the Pick-up led to operate for the function.
Gradually increase current until Pickup LED operates.
Apply 2x setting current and record operating time,
Apply 5x setting current and record operating time.
Compare to calculated values for operating times
P.U.
D.O.
&
TIMIN
G
TEST
S
Input
Char.
(NI EI VI
LTI, DTL)
Is
(A)
T.M.
Operate Current
Operate Time
NOTES
P.U.
(Amps)
D.O.
(Amps)
2 x Is
(sec)
5 x Is
(sec)
Calculated Timing values in seconds for TM =1.0
Curve 2 xIs 5 xIs
IEC-NI 10.03 4.28
IEC-VI 13.50 3.38
IEC-EI 26.67 3.33
IEC-LTI 120.00 30.00
ANSI-MI 3.80 1.69
ANSI-VI 7.03 1.31
ANSI-EI 9.52 1.30
Note that the operate time may be subject to the Minimum op time setting for the element and/or may have a
Follower DTL applied.
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 26 of 62
2.2.2.1 Element Blocking
The Measured Earth Fault elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit, VT Supervision and Inrush Detector
operation. The Characteristic can be made non-directional by VT Supervision. This functionality should be
checked.
Element
BI Inhibits
Inrush Detector
51N-1
51N-2
51N-3
51N-4
50N-1
50N-2
50N-3
50N-4
2.2.3 ANSI Reset
If the element is configured as an ANSI characteristic, it may have a reset delay applied. If ANSI reset is selected
for an IEC characteristic element, the reset will be instantaneous.
ANSI reset times from operated condition to fully reset are as follows for zero applied current and TM = 1.0. The
reset curve characteristic type and TM is defined by the operating characteristic.
Curve Fully operated to reset with Zero current applied & TM=1 (secs)
ANSI-MI 4.85
ANSI-VI 21.6
ANSI-EI 29.1
Apply current in the following sequence, a) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation, b) Zero current for
the reset time above (xTM), c) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation. Check that the second operation
(c) is similar to the first (a) and in line with the expected operate time for the element at this current level.
Repeat the test with the reset time (b) reduced to 50% of the previous value. Ensure that the second operate time
(c) is 50% of the first (a) operate time.
Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record.
Operate time
(expected) Reset time
(calculated) Operate time
(measured) 50% Reset
Time
(calculated)
50% operate
time
(calculated)
50% operate
time
(measured)
First test (c) Second Test (c)
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 27 of 62
2.3 Measur ed Eart h f au l t (50G, 51G)
50G
(x2)
51G
(x4) 64H
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
74
TCS
(x6)
59N
(x2)
27
59
(x4)
81
(x6)
7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0
81
HBL2
81
HBL2
87HS 87BD
ICT
ICT
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
50N
(x2)
51N
(x2)
46
BC
(x2)
37 49
37 49
50N
50
BF-2
50
BF-2
46
NPS
51N
51
51
50
50
50G51G64H
81
HBL
2
81
HBL
2
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
Each function element
can be assigned to W1
or W2 CT inputs.
NOTE: The use of some
functions are mutually
exclusive
24
(x3)
37G
(x2)
50
BF-1
I4
37G
50
BF-2
I4
74
CCS
(x6)
46
BC
46
NPS
(x4)
81
HBL5
81
HBL2
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37 49
50
BF-2 51
50 81
HBL2
81
HBL5
I
G1
W1-I
L1
(I
A
)
V
1
(V
X
)
I
G2
W1-I
L2
(I
B
)
W1-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L2
(I
B
)
W2-I
L1
(I
A
)
Figure 2-5 Measured Earth Fault
Voltage Inputs: None
Current Inputs: IG1 , IG2
Disable: 50BF, 64H
Map Pickup LED: 51G-n/50G-n - Self Reset
Other protection functions may overlap with these functions during testing, it may be useful to disable some
functions to avoid ambiguity. Derived EF, Measured EF & Restricted EF protections can be Enabled/Disabled
individually or as groups in the ‘Function Config’ menu.
These elements can be allocated to IG1 or I G2 current inputs by relay settings, ensure that current is injected on
the correct input.
Measured EF elements can be separated from Derived EF by secondary injection of current through the IG1 or IG2
input circuit only.
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 28 of 62
2.3.1 Definite Time Overcurrent (50G)
If DTL setting is small, gradually increase current until element operates.
If DTL is large apply 0.9x setting, check for no operation, apply 1.1x setting, check operation
Apply 2x setting current if possible and record operating time
Input
Is
(Amps)
DTL
(sec)
P.U. Current
Amps
Operate Time
2 x Is
NOTES
I
G1
Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record.
2.3.2 Inverse Time Overcurrent (51G)
It will be advantageous to map the function being tested to temporarily drive the relevant Pickup output in the
Pickup Config sub-menu in the Output Config menu as this will allow the Pick-up LED to operate for the function.
Gradually increase current until Pickup LED operates.
Apply 2x setting current and record operating time,
Apply 5x setting current and record operating time.
Compare to calcu late d values for operating times
P.U.
D.O.
&
TIMING
TESTS
Input
Char.
(NI EI VI
LTI, DTL)
Is
(A)
T.M.
Operate Current
Operate Time
NOTES
P.U.
(Amps)
D.O.
(Amps)
2 x Is
(sec)
5 x Is
(sec)
I
G1
Calculated Timing values in seconds for TM =1.0
Curve 2 xIs 5 xIs
IEC-NI 10.03 4.28
IEC-VI 13.50 3.38
IEC-EI 26.67 3.33
IEC-LTI 120.00 30.00
ANSI-MI 3.80 1.69
ANSI-VI 7.03 1.31
ANSI-EI 9.52 1.30
Note that the operate time may be subject to the Minimum op time setting for the element and/or may have a
Follower DTL applied.
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 29 of 62
2.3.2.1 Element Blocking
The Measured Earth Fault elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit, VT Supervision and Inrush Detector
operation. The Characteristic can be made non-directional by VT Supervision. This functionality should be
checked.
Element
BI Inhibits
Inrush Detector
51G-1
51G-2
51G-3
51G-4
50G-1
50G-2
50G-3
50G-4
2.3.3 ANSI Reset
If the element is configured as an ANSI characteristic, it may have a reset delay applied. If ANSI reset is selected
for an IEC characteristic element, the reset will be instantaneous.
ANSI reset times from operated condition to fully reset are as follows for zero applied current and TM = 1.0. The
reset curve char acte rist ic ty pe and TM is defined by the operating characteristic.
Curve
Fully operated to reset with Zero current applied & TM=1 (secs)
ANSI-MI 4.85
ANSI-VI 21.6
ANSI-EI 29.1
Apply current in the following sequence, a) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation, b) Zero current for
the reset time above (xTM), c) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation. Check that the second operation
(c) is similar to the first (a) and in line with the expected operate time for the element at this current level.
Repeat the test with the reset time (b) reduced to 50% of the previous value. Ensure that the second operate time
(c) is 50% of the first (a) operate time.
Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record.
Operate time
(expected) Reset time
(calculated) Operate time
(measured) 50% Reset
Time
(calculated)
50% operate
time
(calculated)
50% operate
time
(measured)
First test (c) Second Test (c)
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 30 of 62
2.4 Restric ted Ear th faul t (64H)
50G
(x2)
51G
(x4) 64H
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
74
TCS
(x6)
59N
(x2)
27
59
(x4)
81
(x6)
7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0
81
HBL2
81
HBL2
87HS 87BD
ICT
ICT
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
50N
(x2)
51N
(x2)
46
BC
(x2)
37 49
37 49
50N
50
BF-2
50
BF-2
46
NPS
51N
51
51
50
50
50G 51G 64H
81
HBL
2
81
HBL
2
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
Each function element
can be assigned to W1
or W2 CT inputs.
NOTE: The use of some
functions are mutually
exclusive
24
(x3)
37G
(x2)
50
BF-1
I4
37G
50
BF-2
I4
74
CCS
(x6)
46
BC
46
NPS
(x4)
81
HBL5
81
HBL2
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37 49
50
BF-2 5150 81
HBL2
81
HBL5
I
G1
W1-I
L1
(I
A
)
V
1
(V
X
)
I
G2
W1-I
L2
(I
B
)
W1-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L2
(I
B
)
W2-I
L1
(I
A
)
Figure 2-6 Restricted Earth Fault
Voltage Inputs: n/a
Current Inputs: IG1 , IG2
Disable: 50G, 51G, 50BF
Map Pickup LED: 64H-n - Self Reset
The external stabilising resistor value should be measured and compared to that specified in the settings data.
Both values should be re cord e d.
Element
Settings Data: RSTAB Value
RSTAB Measured
64H-1
64H-2
The relatively high value of stabilising res istance R STAB will often interfere with secondary current injection when
using a digital test set. It is normal practice in these cases to short circuit the resistor to allow testing, the shorting
link should be removed after testing.
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 31 of 62
These elements can be enabled for the IG1 or I G2 current inputs by relay settings, ensure that current is injected
on the correct input.
Since the DTL setting is generally small the pick-up setting can be tested by gradually increasing current until
element opera tes . The relay should be disconnected from the current transformers for this test.
Apply 2x setting current if possible and record operating time
Is
(Amps)
DTL
(sec)
P.U. Current
Amps
Operate Time
2 x Is
NOTES
64H-1
64H-2
It is also desirable to check the operating voltage achieved with the setting resistor and all parallel CTs connected
but de-energised. A higher capacity test set will be required for this test. Adequate current must be supplied to
provide the magnetising current of all connected CTs. Precautions should be taken to ensure that no personnel
are at risk of contact with any of the energised secondary wiring during the test.
Settings Data:
Voltage Setting (VS)
VS Measured Settings Data:
Operate Current (IOP)
IOP Measured
64H-1
64H-2
To complete testing of the REF requires primary injection through the phase and residual (REF) CT in series to
simulate an out of zone fault and ensure stability of the relay. The test can then be repeated with the REF CT
secondary connections reversed to prove operation.
2.4.1.1 Element Blocking
The Restricted Earth Fault element can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. Where a ppli ed this functionality should
be checked.
Element
BI Inhibits
Checked
64H-1
64H-2
Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record.
Check that any shorting links are removed after testing.
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 32 of 62
2.5 Open Circuit (46BC)
50G
(x2)
51G
(x4) 64H
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
74
TCS
(x6)
59N
(x2)
27
59
(x4)
81
(x6)
7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0
81
HBL2
81
HBL2
87HS 87BD
ICT
ICT
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
50N
(x2)
51N
(x2)
46
BC
(x2)
37 49
37 49
50N
50
BF-2
50
BF-2
46
NPS
51N
51
51
50
50
50G 51G 64H
81
HBL
2
81
HBL
2
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
Each function element
can be assigned to W1
or W2 CT inputs.
NOTE: The use of some
functions are mutually
exclusive
24
(x3)
37G
(x2)
50
BF-1
I4
37G
50
BF-2
I4
74
CCS
(x6)
46
BC
46
NPS
(x4)
81
HBL5
81
HBL2
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37 49
50
BF-2 5150 81
HBL2
81
HBL5
I
G1
W1-I
L1
(I
A
)
V
1
(V
X
)
I
G2
W1-I
L2
(I
B
)
W1-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L2
(I
B
)
W2-I
L1
(I
A
)
Figure 2-7 Open Circuit
Voltage Inputs: n/a
Current Inputs: W1-IL1 (IA), W1-IL2 (IB), W1-IL3 (IC), or W2-IL1 (IA), W2-IL2 (IB), W2-IL3 (IC),
Disable: 51N, 46IT, 46DT
Map Pickup LED: 46BC - Self Reset
This function uses the ratio of NPS current to PPS current to detect an open circuit . These quantities can be
produced directly from many advanced test sets but with limited equipment the following approach can be
applied.
Apply 3P balanced current with normal phase rotation direction. This current will consist of PPS alone, no NPS or
ZPS.
Increase 1 phase current magnitude in isolation to produce NPS. The single phase unbalance current will contain
equal quantities of ZPS, NPS and PPS. The NPS component will be 1/3 of the unbalance current and the total
PPS component will be value of the original balanced 3P current plus 1/3 of the additional unbalance current. i.e.
as the single phase unbalance current increases, the ratio of NPS to PPS will also increase. The levels of each
sequence component current can be monitored in the Current Meters in Instruments Mode.
Inject 1A of balanced current. Gradually increase imbalance current, operating level should be as follows:
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 33 of 62
46BC Setting 1P unbalance curr ent
(% of 3P current)
20%
75%
25%
100%
30%
129%
35%
161%
40%
200%
46BC Setting 3P balanced current (A) 1P unbalance current (A) Measured Unbalance
current
46BC-1
46BC-2
Apply 1A 1P unbalance current without 3P balanced current. Measure 46BC operating time.
46BC Delay setting
Measured
46BC-1
46BC-2
2.5.1.1 Element Blocking
Elements can be blocked by operation of a Binary Input Inhibit or by operation of the 46BC-n U/I Guard element.
This functionality should be checked.
Element
BI Inhibits
U/I Guard
NOTES
46BC-1
46BC-2
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 34 of 62
2.6 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46NPS)
50G
(x2)
51G
(x4) 64H
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
74
TCS
(x6)
59N
(x2)
27
59
(x4)
81
(x6)
7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0
81
HBL2
81
HBL2
87HS 87BD
ICT
ICT
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
50N
(x2)
51N
(x2)
46
BC
(x2)
37 49
37 49
50N
50
BF-2
50
BF-2
46
NPS
51N
51
51
50
50
50G 51G 64H
81
HBL
2
81
HBL
2
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
Each function element
can be assigned to W1
or W2 CT inputs.
NOTE: The use of some
functions are mutually
exclusive
24
(x3)
37G
(x2)
50
BF-1
I4
37G
50
BF-2
I4
74
CCS
(x6)
46
BC
46
NPS
(x4)
81
HBL5
81
HBL2
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37 49
50
BF-2 5150 81
HBL2
81
HBL5
I
G1
W1-I
L1
(I
A
)
V
1
(V
X
)
I
G2
W1-I
L2
(I
B
)
W1-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L2
(I
B
)
W2-I
L1
(I
A
)
Figure 2-8 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent
Voltage Inputs: n/a
Current Inputs: W1-IL1 (IA), W1-IL2 (IB), W1-IL3 (IC), or W2-IL1 (IA), W2-IL2 (IB), W2-IL3 (IC),
Disable: 50, 51, 50BF, 87BD
Map Pickup LED: 46IT/46DT - Self Reset
Where two NPS elements are being used with different settings, it is convenient to test the elements with the
highest settings first. The elements with lower settings can then be tested without disabling the lower settings.
The Thermal withstand limitations of the current inputs, stated in the Performance Specification should always be
observed throughout testing.
These elements can be allocated to W1 or W2 current inputs by relay settings, ensure that current is injected on
the correct input.
NPS Overcurrent can be tested using a normal 3P balanced source. Two phase current connections should be
reversed so that the applied balanced 3P current is Negative Phase Sequence.
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 35 of 62
2.6.1 Definite Time NPS Overcurrent (46DT)
If DTL setting is small, gradually increase current until element operates.
If DTL is large apply 0.9x setting, check for no operation, apply 1.1x setting, check operation
Apply 2x setting current if possible and record operating time
Phase
Is
(Amps)
DTL
(sec)
P.U. Current
Amps
Operate Time
2 x Is
NOTES
NPS
Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record.
2.6.2 Inverse Time NPS Overcurrent (46IT)
It will be advantageous to map the function being tested to temporarily drive the relevant Pickup output in the
Pickup Config sub-menu in the Output Config menu as this will allow the Pick-up led to operate for the function.
Gradually increase current until Pickup LED operates.
Apply 2x setting current and record operating time,
Apply 5x setting current and record operating time.
Compare to calculated values for operating times
P.U.
D.O.
&
TIMING
TESTS
Ph.
Char.
(NI EI VI LTI,
DTL)
Is
(A)
TM
Operate Current
Operate Time
NOTES
P.U.
(Amps)
D.O.
(Amps)
2 x Is
(sec)
5 x Is
(sec)
NPS
Calculated Timing values in seconds for TM =1.0
Curve 2 xIs 5 xIs
IEC-NI 10.03 4.28
IEC-VI 13.50 3.38
IEC-EI 26.67 3.33
IEC-LTI 120.00 30.00
ANSI-MI 3.80 1.69
ANSI-VI 7.03 1.31
ANSI-EI 9.52 1.30
Note that the operate time may be subject to the Minimum op time setting for the element and/or may have a
Follower DTL applied.
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 36 of 62
2.6.2.1 ANSI Reset
If the element is configured as an ANSI characteristic, it may have a reset delay applied. If ANSI reset is selected
for an IEC characteristic element, the reset will be instantaneous .
ANSI reset times from operated condition to fully reset are as follows for zero applied current and TM = 1.0. The
reset curve char acte rist ic ty pe and TM is defined by the operating characteristic.
Curve Fully operated to reset with Zero current applied & TM=1 (secs)
ANSI-MI 4.85
ANSI-VI 21.6
ANSI-EI 29.1
Apply current in the following sequence, a) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation, b) Zero current for
the reset time above (xTM), c) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation. Check that the second operation
(c) is similar to the first (a) and in line with the expected operate time for the element at this current level.
Repeat the test with the reset time (b) reduced to 50% of the previous value. Ensure that the second operate time
(c) is 50% of the first (a) operate time.
2.6.2.2 Element Blocking
The NPS Overcurrent elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functio nali ty should be che cke d.
Element
BI Inhibits
46IT
46DT
Check correct ind ic atio n, tri p output, alarm contacts, waveform record.
When testing is complete reinstate any of the disabled functions.
Operate time
(expected)
Reset time
(calculated)
Operate time
(measured)
50% Reset
Time
(calculated)
50% operate
time
(calculated)
50% operate
time
(measured)
First test (c) Second Test (c)
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 37 of 62
2.7 Undercurrent (37, 37G)
50G
(x2)
51G
(x4) 64H
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
74
TCS
(x6)
59N
(x2)
27
59
(x4)
81
(x6)
7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0
81
HBL2
81
HBL2
87HS 87BD
ICT
ICT
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
50N
(x2)
51N
(x2)
46
BC
(x2)
37 49
37 49
50N
50
BF-2
50
BF-2
46
NPS
51N
51
51
50
50
50G 51G 64H
81
HBL
2
81
HBL
2
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
Each function element
can be assigned to W1
or W2 CT inputs.
NOTE: The use of some
functions are mutually
exclusive
24
(x3)
37G
(x2)
50
BF-1
I4
37G
50
BF-2
I4
74
CCS
(x6)
46
BC
46
NPS
(x4)
81
HBL5
81
HBL2
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37 49
50
BF-2 5150 81
HBL2
81
HBL5
I
G1
W1-I
L1
(I
A
)
V
1
(V
X
)
I
G2
W1-I
L2
(I
B
)
W1-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L2
(I
B
)
W2-I
L1
(I
A
)
Figure 2-9 Undercurrent
Voltage Inputs: n/a
Current Inputs: W1-IL1 (IA), W1-IL2 (IB), W1-IL3 (IC), IG1 or W2-IL1 (IA), W2-IL2 (IB), W2-IL3 (IC),
IG2
Disable: 50N, 51N, 51G, 46, 87BD
Map Pickup LED: 37-n, 37G-n - Self Reset
2.7.1 37-n Elements
If two Undercurrent 37 elements are used with different settings, it is convenient to test the element with the
lowest setting first. The higher setting element can then be tested without interference from the other element.
These elements can be allocated to W1 or W2 current inputs by relay settings, ensure that current is injected on
the correct input.
Apply 3P balanced current at a level above the 37-n setting until the ele men t reset s.
If DTL setting is small, gradually reduce any each phase current in turn until element oper at es.
If DTL is large apply 1.1x setting, check for no operation, apply 0.9x setting, check operation
Testing of these elements phase by phase may cause inadvertent operation of the 46 NPS Overcurrent elements.
Apply 0.5x setting current and record operating time
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 38 of 62
Phase
Is
(Amps)
DTL
(sec)
P.U. Current
Amps
Operate Time
0.5 x Is
NOTES
Wn-I
L1
(I
A
)
Wn-I
L2
(I
B
)
Wn-I
L3
(I
C
)
Wn-I
L1
(I
A
)
Wn-I
L2
(I
B
)
Wn-I
L3
(I
C
)
Elements can be blocked by operation of a Binary Input Inhibit or by operation of the 37-n U/I Guard element.
This functionality should be checked.
Element
BI Inhibits
U/I Guard
NOTES
37-1
37-2
Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record.
2.7.2 37G-n Elements
Apply current to the IGn input at a level above the 37G-n setting until the element resets.
If DTL setting is small, gradually reduce current until element operates.
If DTL is large apply 1.1x setting, check for no operation, apply 0.9x setting, check operation
Apply 0.5x setting current and record operating time
Phase
Is
(Amps)
DTL
(sec)
P.U. Current
Amps
Operate Time
0.5 x Is
NOTES
I
G
I
G
Elements can be blocked by operation of a Binary Input Inhibit.
This functionality should be checked.
Element
BI Inhibits
NOTES
37G-1
37G-2
Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record.
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 39 of 62
2.8 Thermal Overload (49)
50G
(x2)
51G
(x4)64H
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
74
TCS
(x6)
59N
(x2)
27
59
(x4)
81
(x6)
7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0
81
HBL2
81
HBL2
87HS 87BD
ICT
ICT
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
50N
(x2)
51N
(x2)
46
BC
(x2)
37 49
37 49
50N
50
BF-2
50
BF-2
46
NPS
51N
51
51
50
50
50G51G64H
81
HBL
2
81
HBL
2
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
Each function element
can be assigned to W1
or W2 CT inputs.
NOTE: The use of some
functions are mutually
exclusive
24
(x3)
37G
(x2)
50
BF-1
I4
37G
50
BF-2
I4
74
CCS
(x6)
46
BC
46
NPS
(x4)
81
HBL5
81
HBL2
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37 49
50
BF-2 5150 81
HBL2
81
HBL5
I
G1
W1-I
L1
(I
A
)
V
1
(V
X
)
I
G2
W1-I
L2
(I
B
)
W1-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L2
(I
B
)
W2-I
L1
(I
A
)
Figure 2-10 Thermal Overload
Voltage Inputs: n/a
Current Inputs: W1-IL1 (IA), W1-IL2 (IB), W1-IL3 (IC), or W2-IL1 (IA), W2-IL2 (IB), W2-IL3 (IC),
Disable: 51, 50, 37, 46NPS, 50CBF, 87BD
Map Pickup LED: 49 Alarm
The current can be applied from a 3P balanced supply or phase by phase from a 1P supply. Alternatively the 3
phase current inputs can be connected in series and injected simultaneously from a single 1P source.
This elements can be allocated to W 1 or W 2 current inputs by relay settings, ensure that current is injected on the
correct input.
The Thermal Overload Setting and Time Constant Setting can be considered together to calculate the operating
time for a particular appl ied cu rr ent.
The following table lists operate times for a range of Time Constant Settings for an applied current of 2x the
Thermal Overload setting. Ensure that the thermal rating of the relay is not exceeded during this test.
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 40 of 62
Time Constant (mins) Operate Time (sec)
1 17.3
2 34.5
3 51.8
4 69
5 86.3
10 173
15 259
20 345
25 432
30 51.8
50 863
100 1726
The Thermal State must be in the fully reset condition in order to measure the operate time correctly. This can be
achieved by setting change in the Thermal protection settings menu or by pressing the Test/Reset button when
the Thermal Meter is shown in the Instruments Mode.
Reset the thermal State then apply 2x the Overload Setting current.
Calculated Operate Time (s)
Measured Operate Time (s)
If the Thermal Overload Capacity Alarm is used, this can be tested by monitoring the Thermal Capacity in the
instruments menu. If the Thermal time constant is longer than a few minutes, this can be assessed during the
timing test above. If the Time Constant is less than a few minutes, a lower multiple of current will be required such
that the rate of capacity increase is slowed to allow monitoring of the instrument to be accurate.
Capacity Alarm Setting
Measured
2.8.1.1 Element Blocking
The Thermal element can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked.
Element
BI Inhibits
49
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 41 of 62
2.9 Under/Over Volt age (27/59)
50G
(x2)
51G
(x4) 64H
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
74
TCS
(x6)
59N
(x2)
27
59
(x4)
81
(x6)
7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0
81
HBL2
81
HBL2
87HS 87BD
ICT
ICT
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
50N
(x2)
51N
(x2)
46
BC
(x2)
37 49
37 49
50N
50
BF-2
50
BF-2
46
NPS
51N
51
51
50
50
50G51G64H
81
HBL
2
81
HBL
2
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
Each function element
can be assigned to W1
or W2 CT inputs.
NOTE: The use of some
functions are mutually
exclusive
24
(x3)
37G
(x2)
50
BF-1
I4
37G
50
BF-2
I4
74
CCS
(x6)
46
BC
46
NPS
(x4)
81
HBL5
81
HBL2
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37 49
50
BF-2 51
50 81
HBL2
81
HBL5
I
G1
W1-I
L1
(I
A
)
V
1
(V
X
)
I
G2
W1-I
L2
(I
B
)
W1-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L2
(I
B
)
W2-I
L1
(I
A
)
Figure 2-11 Phase Under/Over Voltage
Voltage Inputs: V1 (VX)
Current Inputs: n/a apply zero current to stabilize other functions
Disable: 59N
Map Pickup LED: 27/59-n - Self Reset
Where more than one Undervoltage (27) elements are being used with different settings, it is convenient to test
the elements with the lowest settings first. The elements with higher settings can then be tested without disabling
the lower settings.
Note that if the voltage is reduced below the 27UVG setting, the function may be blocked. Current inputs are not
required to stabilise the relay during voltage element testing.
If the DTL is short, starting from nominal voltage, slowly decrease the applied test voltage until the Pickup LED
(temporarily mapped) is lit. Record the operate voltage. The LED should light at setting Volts +/-5%. Slowly
increase the input voltage until the LED extinguishes. Record the reset voltage to check the ‘Hysteresis’ setting. If
the DTL is long, the operate level should be checked by applying a voltage of 90% of setting voltage. Check
Hysteresis by resetting element to the operate level setting plus the hysteresis setting.
Connect the relevant output contact(s) to stop the test set. Step the applied voltage to a level below the setting.
The test set should be stopped at the operate time setting +/ -5%
When testing is compl ete reinstate any of the disabled functions.
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 42 of 62
Where more than one Overvoltage (59) elements are being used with different settings, it is convenient to test the
elements with the highest settings first. The elements with lower settings can then be tested without disabling the
higher settings.
If the ‘O/P Phases’ is set to ‘All’, the voltage on all phases must be increased simultaneously. Otherwise the 3
phases should be tes t ed in di vid u a lly . If the DTL setting is short, starting from nominal voltage, slowly increase the
applied 3P or VL1 test voltage until the Pickup LED (temporarily mapped) is lit. The LED should light at setting
Volts +/-5% Decrease the input voltage to nominal Volts and the LED will extinguish. Record the reset voltage to
check the ‘Hysteresis’ setting. If the DTL setting is long, the operate level can be checked by applying 100% of
setting to cause operation followed by setting minus the Hysteresis setting to cause reset.
Connect the relevant output contact(s) to stop the test set. Step the applied voltage to a level above the setting.
The test set should be stopped at the operate time setting +/-5%
Test inputs VL2 and VL3 by repeating the above if ne cessar y.
Phase
27/59
setting
(Volts)
U/
O
DTL
(sec)
Hyst.
D.O.
(calculated)
P.U.
Volts
D.O
Volts
Op. Time
2x Vs (OV)
0.5x Vs
(UV)
UV
Guard
NOTES
V
1
(V
X
)
2.9.1.1 Element Blocking
The NPS Overcurrent elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit and VT Supervision. This functionality
should be checked.
Element
BI Inhibits
27/59-1
27/59-2
27/59-3
27/59-4
When testing is complete reinstate any of the disabled functions.
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 43 of 62
2.9.2 Undervoltage Gua rd (27/59UVG)
If any 27 Undervoltage element is set to be inhibited by the 27 Undervoltage Guard element, this function should
be tested.
Connect the test voltage inputs to suit the installation wiring diagram utilising any test socket facilities available. It
may be useful to temporarily map an LED as ‘Gen er al Pickup’ to assist during testing. 27UVG operation will reset
the General Pickup if no other element is operated. This LED should not be set as Hand Reset’ in the Output
matrix.
Starting from nominal voltage, apply a step decrease to the applied voltage to a level below the 27 Undervoltage
setting but above the 27UVG setting such that an Undervoltage element operation occurs. Slowly reduce the
applied voltage until the 27 Undervoltage element resets, this can be detected by the General Pickup LED reset if
no other element is operated (this includes any Undervoltage element which is not UV Guarded).
Phase
Vs
(Volts)
V element
Used for test
Blocked
Volts
NOTES
UVG
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 44 of 62
2.10 Neutral O ver Voltage (59N)
50G
(x2)
51G
(x4) 64H
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
74
TCS
(x6)
59N
(x2)
27
59
(x4)
81
(x6)
7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0
81
HBL2
81
HBL2
87HS 87BD
ICT
ICT
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
50N
(x2)
51N
(x2)
46
BC
(x2)
37 49
37 49
50N
50
BF-2
50
BF-2
46
NPS
51N
51
51
50
50
50G51G64H
81
HBL
2
81
HBL
2
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
Each function element
can be assigned to W1
or W2 CT inputs.
NOTE: The use of some
functions are mutually
exclusive
24
(x3)
37G
(x2)
50
BF-1
I4
37G
50
BF-2
I4
74
CCS
(x6)
46
BC
46
NPS
(x4)
81
HBL5
81
HBL2
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37 49
50
BF-2 51
50 81
HBL2
81
HBL5
I
G1
W1-I
L1
(I
A
)
V
1
(V
X
)
I
G2
W1-I
L2
(I
B
)
W1-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L2
(I
B
)
W2-I
L1
(I
A
)
Figure 2-12 Neutral Overvoltage
Voltage Inputs: V1 (VX)
Current Inputs: n/a apply zero current to stabilize other functions
Disable: 27/59
Map Pickup LED: 59N-n - Self Reset
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 45 of 62
2.10.1 Definite Time (59NDT)
If DTL setting is small, gradually increase single phase voltage until element operates.
If DTL is large apply 0.9x setting, check for no operation, apply 1.1x setting, check operation
Apply 2x setting voltage if possible and record operating time
Phase
Vs
(Volts)
DTL
(sec)
P.U. Current
Volts
Operate Time
2 x Vs
NOTES
V
1
(V
X)
Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record.
2.10.2 Inverse Time (59NIT)
It will be advantageous to map the function being tested to temporarily drive the relevant Pickup output in the
Pickup Config sub-menu in the Output Config menu as this will allow the Pick-up LED to operate for the function.
Gradually increase voltage until Pickup LED operates.
Apply 2x setting voltage and record operating time,
Apply a higher multiple of setting voltage and record operating time.
Compare to calculated values for operating times from:
( )
[]
=1
1
)sec
Vs
Vn
op
Monds
t
Where M = Time multiplier and Vn/Vs = multiple of setting.
Ph.
Vs
(V)
TM
Operate Voltage
Operate Time
NOTES
P.U.
(Volts)
D.O.
(Volts)
2 x Vs
(sec)
x Vs
(sec)
V
1
(V
X)
2.10.2.1 Element Blocking
The Neutral Overvoltage elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked.
Element
BI Inhibits
59NIT
59NDT
Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record.
When testing is complete reinstate any of the disabled functions.
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 46 of 62
2.11 Under/Over Frequency (81)
50G
(x2)
51G
(x4) 64H
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
74
TCS
(x6)
59N
(x2)
27
59
(x4)
81
(x6)
7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0
81
HBL2
81
HBL2
87HS 87BD
ICT
ICT
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
50N
(x2)
51N
(x2)
46
BC
(x2)
37 49
37 49
50N
50
BF-2
50
BF-2
46
NPS
51N
51
51
50
50
50G51G64H
81
HBL
2
81
HBL
2
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
Each function element
can be assigned to W1
or W2 CT inputs.
NOTE: The use of some
functions are mutually
exclusive
24
(x3)
37G
(x2)
50
BF-1
I4
37G
50
BF-2
I4
74
CCS
(x6)
46
BC
46
NPS
(x4)
81
HBL5
81
HBL2
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37 49
50
BF-2 51
50 81
HBL2
81
HBL5
I
G1
W1-I
L1
(I
A
)
V
1
(V
X
)
I
G2
W1-I
L2
(I
B
)
W1-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L2
(I
B
)
W2-I
L1
(I
A
)
Figure 2-13 Under/Over Frequency
Voltage Inputs: V1 (VX)
Current Inputs: n/a apply zero current to stabilize other functions
Disable:
Map Pickup LED: 81-n - Self Reset
For Over-frequency, the elements with the highest setting should be tested first and for Under-frequency the
elements with the lowest settings should be tested first. The elements with other settings can then be tested
without need to disable the elements already tested. Note that the relay is designed to track the gradual changes
in power system frequency and that sudden step changes in frequency during testing do not reflect normal
system operation. Normal ‘instantaneous’ operation of the frequency element is 140-175ms in line with the
Performance Specification. Application of sudden step changes to frequency can add additional delay which can
produce misleading test results.
Gradually increase/decrease applied voltage frequency until 81-n operation occurs. Elements set for more
extreme frequency fluctuation should be tested first with lesser elements disabled.
If the 81-n Delay setting is long it will be advantageous to map the function to temporarily drive the relevant
Pickup output in the Pickup Config sub-menu in the Output Config menu as this will allow the Pick-up LED to
operate for the function. If the delay setting is short the operation of the element can be easily checked directly.
The frequency should then be gradually decreased/increased until the element resets. The reset frequency can
be used to check the Hysteresis setting.
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 47 of 62
If the element is set as 81-n U/V Guarde d, The applied voltage must be above the 81 UV Guar d Setting in the
U/O Frequency menu.
Apply setting frequency +0.5Hz for Over-frequency or -0.5Hz for Under-frequency and record operating time.
Starting with the element in the operated condition, gradually increase or decrease the applied voltage until the
element resets. Measure the reset voltage level to check the 81 Hysteresis setting.
F
(Hertz)
U/O
DTL
(sec)
Hyst.
D.O.
(calc.)
P.U.
Freq
Hertz
D.O.
Freq.
Hertz
Operate
Time
+/- 0.5Hz
UV
Guard
NOTES
If the element is set as 81-nU/V Guarded , this setting can be tested by applying the test voltage at a level below
the 81 U/V Guard Setting at a frequency in the operate range. Increase the voltage until the relay operates.
UVG
UVG Setting
(Volts)
Freq element
Used for test
Blocked
Volts (D.O.)
Unblocked Volts (P.U.)
NOTES
U/O Freq
2.11.1.1 Element Blocking
The U/O Frequency eleme nts can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked.
Element
BI Inhibits
81-1
81-2
81-3
81-4
81-5
81-6
Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record.
When testing is complete reinstate any of the disabled functions.
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 48 of 62
2.12 Overfluxing (24)
50G
(x2)
51G
(x4) 64H
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
74
TCS
(x6)
59N
(x2)
27
59
(x4)
81
(x6)
7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0
81
HBL2
81
HBL2
87HS 87BD
ICT
ICT
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
50N
(x2)
51N
(x2)
46
BC
(x2)
37 49
37 49
50N
50
BF-2
50
BF-2
46
NPS
51N
51
51
50
50
50G 51G 64H
81
HBL
2
81
HBL
2
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
Each function element
can be assigned to W1
or W2 CT inputs.
NOTE: The use of some
functions are mutually
exclusive
24
(x3)
37G
(x2)
50
BF-1
I4
37G
50
BF-2
I4
74
CCS
(x6)
46
BC
46
NPS
(x4)
81
HBL5
81
HBL2
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37 49
50
BF-2 5150 81
HBL2
81
HBL5
I
G1
W1-I
L1
(I
A
)
V
1
(V
X
)
I
G2
W1-I
L2
(I
B
)
W1-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L2
(I
B
)
W2-I
L1
(I
A
)
Figure 2-14 Under/Over Frequency
The settings are set in terms of V/f based on multiple of nominal voltage and frequency. Application of a voltage of
nominal voltage and frequency represents 1.0.
Testing is simplified by applying nominal frequency and increasing voltage only, such that the operating level is
simply the setting multiplied by Nominal Voltage.
2.12.1 definite time (24DT)
If DTL setting is small, gradually increase voltage until element operates.
If DTL is large apply 0.95x setting, check for no operation, apply 1.05x setting, check operation
Apply 0.9x voltage, increase to 1.1x setting and record operating time
Setting
(xVn)
Setting
(volts)
Hysteresis
(%)
Calculated
D.O.
(volts)
DTL
Setting
(sec)
P.U.
Volts
D.O.
Volts
Operate
Time
NOTES
Check correct indication, trip o utput, alarm contacts, wav efor m record.
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 49 of 62
2.12.2 inver se tim e (24IT )
The inverse V/f element should be tested at each of the points specified by settings that constitute the overall
inverse charact er i sti cs.
Setting
(xVn)
Setting
(volts)
Hysteresis
(%)
Calculated
D.O.
(volts)
DTL
Setting
(sec)
P.U.
Volts
D.O.
Volts
Operate
Time
NOTES
X0
Y0
Setting
(xVn)
Setting
(volts)
DTL
Setting
(sec)
Operate
Time
NOTES
X1
Y1
X2
Y2
X3
Y3
X4
Y4
X5
Y5
X6
Y6
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 50 of 62
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 51 of 62
Section 3: Supervisi on Functions
3.1 CB Fail (50BF)
50G
(x2)
51G
(x4) 64H
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
74
TCS
(x6)
59N
(x2)
27
59
(x4)
81
(x6)
7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0
81
HBL2
81
HBL2
87HS 87BD
ICT
ICT
37
(x2)49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
50N
(x2)
51N
(x2)
46
BC
(x2)
37 49
37 49
50N
50
BF-2
50
BF-2
46
NPS
51N
51
51
50
50
50G 51G64H
81
HBL
2
81
HBL
2
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
Each function element
can be assigned to W1
or W2 CT inputs.
NOTE: The use of some
functions are mutually
exclusive
24
(x3)
37G
(x2)
50
BF-1
I4
37G
50
BF-2
I4
74
CCS
(x6)
46
BC
46
NPS
(x4)
81
HBL5
81
HBL2
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37 49
50
BF-2 5150 81
HBL2
81
HBL5
I
G1
W1-I
L1
(I
A
)
V
1
(V
X
)
I
G2
W1-I
L2
(I
B
)
W1-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L2
(I
B
)
W2-I
L1
(I
A
)
Figure 3-1 CB Fa il
Voltage Inputs: n/a
Current Inputs: W1-IL1 (IA), W1-IL2 (IB), W1-IL3 (IC), IG1 or W2-IL1 (IA), W2-IL2 (IB), W2-IL3 (IC),
IG2
Disable:
Map Pickup LED: 50BF-n-n - Self Reset
The circuit breaker fail protection time delays are initiated either from:
A binary output mapped as Trip Contact in the OUTPUT CONFIG>BINARY OUTPUT C ONFIG me nu,
or
A binary input mapped as 50BF Ext Trip in the INPUT CONFIG>INPUT MATRIX menu.
Or
A binary input mapped as 50BF Mech Trip in the INPUT CONFIG>I NP UT MATRIX menu.
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 52 of 62
These elements are operated from W1 and W 2 current inputs, ensure that current is injected on the correct input
for the element being tested.
Apply a trip condition by injection of current to cause operation of a suitable protection element. Allow current to
continue after the trip at a level of 110% of the 50BF Setting current level on any phase. Measure the time for
operation of 50BF-1 Delay and 50BF-2 Delay. Repeat the sequence with the 50BF CB Faulty input energised and
ensure the 50BF-1 and 50BF-2 outputs operate without delay, by-passing the timer delay settings.
Repeat the sequence with current at 90% of the 50BF Setting current level after the element trip and check for no
CB Fail operation .
Repeat the sequence by injecting the current to I4 and using the 50BF-I4 Setting.
Setting (xIn)
Test Curre nt
50BF-1 Delay……………
50BF-2 Delay……………….
50BF-1
(110%)………….
(90%)…………...
No Operation □
No Operation □
50BF CB Faulty
Operation No Delay □
Operation No Delay □
50BF-1-I4
(110%)………….
(90%)…………...
No Operation □
No Operation □
50BF CB Faulty
Operation No Delay □
Operation No Delay □
50BF-2
(110%)………….
(90%)…………...
No Operation □
No Operation □
50BF CB Faulty
Operation No Delay □
Operation No Delay □
50BF-2-I4
(110%)………….
(90%)…………...
No Operation □
No Operation □
50BF CB Faulty
Operation No Delay □
Operation No Delay □
If the circuit breaker can also receive a trip signal from a protection function where there is no increase in current,
this trip input should be mapped to 50BF Mech Trip in the INPUT CONFIG>INPUT MATRIX me nu.
Initiate this binary input and simulate the circuit breaker remaining closed by ensuring the CB Closed binary Input
is energised and ensure operation of the 50BF-1 and 50BF-2 outputs after their programmed delays.
Mech Trip
50BF-1 Delay……………
50BF-2 Delay……………….
50BF-1
CB Close d
CB Open
No Operation □
No Operation □
50BF-2
CB Close d
CB Open
No Operation □
No Operation □
3.1.1.1 Element Blocking
The CB Fail function can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked.
Element
BI Inhibits
NOTES
50BF-1
50BF-2
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 53 of 62
3.2 Trip/Close Circuit Supervision (74TCS, 74CCS)
50G
(x2)
51G
(x4) 64H
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
74
TCS
(x6)
59N
(x2)
27
59
(x4)
81
(x6)
7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0
81
HBL2
81
HBL2
87HS 87BD
ICT
ICT
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
50N
(x2)
51N
(x2)
46
BC
(x2)
37 49
37 49
50N
50
BF-2
50
BF-2
46
NPS
51N
51
51
50
50
50G 51G 64H
81
HBL
2
81
HBL
2
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
Each function element
can be assigned to W1
or W2 CT inputs.
NOTE: The use of some
functions are mutually
exclusive
24
(x3)
37G
(x2)
50
BF-1
I4
37G
50
BF-2
I4
74
CCS
(x6)
46
BC
46
NPS
(x4)
81
HBL5
81
HBL2
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37 49
50
BF-2 5150 81
HBL2
81
HBL5
I
G1
W1-I
L1
(I
A
)
V
1
(V
X
)
I
G2
W1-I
L2
(I
B
)
W1-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L2
(I
B
)
W2-I
L1
(I
A
)
Figure 3-2 Trip Circuit Supervision
Voltage Inputs: n/a
Current Inputs: n/a
Disable:
Map Pickup LED: 74TCS-n/74CCS-n - Self Res et
The T/CCS-n Delay can be initiated by applying an inversion to the relevant status input and measured by
monitoring of the alarm output.
TCS-n Delay setting
Measured
CCS-n Delay setting
Measured
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 54 of 62
3.3 Magnetis ing Inrush Detector (81HBL2)
50G
(x2)
51G
(x4) 64H
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
74
TCS
(x6)
59N
(x2)
27
59
(x4)
81
(x6)
7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0
81
HBL2
81
HBL2
87HS 87BD
ICT
ICT
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
50N
(x2)
51N
(x2)
46
BC
(x2)
37 49
37 49
50N
50
BF-2
50
BF-2
46
NPS
51N
51
51
50
50
50G 51G 64H
81
HBL
2
81
HBL
2
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
Each function element
can be assigned to W1
or W2 CT inputs.
NOTE: The use of some
functions are mutually
exclusive
24
(x3)
37G
(x2)
50
BF-1
I4
37G
50
BF-2
I4
74
CCS
(x6)
46
BC
46
NPS
(x4)
81
HBL5
81
HBL2
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37 49
50
BF-2 5150 81
HBL2
81
HBL5
I
G1
W1-I
L1
(I
A
)
V
1
(V
X
)
I
G2
W1-I
L2
(I
B
)
W1-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L2
(I
B
)
W2-I
L1
(I
A
)
Figure 3-3 M agneti si ng Inrus h D etect or
Voltage Inputs: n/a
Current Inputs: W1-IL1 (IA), W1-IL2 (IB), W1-IL3 (IC), or W2-IL1 (IA), W2-IL2 (IB), W2-IL3 (IC)
Disable:
Map Pickup LED:
Logical operation of the harmonic blocking can be tested by injection of 2nd harmonic current (at 100Hz for 50Hz
relay) to cause operation of the blocking signals. Note that injection of any level of 2nd harmonic alone on a
current input will cause the block to be raised if the Cross or Phase blocking method is used since the harmonic
content on this input is 100%, i.e. greater than setting. Full wave rectified current contains mostly 2nd harmonic
and is the traditional method to generate it without advanced equipment.
If the Cross or Sum Blocking methods are used, fundamental frequency current can be injected into the other
winding simultaneously to operate protection elements if required to test the blocking operation. Care should be
taken that the thermal limits of the relay are not exceeded during these tests.
More advanced test equipment is required, with the facility to combine harmonic and fundamental frequencies of
current, to test the accuracy of setting for current level of the blocking element. Note that the 81HBL2 Setting is
set as a fraction of the total current. e.g. 0.25A at 100Hz combined with 1A at 50Hz gives a 2nd harmonic content
of 0.2 i.e. (0.25/(0.25+1.0)).
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 55 of 62
A compromise test can be made by the use of a diode to generate a half-wave rectified waveform from a
sinusoidal source. The half-wave rectified current will contain a combination of fundamental and harmonic
currents. The rectified waveform contains even harmonics higher than 2nd but the relationship between the 2nd
harmonic current content, the fundamental component and the total RMS current is as shown below. Note that
some protection elements can be set to operate on the RMS current or the Fundamental current and the applied
values are different when non-sinusoidal waveforms are applied. The Inrush Detector setting is based on the ratio
of 2nd harmoni c to fundam ental. This method is not suitable for use with constant current generating test sets such
as modern digital equipment.
Full Sine
RMS
Rectified RMS
Current
Fundamental
component
2nd Harmonic
component
2nd/Fundamental
Half Wave Rectif ied
1.0
0.5
0.5
0.212
0.424
Assuming that the Gn 81HBL2 Setting is less than 40%, inject half-wave rectified current at an RMS or
Fundamental component level above the element setting to prove that the block is applied and the element is
stable. Care should be taken that the thermal limits of the relay are not exceeded during these tests.
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 56 of 62
3.4 Overfluxing Detector (81HBL5)
50G
(x2)
51G
(x4) 64H
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
74
TCS
(x6)
59N
(x2)
27
59
(x4)
81
(x6)
7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0
81
HBL2
81
HBL2
87HS 87BD
ICT
ICT
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
50N
(x2)
51N
(x2)
46
BC
(x2)
37 49
37 49
50N
50
BF-2
50
BF-2
46
NPS
51N
51
51
50
50
50G 51G 64H
81
HBL
2
81
HBL
2
81
HBL5
81
HBL5
Each function element
can be assigned to W1
or W2 CT inputs.
NOTE: The use of some
functions are mutually
exclusive
24
(x3)
37G
(x2)
50
BF-1
I4
37G
50
BF-2
I4
74
CCS
(x6)
46
BC
46
NPS
(x4)
81
HBL5
81
HBL2
37
(x2) 49
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
50
BF-1
37 49
50
BF-2 5150 81
HBL2
81
HBL5
I
G1
W1-I
L1
(I
A
)
V
1
(V
X
)
I
G2
W1-I
L2
(I
B
)
W1-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L3
(I
C
)
W2-I
L2
(I
B
)
W2-I
L1
(I
A
)
Figure 3-4 M agneti si ng Inrus h D etect or
Voltage Inputs: n/a
Current Inputs: W1-IL1 (IA), W1-IL2 (IB), W1-IL3 (IC), or W2-IL1 (IA), W2-IL2 (IB), W2-IL3 (IC)
Disable:
Map Pickup LED:
Logical operation of the harmonic blocking can be tested by injection of 5th harmonic current (at 250Hz for 50Hz
relay) to cause operation of the blocking signals. Note that injection of any level of 5th harmonic alone on a
current input will cause the block to be raised since the harmonic content on this input is 100%, i.e. greater th an
setting.
Fundamental frequency current can be injected into the other winding simultaneously to operate the 87BD or
87HS protection elements if required to test the blocking operation. Care should be taken that the thermal limits of
the relay are not exceeded during these tests.
More advanced test equipment is required, with the facility to combine harmonic and fundamental frequencies of
current, to test the level of the blocking element. Note that the 81HBL5 Setting is set as a fraction of the total
current. e.g. 0.25A at 250Hz combined with 1A at 50Hz gives a 5th harmonic content of 0.2 i.e. (0.25/(0.25+1.0)).
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 57 of 62
Section 4: Control & Logic Functions
4.1 Quick Logic
If this functionality is used, the logic equations may interfere with testing of other protection functi ons in t he rel ay.
The function of the Quick Logic equations should be tested conjunctively with connected plant or by simulation to
assess suitability and check for correct operation on an individual basis with tests specifically devised to suit the
particular application.
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 58 of 62
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 59 of 62
Section 5: Test ing and Maintenance
7SR24 relays are maintenance free, with no user serviceable parts.
5.1 Periodic Tests
During the life of the relay, it should be checked for operation during the normal maintenance period for the site
on which the product is installed. It is recommended the following tests are carried out:-
1. Visual inspection of the metering display
2. Operation of output contacts
3. Secondary injection of each element
5.2 Maintenance
Relay failure will be indicated by the ‘Protection Healthy’ LED being off or flashing. A message may also be
displayed on the LCD. In the event of failure Siemens Protection Devices Ltd. (or the nearest Siemens office)
should be contacted.
The relay should be returned as a complete unit. No attempt should be made to dismantle the unit to isolate and
return only the damaged sub-assembly. It may however be convenient to fit the withdrawable relay to the outer
case from a spare relay, to avoid the disturbance of relay panel wiring, for return to Siemens Protection Devices
Ltd. The withdrawable relay should never be transported without the protection of the outer case.
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 60 of 62
5.3 Troubleshooting
Table 5-1 Troubleshooting Guide
Observation
Action
Relay does not power up. Check that the correct auxiliary DC voltage is applied and that the
polarity is correct.
Relay won’t accept the password. The Password being entered is wrong. Enter correct password.
If correct password has been forgotten, note down the Numeric
Code which is displayed at the Change Password screen e.g.
To retrieve the password, communicate this code to a Siemens
Protection Devices Ltd. representative.
Protection Healthy LED flashes General failure. Contact a Siemens Protection Devices Ltd.
representative.
LCD screen flashes continuously. The LCD has many possible error messages which when
displayed will flash continuously. These indicate various processor
card faults.
General failure. Cont act a Siemens Protection Devices Ltd.
representative.
Backlight is on but no text can be seen. Adjust the contrast.
Scrolling text messages are unreadable. Adjust the contrast.
Relay displays one instrument after
another with no user intervention. This is normal operatio n, default instruments are enabled.
Remove all instruments from the default list and only add those
that are required.
(See Section 2: Settings and Instruments).
Cannot communi cate w ith the r elay . Check that all of the communications settings match those used
by ReyDisp Evolution.
Check that the Tx and Rx fibre-optic cables are connected
correctly. ( Tx > Rx and Rx > Tx ).
Check that all cables, modems and fibre-optic cabl es wor k
correctly.
Ensure that IEC 60870-5-103 is specified for the connec ted p or t
(COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4).
Relays will not communicate in a ring
network. Check that the Data Echo setting on all relays is set to ON.
Check that all relays are powered up.
Check that all relays have unique addresses.
Status inputs do not work. Check that the correct DC voltage is applied and that the polarity
is correct.
Check that the status input settings such as the pick-up and drop-
off timers and the status inversion function are correctly set.
Relay instrument displays show small
currents or volta ges even though the
system is dead.
This is normal. The relay is displaying calculation noise. This will
not affect any accuracy claims for the relay.
If the above checklist does not help in correcting the problem please contact the local Siemens office or contact
PTD 24hr Customer Support,
Tel: +49 180 5247000,
Fax: +49 180 524 2471,
e-mail: support.e ner gy @si em e ns.c om.
Change password
= 1234567
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 61 of 62
Section 6: Rel ay Software Upgrade Instructions
6.1 General
Please read thoroughly all of the instructions supplied with the firmware upgrade before starting the download
process.
If you are loading firmware into a product that is already installed on site then follow the instructions in
section 2, 3 and 4.
Otherwise skip directly to section 3 to load firmware into the device.
6.2 Replac ing firmware on a product install ed on site
6.2.1 Identify Which Software Is Currently Loaded
With the relay connected to a suitable DC supply. Press CANCEL several times to ensure that you are at the root
of the menu system. The relay will typically display the relay model name or circuit name.
On newer relay models press CANCEL and TEST to bring up the
menu. While still pressing TEST release the other keys. On older relay models press and hold CANCEL, press
and hold TEST, press and hold ENTER then
should appear. While still pressing ENTER release the other keys. Navigate to the software information screen
using the TEST/RESET-> button.
The following typical information uniquely identifies a particular relay model. (Older relay models may only display
a subset of this information).
6.2.2 Overall Software Information
Software Art No
This is the application software code used which may common to many relay variants.
Build Date
This is the date when the software was compiled.
Build Time
This is time when the software was compiled.
Code CRC
This is the CRC check code of the software code.
Boot Block Art No
This is the boot block software code responsible for loading in new application software
code.
6.2.3 Product Configuration Information
Product Art No
This is the Products unique configuration article number.
Product Name
This is the Products unique m odel name.
Release Date
This is the date when this particular configuration was released.
Release Time
This is the time when this particular configuration was released.
"Build Versio n --> to view"
SOFTWARE VERSION
Chapter 6) 7SR242 Duobias Commissioning & Maintenance Guide
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 62 of 62
6.2.4 Things To Do Before Loading New Firmware/Software
Ensure that a secure copy of relay settings is available as all settings will be lost during the code upload process.
A hard copy is useful for checking purposes. It is usually possible to download the existing settings into Reydisp
Evolution, save the file and then reload these settings into the relay following the upgrade. Reydisp will highlight
any changes that it cannot automatically resolve for you to manually correct when re-installing t he s ettings..
If the relay is in service then it is advisable to remove any TRIP LINKS to prevent in-advertent mal-operation due
to incorrect sett ing s being app l ied.
The attachments are password protected self extracting zip files to prevent email systems discarding them or
modifying them which should be saved with the "EX" extension renamed to be "EXE". The password that is
applied to this zip file is "REYROLLE" in capital letters.
6.2.5 Loading Firmware using front USB port
New firmware/software may be loaded via the USB port on the front Fascia.
Check compatibility of software before starting the procedure. The relay will not accept firmware/software for
which the MLFB ordering code is not supported.
Installation instructions are provided with the upgrade firmware and should be studied before the procedure is
attempted..
A USB connection between a PC and the relay front port is required.
The process may take several minutes to complete at which time the relay will restart.
Please make note of any warning or error messages that appear on the Reyfresh terminal window as the relay
restarts.
6.2.6 Solving Software Upload Problems
The relay will auto detect the download baud rate and will use whatever baud rate set within Reyfresh. However
the default and maximum baud rate of 460800 bits/sec is preferred
The download procedure requires a PC running Windows XP (Service Pack 3), Windows Vista or Windows 7.
When the relay restarts, messages appear on the LCD to confirm the number of I/O modules fitted, please press
the ENTER key when requested if the details displayed are corre ct.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 1 of 64
7SR242 Duobias
Multi-Function 2-Winding Transformer Protection Relay
Applic ati ons Guide
Document Release History
This document is is sue 2017/08. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is:
2017/08
Software revision2662H85001 R8c-7d
2015/11 Text revisions to sections 2.2 and 6.6. Drawing revisions to Fig. 2-4, Fig. 6-7, Fig. 6-8 and Fig. 6-9.
References to IEC61869-2 added.
2014/04 Revision to section 6.6
2013/01 Software revision 2662H85001 R7c-7b
2012/08 Addition of optional IEC 61850 communication protocol and Ethernet Interface.
2010/06 Revisions to trip/close circuit supervision diagrams
2010/02 Document reformat due to rebrand
2010/02 Third issue. Software revision 2662H80001 R4c-3
2008/07 Second issue. Software revision 2662H80001R3d-2c.
2008/05 First issue
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 2 of 64
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 3 of 64
Contents
Document Release History .................................................................................................................... 1
Contents .................................................................................................................................................. 3
Sectio n 1: Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 7
Sectio n 2: Protection Functions ........................................................................................................... 9
2.1 Overall Differential Protection (87) ............................................................................................ 9
2.1.1 ICT Settings for Current Magnitude Balance ............................................................. 10
2.1.2 ICT Settings for Vector Group Correction .................................................................. 10
Interposing CT Selection Guide .............................................................................................. 11
2.1.3 Biased Differential (87BD) Settings ........................................................................... 12
2.1.4 Differential Highset (87HS) Settings .......................................................................... 14
2.1.5 Example 1 New Installation (90MVA Yd11 Transformer) ....................................... 15
Summary of Required Settings ............................................................................................... 17
2.1.6 Example 2 Relay Replacement (Dyn1 Transformer) Using Existing CTs .............. 22
Summary of Protection Settings ............................................................................................. 24
2.2 Instantaneous OC/EF (50/50G/50N) ...................................................................................... 25
2.3 Time Delayed OC/EF (51/51G/51N) ....................................................................................... 25
2.3.1 Selection of Over-current Characteristics .................................................................. 25
2.3.2 Reset Delay ................................................................................................................ 27
2.4 High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault (64H) ........................................................................ 28
2.4.2 Establishing the Required Stabilising Resistor Value ................................................ 30
2.4.3 Limiting Circuit Over-Voltages (Metrosils) .................................................................. 30
2.5 Open Circuit (46BC) ................................................................................................................ 32
2.6 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46NPS) .................................................................. 32
2.7 Undercurrent (37) .................................................................................................................... 32
2.8 Thermal Overload (49) ............................................................................................................ 33
2.8.1 Settings Guidelines .................................................................................................... 33
2.9 Under/Over Voltage (27/59) .................................................................................................... 35
2.10 Neutral Overvoltage (59N) ...................................................................................................... 36
2.10.1 Applicat ion w ith Capacitor Cone Uni ts ....................................................................... 36
2.11 Under/Over Frequency (81) .................................................................................................... 37
2.12 Over Fluxing Protection (24) ................................................................................................... 38
Sectio n 3: CT Requirements ............................................................................................................... 39
3.1 CT Requirement for Differential Protection ............................................................................. 39
3.2 CT Requirements for High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault (64H) ..................................... 40
Sectio n 4: Control Functions .............................................................................................................. 41
4.1 User Defined Logic ................................................................................................................. 41
4.1.1 Auto-Changeover Scheme Example .......................................................................... 41
Sectio n 5: Supervision Functions ...................................................................................................... 43
5.1 Inrush Detector (81HBL2) ....................................................................................................... 43
5.2 Overfluxing Detector (81HBL5) ............................................................................................... 44
5.3 Circuit Breaker Fail (50BF) ..................................................................................................... 45
Example of Required Settings (e.g. HV CB) ........................................................................... 46
5.4 Trip Circuit Supervision (74TCS) ............................................................................................ 47
5.4.1 Trip Circuit Supervision Connections ......................................................................... 47
5.4.2 Close Circuit Supervision Connections ...................................................................... 49
Sectio n 6: Application Considerations and Examples ..................................................................... 51
6.1 The Effects of An In Zone Earthing Transformer .................................................................... 51
6.2 Protection of Star/Star Transformer With Tertiary Winding .................................................... 53
6.3 Transformer with Primary Connections Crossed on Both Windings....................................... 54
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 4 of 64
6.4 Transformer with Primary Connections Crossed on One Winding ......................................... 56
6.5 Protection of Auto Transformers ............................................................................................. 57
6.6 Reactor, Motor and Connections Protection ........................................................................... 58
Sectio n 7: Commo n F un ctions ........................................................................................................... 59
7.1 Multiple Settings Groups ......................................................................................................... 59
7.2 Binary Inputs ........................................................................................................................... 60
7.3 Binary Outputs ........................................................................................................................ 63
7.4 LEDs ....................................................................................................................................... 63
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 5 of 64
List of Figures
Figure 2-1 Procedure for calculating Overall Differential Protection Settings .......................................... 9
Figure 2-2: 87BD Characteristic ............................................................................................................. 12
Fig. 2-3: Differential Highset Characteristic ............................................................................................ 14
Fig. 2-4 New Transformer Application .................................................................................................... 15
Figure 2-5: AC Connections - Example 1 ............................................................................................... 15
Figure 2-6 ICT Settings Example 1 ..................................................................................................... 16
Figure 2-7: Relay Currents - Star Winding Internal Earth ...................................................................... 18
Figure 2-8: Relay Currents - Star Winding Internal Phase Fault ............................................................ 19
Figure 2-9: Relay Currents - Delta Winding Internal Earth Fault ........................................................... 20
Figure 2-10: Relay Currents - Delta Winding Internal Phase Fault ........................................................ 20
Figure 2-11 Rela y Replac e ment ............................................................................................................. 22
Figure 2-12: AC Con necti o ns - Example 2 ............................................................................................. 22
Figure 2-13 Summary of ICT Settings .................................................................................................... 23
Figure 2-14 IEC NI Curve with Time Multiplier and Follower DTL Applied ............................................ 26
Figure 2-15 IEC NI Curve with Minimum Operate Time Setting Applied .............................................. 26
Figure 2-16 Overcurrent Reset Characteristics ...................................................................................... 27
Figure 2-17: REF Protection Applied to a Delta/Star Transformer ......................................................... 28
Figure 2-18: AC Con necti o ns : REF ........................................................................................................ 28
Figure 2-19 Thermal Overload Settings ................................................................................................. 34
Figure 2-20 NVD Appl icat io n .................................................................................................................. 36
Figure 2-21 NVD Prot ec tio n Connec tions .............................................................................................. 36
Figure 2-22 Load Shedding Scheme Using Under-Frequency Elements .............................................. 37
Figure 3-1 CT Requirements .................................................................................................................. 40
Figure 4-1 Example Use of Quick Logic ................................................................................................. 41
Figure 5-1 - Circuit Breaker Fail ............................................................................................................. 45
Figure 5-2 - Single Stage Circuit Breaker Fail Timing ............................................................................ 45
Figure 5-3 - Two Stage Circuit Breaker Fail Timing ............................................................................... 46
Figure 5-4: Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme 1 (H5) ............................................................................ 47
Figure 5-5: Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme 2 (H6) ............................................................................ 48
Figure 5-6: Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme 3 (H7) ............................................................................ 48
Figure 5-7 Close Circuit Supervision Scheme .................................................................................... 49
Figure 6-1: Relay Currents External Earth Fault with In Zone Earthing Transformer ......................... 51
Figure 6-2: Rel a y Currents External Earth Fault with In Zone Earthing Transformer ......................... 52
Figure 6-3 7SR24 Applied to Yd Transformer with an In Zone Earthing Transformer ........................... 52
Figure 6-4: Protection of Star/Star Transformer with Tertiary ................................................................ 53
Figure 6-5 AC Con nec ti o ns : Yd9, 900 Transformer Non-standar d Secon dary
Connections ....................................................................................................................... 54
Fig. 6-6 AC Connections: Yd9, 900 Transformer Standard Secon dary Connecti o ns ......................... 55
Fig. 6-7 Dyn11 Transformer with Reverse Phase Notation ................................................................... 56
Fig. 6-8: AC Connections for Auto-Transformer Overall Protection ....................................................... 57
Fig. 6-9: AC Connections for Auto-Transformer Overall and REF Protection ....................................... 57
Fig. 6-10 AC Connections for Reactor and Connections Protection ...................................................... 58
Figure 7-1 Example Use of Alternative Settings Groups .................................................................... 59
Figure 7-2 Example of Transformer Alarm and Trip Wiring ................................................................... 60
Figure 7-3 Binary Input Configurations Providing Compliance with EATS 48-4 Classes
ESI 1 and ESI 2 ................................................................................................................. 62
List of Tables
Table 2-1 The Effect of ICT Selection on Protection Settings ................................................................ 21
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 6 of 64
Nomenclature
IF = Fault curr ent corresponding to the rated stability limit (primary Amps)
IFint = Maximum prospective internal fault current (primary Amps)
IMAG = Secondary magnetising (exciting) current of current transformer at Vs volts.
INLR = Non-linear resistor (Metrosil) current.
Is = Relay setting current
P.O.C. = Primary operate current (fault setting)
RCT = Resistance of CT secondary winding.
RL = Resistance of CT connection leads
Rstab = Resistance of stabilising resistor
T = Turns ratio of all current transformers (Primary turns / Secondary turns)
VFint = Maximum secondary internal fault voltage
Vk = Kneepoint voltage of the CT
Vs = Relay circuit setting voltage
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 7 of 64
Section 1: Introduction
The 7SR242 relay can be used to provide comprehensive protection for two winding or auto-transformers power
transformers. The relay can also be used to provide differential protection for motors and reactors etc.
Basic functionality includes overall differential protection and two restricted earth fault (REF) protections i.e. REF
protection for each transformer winding.
Optional current based and voltage based functionality can be used to provide integrated, comprehensive
transformer protection.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 8 of 64
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 9 of 64
Section 2: Prot ection Functions
This section provides guidance on the application and recommended settings of the 7SR24 protection functions.
2.1 Overall Di fferential Pr otection (87)
This section covers the transformer overall differential protections the biased differential and high-set di ff e r ent i al
elements. Transformer design limitations necessitate that the protection CTs are located on the line side of the
HV and LV windings, therefore the zone of differential pr ote ct ion cov ers both transformer w inding s.
IW1 IW2
W1 W2
The application of differential protection to transformers is complicated by:
The current magnitude change introduced by the transformer HV/LV turns ratio. The current ratio may also
be variable due to the presence of an On-Load-Tap-Changer (OLTC).
The transformer connections which may introduce a phase change between the currents flowing into each
winding of the tr an sfor mer.
Magnetising inrush current which flows in only one winding of the transformer when energised.
Generally the procedure to calculate relay settings is carried out in the following order:
Establish System Parameters
Transformer rated power
Transformer impedance
Transformer rated voltage
Winding Connections
Transformer OLTC range
HV CT ratio
LV CT ratio
Establish Required Protection Settings
87BD
87HS
Calculate ICT Settings
ICT Multiplier
ICT vectors
Calculate Required Relay Settings
87BD Initial
87 Bias Slope 1
Figure 2-1 Procedure for calculating Overall Differential Protection Settings
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 10 of 64
2.1.1 ICT Settings for Current Magnitude Balance
Internal current multipliers are used to adjust the CT secondary currents to accommodate for any mismatch
between the winding 1 and winding 2 CT ratios.
For load or through fault conditions the output of the ICT Multiplier for each winding must be equal,
notwithstanding variations in the OLTC position. W here possible the output of each ICT Multiplier is set to 1A at
transformer full load rating when the transformer OLTC is on its mid-tap position. At mid-tap a balanced relay
should have virtually no differential currents, the bias currents will vary with the load level.
Balancing ICT Multiplier outputs (ICTOUT) to 1A at transformer rating ensures that the relay operates at the levels
indicated by its differential protection settings. However achieving balance at ICTOUT = 1 is not always possible;
here the effects on settings must be taken into account. The effect of applying ICTOUT < 1 is to de-sensitise
current dependent differential settings, applying ICTOUT > 1 makes the effected elements more sensitive. To
compensate for the resultant ICTOUT value the following settings must be multiplied by ICTOUT:
87HS Setting
87BD Initial
87BD 1st Bias Slope Limit
See examples in sections 0 and 2.1.6.
2.1.2 ICT Settings for Vector Group Correction
Internal interposing current transformers are used to correct the CT secondary current phase relat ions hips i n lin e
with any phase change introduced by the transformer connections.
As a general rule, the phase angle ICT Connection setting to correct the phase angle difference is applied to the
star side winding. A table showing the settings to apply for all standard transformer vector groups is included on
the following page. The table assumes that all line CTs are ‘star’ connected.
Note that the choice of interposing CT vector group will modify the effective operating levels of the protection due
to the current distribution for the various fault conditions the effects on settings must be taken into account - see
section 2.1.5.1.
Settings examples included in section 6 cover selected non-standard connection arrangements e.g. where the
primary connections within the protected zone are crossed.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 11 of 64
Interposing CT Selection Guide
Power Transformer Vector Group HV Interposing
CT Selection
LV Interposing CT
Selection
Yy0, YNy0, Yyn0, YNyn0, Ydy0, Yndy0, Ydyn0, Yndyn0, Dz0
Ydy0,0°
Ydy0,0°
Yd1, YNd1
Yd1,-30°
Yy0,0°
Yd1, YNd1 + Earthing Transformer
Yd1,-30°
Ydy0,0°
Yy2, YNy2, Yyn2 YNyn2, Ydy2, YNdy2, Ydyn2, Yndyn2, Dz2
Ydy2,-60°
Ydy0,0°
Yd3, YNd3
Yd3,-90°
Yy0,0°
Yd3, YNd3 + Earthing Transformer
Yd3,-90°
Ydy0,0°
Yy4, YNy4, Yyn4, YNyn4, Ydy4, YNdy4, Ydyn4, Yndyn4, Dz4
Ydy4,-120°
Ydy0,0°
Yd5, YNd5
Yd5,-150°
Yy0,0°
Yd5, YNd5 + Earthing Transformer
Yd5,-150°
Ydy0,0°
Yy6, YNy6, Yyn6, YNyn6, Ydy6, YNdy6, Ydyn6, Yndyn6, Dz6
Ydy6,180°
Ydy0,0°
Yd7, YNd7
Yd7,150°
Yy0,0°
Yd7, YNd7 + Earthing Transformer
Yd7,150°
Ydy0,0°
Yy8, YNy8, Yyn8, YNyn8, Ydy8, YNdy8, Ydyn8, Yndyn8, Dz8
Ydy8,120°
Ydy0,0°
Yd9, YNd9
Yd9,90°
Yy0,0°
Yd9, YNd9 + Earthing Transformer
Yd9,90°
Ydy0,0°
Yy10, Yny10, Yyn10, YNyn10, Ydy10, YNdy10, Ydyn10, Yndyn10,
Dz10
Ydy10,60° Ydy0,0°
Yd11, Ynd11
Yd11,30°
Yy0,0°
Yd11, Ynd11 + Earthing Transformer
Yd11,30°
Ydy0,0°
Dy1, Dyn1
Yy0,0°
Yd11,30°
Dy1, Dyn1 + Earthing Transformer
Ydy0,0°
Yd11,30°
Dy3, Dyn3
Yy0,0°
Yd9,90°
Dy3, Dyn3 + Earthing Transformer
Ydy0,0°
Yd9,90°
Dy5, Dyn5
Yy0,0°
Yd7,150°
Dy5, Dyn5 + Earthing Transformer
Ydy0,0°
Yd7,150°
Dy7, Dyn7
Yy0,0°
Yd5,-150°
Dy7, Dyn7 + Earthing Transformer
Ydy0,0°
Yd5,-150°
Dy9, Dyn9
Yy0,0°
Yd3,-90°
Dy9, Dyn9 + Earthing Transformer
Ydy0,0°
Yd3,-90°
Dy11, Dyn11
Yy0,0°
Yd1,-30°
Dy11, Dyn11 + Earthing Transformer
Ydy0,0°
Yd1,-30°
1. Y or y denotes an unearthed star connection on the HV or LV side of the transformer.
2. YN or yn denotes an earthed star connection on the HV or LV side of the transformer.
3. D or d denotes a delta connection on the HV or LV side of the transformer respectively.
4. Z or z denotes a zigzag connection of the HV or LV side of the transformer respectively
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 12 of 64
2.1.3 Biased Differential (87BD) Settings
The 87BD elements provide differential protection for phase and earth faults. The limiting factors for protection
sensitivity are dictated by the need to ensure protection stability during load or through fault conditions.
Magnitude restraint bias is used to ensure the relay is stable when the transformer is carrying load current and
during the passage of external (out of zone) fault current. As the bias current increases the differential current
required for operation increases.
Harmonic bias is used to prevent relay operation during magnetising inrush current into one winding when the
transformer is first energised.
87BD Initial
Setting 1
st
Bias
Slope
Limit
Bias (Restraint) Current
2II
W2W1
+
87BD 1
st
Bias Slope
Operate Current
2nd Bias Slope
2nd Bias
Slope Type
W2
W1
I
I+
I
W1
I
W2
Figure 2-2: 87BD Characteristic
87BD Initial Setting (0.1 to 2.0 x In)
This setting is selected to ensure stability in the presence of CT and relay errors when low levels of bias current
are present i.e. low load levels.
This is the minimum level of differential current at which the relay will operate. Typically this setting is chosen to
match the on load tap-change range. For example if the tap change range is +10% to 20%, a setting of 0.3In is
selected.
87BD 1st Bias Slope Setting (0.0 to 0.7)
Steady state unbalance current will appear in the differential (operate) circuit of the relay due to the transformer
tap position, relay tolerance and to CT measurement errors. The differential current will increase with increasing
load or through fault current in the transformer so, to ensure stability, the differential current required for operation
increases with increasing bias current. The bias slope expresses the current to operate the relay relative to the
biasing (restraint) current.
The Bias slope setting chosen must be greater than the maximum unbalance, it is selected to ensure stability
when through fault or heavy load current flows in the transformer and the tap changer is in its extreme position.
The recommended setting is 1 x the tap change range. As the protection is optimised around the centre tap
position then using the total tap change range includes for a 100% safety margin, this provides contingency for
CT and relay tolerances. For example if the tap change range is +10 to –20%, the overall range is 30% so a 0.3x
setting is ch o sen .
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 13 of 64
87BD 1st Bias Slope Limit Setting (1 to 20 x In)
Above this setting the ratio of differential current to bias current required for operation is increased.
When a through fault occurs, saturation of one or more CTs may cause a transient differential current to be
detected by the relay. The bias slope limit is chosen to ensure the biased differential function is stable for high
through fault currents coincident with CT saturation. This setting defines the upper limit of the bias slope and is
expressed in multiples of nominal rated current i.e. the lower the setting the more stable the protection.
The three phase through fault current can be estimated from the transformer impedance. For a typical grid
transformer having a 15% impedance, the maximum through fault will be 1/0.15 = 6.66 x rating. A setting val ue is
chosen that introduces the extra bias at half of the three phase through fault current level of the transformer, so
6.66/2 = 3.33 and a setting of 3 would be selected as the ne ar est low er setting available.
87BD 2nd Bias Slope Type (Line, Curve)
87BD 2nd Bias Slope Setting (1.0 to 2.0 applied to ‘Line’ only)
These settings are chosen to ensure the biased differential function is stable for high through fault currents
coincident with CT saturation.
87BD Inrush Action
Harmonic bias is used to prevent relay operation during magnetising inrush current into one winding when the
transformer is first energised.
The recommended setting is ENABLED - see section 5.1.
87BD Overfluxing Action
This setting can be used to prevent operation of the 87BD elements in the presence of allowable over-fluxing
conditions - see section 5.2.
87BD Time Delay Setting
A 5ms setting is recommended where the circuit is cabled to ensure stability during resonant conditions.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 14 of 64
2.1.4 Differential Highset (87HS) Settings
The element operates on the differential current measured by the relay.
The 87HS element is generally applied as an unrestrained differential element to provide fast tripping for heavy
internal faults.
87HS Delay
Operate Time
87HS
I
W1
I
W2
W1 W2
W2W1
II +
Operate Current
87HS Setting
Fig. 2-3: Differential Highset Characteristic
87HS Setting (1 to 30 x In)
The 87HS element is set as low as possible but not less than the maximum three phase through fault current and
not less than half the peak magnetizing inrush current.
For almost all applications a setting of 7 or 8 x In has shown to be sufficiently sensitive for internal faults as well
as providing stability during external faults and transient system conditions.
A Differential Highset Setting of 7 x In will be stable for a peak magnetizing inrush levels of 14 x rated current.
Smaller transformers generally will have lower impedance and therefore greater three phase through fault levels
and magnetizing inrush currents. A setting of 8 x can be used as CT saturation is reduced as system X/R is
usually very low and the peak level of magnetising current does not usually ever exceed 16 x rating.
87HS Delay Setting
A 5ms setting is recommended to compensate for transient overreach.
87HS Inrush Action
87HS Overfluxing Action
These functions are set to ‘Disabled’ unless specifically required by the application.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 15 of 64
2.1.5 Example 1 New Installation (90MVA Yd11 Transfor m er )
Yd
90MVA, Z = 14%, Yd11,
132/33kV +10% to -20% (turns)
+10% Turns
TP31
TP11
TP1
-20% Turns
HV LV
Tap
Changer
Connections
A
BC
a
c
b
Fig. 2-4 New Transformer Application
W1/W2
Yd11 (30o)
1718
12
56
910
1413 IG1
21
65
109
W1 IL1
W1 IL2
W1 IL3
A
1718 IG2
12
56
910
W2 IL1
W2 IL2
W2 IL3
A
B
NOTES
CTs shown wired to 1A relay inputs
REF protection shown on Star winding
RSTAB = REF Series Stabilising resistor
NLR = REF Non-linear (voltage limiting) resistor
RSTAB
NLR
Figure 2-5: AC Connections - Example 1
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 16 of 64
Step 1 Selection of Line CT Ratios
CTs with a secondary rating of 1A are preferred as the burden imposed on the CT by the secondary wiring is
reduced in comparison with a 5A rated secondary.
HV load current =
393.6A
132,00031090
6
=
×
×
CT ratio = 40 0/1A is selected.
LV load current =
1500A
1.0533,00031090
6
=
××
×
CT ratio = 1600/1A is selected.
Note, the 1.05 factor relates to the tap changer at mid-tap position.
Step 2 Selection of ICT Multiplier Settings
The outputs of the interposing CTs (ICTOUT) mus t be balanced for system healthy conditions - where possible the
balance is set at 1.00A at tran sfor mer rated curr e nt/m id-tap position.
HV Secondary current =
0.98A
400
393.6 =
HV ICT Multiplier = 1/0.98 = 1.02
LV Secondary current =
0.94A
1600
1500 =
LV ICT Multiplier = 1/0.94 = 1.06
Y d
X1.02
400/1 393.6A
0.98A
1600/1
1500A
X1.06
0.94A
0.98
Yy0Yd11
W1: 1A
1.00 1.00
0.94
W2: 1A
90MVA, Z = 14%, Yd11, 132/33kV +10% to -20%
(At mid-tap 132/34.65kV)
W1 ICT
OUT
= 1.00
Terminals
ICT Multiplier
ICT Connection
W1
Bias W2
Bias
Operate
W2 ICT
OUT
= 1.00
Figure 2-6 ICT SettingsExample 1
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 17 of 64
Summary of Required Settings
CT/VT CONFIG >
W1 Phase Input 1A
W1 Phase CT Ratio 400:1
W2 Phase Input 1A
W2 Phase CT Ratio 1600:1
FUNCTION CONFIG>
Gn Differential Enabled
Gn Inrush Detector Enabled
DIFFERENTIAL PROT’N >
Gn W1 ICT Multiplier 1.02
Gn W1 ICT Connection Yd11
Gn W2 ICT Multiplier 1.06
Gn W2 ICT Connection Yy0
(Note that the above settings produce ICTOUT = 1.00)
DIFFERENTIAL PROT’N > 87BD >
Gn 87 BD Element Enabled
Gn 87BD Initial: 0.3 x In (0.3 x ICTOUT )
Gn 87BD 1st Bias Slope: 0.3x (OLTC = +10% to -20%)
Gn 87BD 1st Bias Slope Limit: 4 x In (1/0.14 x 0.5 = 3.6 x ICTOUT)
Gn 87BD 2nd Bias Slope Type: Line (Default value)
Gn 87BD 2nd Bias Slope: 1.5x (Default value)
Gn 87BD Delay: 0.005s
Gn 87BD Inrush Action: Inhibit
Gn 87BD Overfluxing Action: Off
DIFFERENTIAL PROT’N > 87HS >
Gn 87HS Element Enabled
Gn 87HS Setting: 8 x In (> I3PH THRU FAULT i.e. 1/0.14 = 7.14 x ICTOUT)
Gn 87HS Delay: 0.005s
Gn 87HS Inrush Action: Off
Gn 87HS Overfluxing Action: Off
SUPERVISION > INRUSH DETECTOR >
Gn81HBL2 Element Enabled
Gn 81HBL2 Bias Cross (Default value)
Gn 81HBL2 Setting 0.2 x I (Default value)
OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX>
87BD BOn, Ln
87HS BOn, Ln
OUTPUT CONFIG>BINARY OUTPUT CONFIG>
CB1 Trip Contacts BOn
CB2 Trip Contacts BOn
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 18 of 64
2.1.5.1 Example 1 Further Analysis
Having established settings to ensure stability under load, transient and external fault conditions the following
considers the operating levels for internal faults. The ‘fault setting’ for internal fault conditions is affected by the
ICT Multiplier and ICT Connection settings applied:
W1 Internal Earth Fault
x 1.02
B
B
x 1.06
O O
OO
ICT Multiplier
ICT Connection
87HS
87T
A-E Fault
1.00 1.00
0.589
Yd11 (30o)
0.589
Yy0 (0o)
ABC
Yd11 (30o)
1.02 1.02
Figure 2-7: Relay Currents - Star Winding Internal Earth
Notes
A- E fault causes current to flow in the A and C elements
The Yd ICT connection reduces current flow by a factor of 1/√3
Relay may indicate A and C faults
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 19 of 64
W1 Internal Phase-Phase Fault
x 1.02
B
B
B
OO O
OOO
ICT Multiplier
ICT Connection
87HS
87T
1
1
1.00 1.00
B-C Fault
0.589
0.589
1.178
x 1.06
Yy0 (0
o
)
Yd11 (30
o
)
ABC
Yd11 (30
o
)
1.02 1.02
Figure 2-8: Relay Currents - Star Winding Internal Phase Fault
Notes
B - C fault causes current to flow in the A, B and C elements
The Yd ICT connection causes a 1:2:1 current distribution and introduces a 1/√3 multiplying factor.
Relay may indicate three phase fault
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 20 of 64
W2 Internal Earth Fault
x 1.02
B
x 1.06
O
O
ICT Multiplier
ICT Connection
87HS
87T
A-E Fault
1.00 1.00
1.07
1.07
Yy0 (0
o
)
1.07 1.07
Yd11 (30
o
)
ABC
Yd11 (30
o
)
Figure 2-9: Relay Currents - Delta Winding Internal Earth Fault
W2 Internal Phase-Phase Fault
x 1.02
B
B
OO
OO
ICT Multiplier
ICT Connection
87HS
87T
1.00 1.00
B-C Fault
x 1.06
Yy0 (0
o
)
1.07 1.07
1.07
1.07
Yd11 (30
o
)
ABC
Yd11 (30
o
)
Figure 2-10: Relay Currents - Delta Winding Internal Phase Fault
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 21 of 64
Table 2-1 summarises the implications of using Yd or Yy interposing CTs.
Table 2-1 The Effect of ICT Selection on Protection Settings
CT
Secondary
Current
HV
( ICT: Yd11, x 1.02)
W1 ICTOUT =
LV
( ICT: Yy0, x 1.06)
W2 ICTOUT =
3-Phase
A = 1A
B = 1A
C = 1A
A = 1.02A
B = 1.02A
C = 1.02A
A = 1.06A
B = 1.06A
C = 1.06A
B – C
A = 0
B = 1A
C = 1A
A = 0.589A
B = 1.17 8A
C = 0.589A
A = 0
B = 1.06A
C = 1.06A
A – E
A = 1A
B = 0
C = 0
A = 0.589A
B = 0
C = 0.589A
A = 1.06A
B = 0
C = 0
The above analysis covers current distributions for internal faults. The table illustrates that the Yd ICT has the
effect of:
Modifying the amplitude of the ICTOUT currents
Changing curren t distribution
The above factors must be consid ered duri ng any analysis of protection operations and indications.
A similar analysis can be carried for external (through) fault conditions. However as the protection settings already
ensured stability for the maximum through fault condition (3-phase fault ) this is not nec es sar y .
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 22 of 64
2.1.6 Example 2 Relay Replacement (Dyn1 Transformer) Using Existing CTs
D y
300/1A 560/0.577A
45MVA, Z = 10%, Dyn1, 132/33kV +5% to -15%
Figure 2-11 Relay Replacement
It is recommended to wire all line CTs in star when connecting to the 7SR24 relay. Where the 7SR24 is used to
replace an older biased differential relay the existing CTs will often be re-used. In this example it is recommended
that the existing LV line CTs connected in ‘delta’ are reconnected as ‘star’.
Usually the interposing CTs associated with older schemes can be removed as both the vector group and current
magnitude compensation functions are carried out within the 7SR24. This requires ICT settings to be
programmed into the relay to correct for differences before the currents are applied to the differential algorithm.
When the relay is in balance the phase angle of the currents applied to each phase of the differential algorithm
will be in anti-phase.
Dyn1
1718
12
56
910
1413 IG1
21
65
109
W1 IL1
W1 IL2
W1 IL3
A
1718 IG2
12
56
910
W2 IL1
W2 IL2
W2 IL3
A
B
NOTES
CTs shown wired to 1A relay inputs
REF protection shown on Star winding
Figure 2-12: AC Connections - Example 2
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 23 of 64
Step 1 Connection of CTs
Remove all interposing CTs from the secondary circuit. Connect all line CT secondary wiring in star.
HV load current =
A
132,00031045
6
8.196=
×
×
Re-use 300/1A CTs.
LV load current =
A
33,00031045 69.74795.0 =×
×
×
Re-use 560/0.577A CTs.
Step 2 Selection of Interposing CT Multiplier Settings
HV Secondary current =
A
00
196.8 66.0
3=
HV ICT Multiplier = 1/0.66 = 1.54
LV Secondary current =
A
747.9 77.0
577.0/560 =
LV ICT Multiplier = 1/0.77 = 1.30
D y
300/1 196.8A
0.66A
747.9A
0.77A
560/0.577A
45MVA, Z = 10%, Dyn1, 132/33kV +5% to -15%
X1.54 X1.30
0.66
Yd11Yy0
W1: 1A
1.00 1.00
0.77
W2: 1A
ICTOUT = 1.00
Terminals
ICT Multiplier
ICT Connection
W1
Bias W2
Bias
Operate
Figure 2-13 Summary of ICT Settings
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 24 of 64
Summary of Protection Settings
CT/VT CONFIG >
W1 Phase Input 1A
W1 Phase CT Ratio 300:1
W2 Phase Input 1A
W2 Phase CT Ratio 560:0.58
FUNCTION CONFIG>
Gn Differential Enabled
Gn Inrush Detector Enabled
DIFFERENTIAL PROT’N >
Gn W1 ICT Multiplier 1.54
Gn W1 ICT Connection Yy0
Gn W2 ICT Multiplier 1.30
Gn W2 ICT Connection Yd11
(Note that the above settings produce ICTOUT = 1.00)
DIFFERENTIAL PROT’N > 87BD >
Gn 87 BD Element Enabled
Gn 87BD Initial: 0.2 x In (0.2 x ICTOUT )
Gn 87BD 1st Bias Slope: 0.2x (OLTC = +5% to -15%)
Gn 87BD 1st Bias Slope Limit: 5 x In (1/0.1 x 0.5 = 5 x ICTOUT )
Gn 87BD 2nd Bias Slope Type: Line (Default value)
Gn 87BD 2nd Bias Slope: 1.5x (Default value)
Gn 87BD Delay: 0.005s
Gn 87BD Inrush Action: Inhibit
Gn 87BD Overfluxing Action: Off
DIFFERENTIAL PROT’N > 87HS >
Gn 87 HS Element Enabled
Gn 87HS Setting: 10 x In (> I3PH THRU FAULT i.e. 1/0.1 = 10 x ICTOUT)
Gn 87HS Delay: 0.005s
Gn 87HS Inrush Action: Off
Gn 87HS Overfluxing Action: Off
SUPERVISION > INRUSH DETECTOR >
Gn 81HBL2 Element Enabled
Gn 81HBL2 Bias Cross (Default value)
Gn 81HBL2 Setting 0.2 x I (Default value)
OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX>
87BD BOn, Ln
87HS BOn, Ln
OUTPUT CONFIG>BINARY OUTPUT CONFIG>
CB1 Trip Contacts BOn
CB2 Trip Contacts BOn
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 25 of 64
2.2 Instantaneous OC/EF (50/50G/50N)
Instantaneous overcurrent can be applied to protect the HV terminals against high fault currents. The current
setting applied must be above the maximum 3-phase through fault level of the transformer to ensure grading with
the LV overcurrent protection.
Where the setting applied is below the magnetising inrush current of the transformer then inrush blocking
(81HBL2) should be enabled.
A sensitive instantaneous HV earth fault setting can be considered where the transformer winding connections do
not allow the through flow of zero sequence current. Time delayed (DTL) operation can also be considered where
the transformer switch on magnetising inrush current may cause mal-operation. This will be identified during
commissioning. An increased operate current or high impedance operation can also be considered.
2.3 Time Delayed OC/EF (51/51G/51N)
The time delayed element can provide a number of shaped characteristics. The selectable Inverse definite
minimum time lag (IDMTL) and Definite Time Lag (DTL) characteristics provide protection for phase and earth
faults.
As these protections are used as back-up protections discrete relays are often installed. To reduce cost and
complexity it may be considered acceptable to implement the backup protection using elements within the main
protection relay. The relay is self supervised and this can be used as justification for allowing the backup
protection to be included as part of the main differential protection relay.
The following ele ment s can be include d:
Three phase over current with IDMTL (IEC or ANSI) or DTL operate characteristic (51)
Derived earth fault with IDMTL (I EC o r ANSI) or DTL operate characteristic (51N)
Measured earth fault with IDMTL (IEC or ANSI) or DTL operate characteristic (51G)
Each of the above elemen ts c an be selec ted to winding 1 or winding 2 CT inputs.
The time delayed characteristics are used to provide grading with other relays or fuses.
Earth fault elements can be used to provide system protection or standby earth fault protection of an earthing
resistor.
2.3.1 Selection of Over-current Characteristics
Where the relay operate time must be co-ordinated with other time delayed relays on the system, the operating
characteristic is selected to be the same type as the other relays. Often a normally inverse (NI) characteristic is
applied, however extremely inverse curves (EI) can provide improved grading with fuses or moulded case circuit
breakers.
To optimise the grading capability of the relay additional time multiplier, ‘Follower DTL’ (Figure 2-14) or ‘Minimum
Operate Time’ (Figure 2-15) settings can be applied.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 26 of 64
0.01
0.10
1.00
10.00
100.00
1000.00
110 100 1000
Current (x Is)
Operating Time (Seconds)
Time Multiplier = 1
Increasing
Time
Multiplier
0.01
0.10
1.00
10.00
100.00
1000.00
110 100 1000
Current (x Is)
Operating Time (Seconds)
Follower
DTL
Figure 2-14 IEC NI Curve with Time Multiplier and Follower DTL Applied
IEC NI Curve: TM = 1
Min Operate Time = 4sec
0.01
0.10
1.00
10.00
100.00
1000.00
110 100 1000
Current (x Is)
Operating Time (Seconds)
OPERATE
ZONE
Figure 2-15 IEC NI Curve with Minimum Operate Time Setting Applied
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 27 of 64
2.3.2 Reset Delay
Faults in plastic insulated cables or compound-filled joint boxes can be intermittent or ‘flashing faults the
insulant melts and temporarily reseals the fault for a short time after which the insulation fails again.
The repeating process of the fault often causes electromechanical disc relays to “ratchet” up and eventually trip
the faulty circuit if the reset time of the relay was longer than the time between successive flashes.
To ensure time grading is maintained with other relays on the system a DTL or shaped (ANSI only) reset
characteristic can be selected for all overcurrent and earth fault elements.
Where the substation feeds an outgoing overhead line network, particularly where reclosers are installed,
instantaneous resetting is desirable to ensure that, on multiple shot reclosing schemes, correct grading between
the substation incomer relays and the relays associated with the reclosers is maintained.
FAULT
Clashing
conductors or
re-sealing cable
R1
R2
R3
Disc Travel
Electro-mechanical Relay
Time
TRIP
% of Algorithm
(Instantaneous.
Reset
Time
DTL Reset
TRIP
Figure 2-16 Overcurrent Reset Characteristics
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 28 of 64
2.4 High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault (64H)
Restricted earth fault (REF) protection can be applied to either or both windings of the transformer. The 7SR24
provides a high impedance REF (64H) element for each transformer winding. Low leak age re actanc e CTs ( Class
PX) are required for use with high impedance protection systems.
REF REF
Figure 2-17: REF Protection Applied to a Delta/Star Transformer
The zone of REF protection is defined by the position of the CTs and/or the transformer winding. REF protection
provides a low operate current (fault setting) for in zone earth faults and stability during external faults.
REF is more sensitive than overall biased differential protection (87BD) to earth faults it can protect against faults
for a greater portion of the transformer windings or where the impedance in the earth fault path is relatively high.
For a s ol idl y e a r the d star winding, the REF function is roughly twice as sensitive in detecting a winding earth fault,
than biased diff erent ial pr ote cti on.
The stability of high impedance REF schemes depends upon the operate voltage setting being greater than the
voltage which can appear across the element during the maximum assigned through fault conditions. To provide
the required operating voltage an external stabilisingresistor is wired in series with the 64H current measuring
input. A non-linear resistor is connected in parallel to protect the relay circuit against high over-voltages. REF
connections are shown in Figure 2-18.
Dy11 (30
o
)
1718
12
56
910
1413 I
G1
21
65
109
W1 I
L1
W1 I
L2
W1 I
L3
A
1718 I
G2
12
56
910
W2 I
L1
W2 I
L2
W2 I
L3
A
B
Note:
CTs shown wired
to 1A relay inputs
Stabilising Resistor
Non-Linear Resistor
7SR24
Stabilising Resistor
Non-Linear Resistor
Figure 2-18: AC Connections: REF
The operating voltage of the relay/stabilising resistor combination is calculated taking into account: the r.m.s.
value of the symmetri cal co mp onent of the tra nsf orme r throu gh fau lt curre nt
The relay current setting is calculated taking into account: the required operate level for in-zone earth faults (fault
setting).
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 29 of 64
2.4.1.1 Stability Requirement
The use of class PX CTs (IEC61869-2) ensures steady state CT errors are minimised. Transient CT errors are
caused by CT saturation e.g. due to high currents flowing at times of through faults. Where CT saturation
conditions are different in each CT this will cause differential current to flow in the CT secondary circuit wiring.
The highest level of differential current will flow when one set of CTs is fully saturated, providing zero output and
all other CTs transform normally.
When fully saturated the CT secondary provides no current and it behaves as a resistance in the secondary
circuit. Differential current in the secondary circuit will flow either through this ‘resistance’ or through the relay. A
‘stabilising’ resistance is added in series with the relay input to ensured that the operate voltage at the current
setting is greater than the maximum voltage which can appear across the element/stabilising resistor during the
maximum assigned through fault conditions. It is assumed that any earthing resistor can become short-circuit.
This maximum voltage that can appear across the relay circuit can be determined by a simple calculation which
makes the following assumptions:
One current transformer is fully saturated making its excitation current negligible.
The remaining current transformers maintain their ratio.
The resistance of the secondary winding of the saturated CT together with the leads connecting it to the
relay circuit terminals constitute the only burden in parallel with the relay.
The minimum required relay operate voltage setting (Vs) is given by:
T )R(RIV
LCTFS
×+
(1)
To ensure high speed relay operation the relay circuit operating voltage should be selected in accordance with the
stability requirement above (equation 1), also, the operate voltage should not exceed 0.5 x CT knee point voltage
(Vk).
2
V
V
K
S
(2)
2.4.1.2 Operation Requirement
For internal faults the relay will operate at the calculated ‘Voltage Setting’ Vs. This operating voltage will also be
applied across the CT secondary windings of all the CT secondaries connected in parallel with the relay. This
voltage will drive a magnetising current in each of the CT secondary windings and this must be added to the relay
operate current when calculating the operate current of the high impedance protection scheme.
In general:
( )
/TIIIP.O.C. MAGNLRS++=
(3)
2.4.1.3 Consideration of Component Thermal Ratings
When the relay circuit operates for an internal fault the circuit breakers are opened and the flow of fault current
ceases.
Where a CB fails to trip then fault current will flow in the high impedance circuit until the fault is cleared by the
operation of CB failure or back up protection. The thermal rating of the relay circuit components should then be
considered.
Alternatively the high impedance circuit can be arranged to short circuit the external components after operation.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 30 of 64
2.4.2 Establishing the Required Stabilising Resistor Value
The relay burden need not be considered as it is effectively negligible relative to the burden of the stabilising
resistor. The setting (operate) voltage (Vs) across the Relay and Stabilising Resistor at the Relay operating
current (Is):
S
S
STAB
I
V
R=
(4)
Stabilising Resistor power rating must:
Be sufficient for continuous operation at the circuit operate voltage (Vs):
stab
2
sCONT R x )(I P
Short time rated to withstand IFint for the maximum fault clearance time. For a failed circuit breaker
condition the back up protection clearance time is considered typic ally a one secon d rat in g is suffic ient .
R
V
P
stab
2
Fint
1SEC
Where:
1.3 x )I x R x (V V
4Fintstab
3
KFint
Where IFint is not known, the breaking capacity current of the Circuit Breaker can be used.
2.4.3 Limiting Circuit Over-Voltages (Metrosils)
Non-linear resistors are connected in parallel with the relay circuit to limit the peak voltage developed across the
high impedance components during internal faults to a ‘safe’ level below 3kV peak. Where a Metrosil is not
connected in circuit the peak voltage can be calculated from:
( )
) V- R I( x V2 x 2 V KstabFintK x Pk ×=
Notwithstanding the above calculation SPDL recommend that a Metrosil is always fitted in the high impedance
relay circuit
The use of non-linear resistors manufactured by Metrosil is recommended. The operate characteristic is defined
by:-
Voltage characteristic:
β
ICV .=
For dc or instantaneous values.
β
1
2
52.0
=C
Vrms
Irms
For applied sinusoidal voltages
β
)(
09.1 IrmsCVpeak =
For applied sinusoidal currents
Where: C and β are Metrosil constants
When supplied as discrete components 7XG14 Metrosils can be specified as single or three phase, with a
diameter of 75mm or 150mm and have constant ‘C’ values of 450, 900 or 1000.
Metrosils of diameter 75mm have a thermal rating of 8kJ. Where a higher thermal rating is required Metrosils of
150mm diameter sho uld be used.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 31 of 64
The chosen Metrosil ‘C’ value must;
1) Ensure negligible current flows through the Metrosil at relay operate voltage (Vs), and,
2) Limit over-voltages for operational and safety reasons i.e. 1.09C (IFintβ ) < 3kV
A ‘C’ value of 450 is generally acceptable where the relay operate voltage is less than 100V, a ‘C’ value
of 1000 is recommended for settings above 100V.
Metrosil short time power rating must;
Be sufficient to dissipate the heat created by the flow of maximum secondary internal fault current. The
Metrosil is chosen so that it can withstand I Fint for the maximum fault clearance time. For a failed circuit
breaker condition the back up protection clearance time must be considered typically a one second
rating is sufficient.
P1SEC
K
FV
TI
π
4××
×
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 32 of 64
2.5 Open Circuit (46BC)
Used to detect an open circuit condition e.g. an OLTC failure.
There will be little or no fault current and so the differential protection elements will not detect the condition.
However the condition can be detected because there will be a high content of NPS (unbalance) current present.
An NPS / PPS ratio > 50% will result from an open circuit condition.
A time delay can be applied to prevent operation for transitory effects.
2.6 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46NPS)
The Negative Phase Sequence (NPS) over current is intended to be used to detect uncleared system faults and
conditions such as broken primary connections that may produce significant NPS current.
This unbalance may cause rotating plant such as generators or motors to overheat and fail.
This may also be used to monitor the state of the tap changer and alarm for faults with diverter resistors or
switches.
Typical Settings are 5 to 10% for Tap Changer alarm and 10 to 15% for system fault or broken conductor.
2.7 Und ercu rren t (3 7 )
Where current decreases beneath defined levels this can indicate low load or CB open conditions, it can also be
used to indicate that no current is flowing.
The undercurren t funct ion is u sed:
As a fault current check i.e. that no fault current continues to flow and that an auto-isolation sequence
may safely be initiated.
As a check that a CB has opened this can be used in addition to or in place of CB auxiliary switch
indications.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 33 of 64
2.8 Thermal Overload (49)
Thermal protection is provided to supplement the W inding Temperature device. This function provides a general
overload thermal protect ion i.e . not a winding hot spot protection.
Outputs can be assigned to both alarm and trip levels. The default settings are recommended if transformer data
is not available, these settings correspond to the lowest level of thermal withstand for an oil filled transformer.
Transformer overloading can result in:-
Reduced transformer life expectancy.
Lower insulation voltage withstand due to degradation of the insulation.
Increased mechanical stress due to expansion.
Gas bubble production in the mineral oil at extreme levels of overload.
2.8.1 Settings Guidelines
49 Overload Setting
The 49 Overload Setting is expressed as a multiple of the relay nominal current and is equivalent to the factor
k.IB as defined in the IEC255-8 thermal operating characteristics. It is the value of current above which 100% of
thermal capacity will be reached after a period of time. This setting should be set to 110% of the secondary
current flowing when the transformer is at its full rating and on its minimum voltage tap position.
49 Time Constant Setting
A transformer may be required to temporarily run overloaded e.g. 150% of rating for two hours or 200% of rating
for one hour.
The thermal time constants required to match these specifications are:
150% for two hours Time constant = 178 minutes
200% for one hour T ime consta nt = 186 minute s
These times are applicable to an overload occurring from no load with the transformer at ambient temperature.
The actual tripping time will depend on the loading level prior to the overload occurring.
The operate time can be calcu lat ed from:
Time to trip
×= 2
θ
2
2
)(II I
lnτt(mins)
The steady state % thermal capacity used can be calculated from:
100
)(II
usedcapacity thermal %
2
θ
2
×
=
Where:
I = applied current in terms of x In
IΘ = thermal pick-up setting x In
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 34 of 64
49 Capacity Alarm Setting
This setting can be used to provide an alarm prior to a thermal trip occurring and is typically set to about 80 to 90
% of thermal capacity. The thermal capacity alarm can be mapped to a binary output wired to the control syste m.
Example
D y
300/1A
45MVA, Z = 10%, Dyn1, 132/33kV +5% to -15%
Figure 2-19 Thermal Overload Settings
1. In fig. 2-19 the direction of power flow is HV to LV. If W 1 input is connected to HV CTs (as is usual) then
set 49 Select = W1. The transformer loss current and harmonic currents are then included in the thermal
calculation.
2. FUNCTION CONFIG>Gn Thermal: Enabled
CURRENT PROT’N>THERMAL>Gn49 Thermal Overload: Enabled.
3. CURRENT PROT’N>THERMAL>49 Overload Setting:
Maximum Primary Full Load current =
A5.231
85.01323
45000 =
××
Secondary Current = 231.5A/300 = 0.772A. The thermal function should not trip for currents below this
value.
A setting of 110% is used to include a margin of safety.
Therefore 49 Overload Setting = 0.85 x In (Iθ) (1.10 x 0.772)
4. The time constant to apply will depend upon the transformer overload specification, but in this case it
was decided to set a time constant of 178 minutes. This will allow an overload of 150% from ambient for
about two hours befor e a trip is issu ed.
5. The capacity alarm is a useful function and therefore it is set to 90%. The current required to reach this
90% figure should be calculated. It is important not to alarm for current within the normal loading range of
the transformer.
The steady state thermal capacity = I2 / Iθ2 x 100%
For this example: 90% = I2 / Iθ2 x 100%. I = 0.806 x In and this level is above the maximum full load
current of 0.772 x In.
The above provides guidelines only as setting philosophies differ. Alternative protection setting groups may be
used to match transformer loading for temporary or emergency overloads, wide variations in winter/summer
loading or if a cooling failure (pump or fan) occurs. The thermal settings applied will differ in each Setting Group
and will be made appropria te to the specific load conditions.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 35 of 64
2.9 Under/Over Voltage ( 27/59)
Power system under-voltages may occur due to:
System faults.
An increase in system loading,
Non-energized power system e.g. loss of an incoming transformer
During normal system operating conditions regulating equipment such as transformer On Load Tap Changers
(OLTC) and generator Automatic Voltage Regulators (AVR) ensure that the system runs within acceptable
voltage limits .
7SR24 under-voltage/DTL elements can be used to detect abnormal under-voltage conditions due to system
overloads. Binary outputs can be used to trip non-essential loads - returning the system back to its normal
operating levels. This ‘load shedding’ should be initiated via time delay elements so avoiding operation during
transient disturbances. An under voltage scheme (or a combined under frequency/under voltage scheme) can
provide faster tripping of non-essential loads than under-frequency load shedding so minimising the possibility of
syste m instability.
Where a transformer is supplying 3-phase motors a significant voltage drop e.g. to below 80% may cause the
motors to stall. An under-voltage element can be set to trip motor circuits when the voltage falls below a preset
value so that on restoration of supply an overload is not caused by the simultaneous starting of all the motors. A
time delay is required to ensure voltage dips due to remote system faults do not result in an unnecessary
disconnect ion of motors.
To confirm presence/loss of supply, the voltage elements should be set to values safely above/below that where a
normal system voltage excursion can be expected. The switchgear/plant design should be considered. The ‘Dead’
level may be very near to the ‘live’ level or may be significantly below it. The variable hysteresis setting allows the
relay to be used with all types of switchgear.
System over-voltages can damage component insulation. Excessive voltage may occur for:
Sudden loss of load
A tap changer run-away condition occurs in the high voltage direction,
Generator AVR equ ipm ent ma lfun ctio ns or
Reactive compensation control malfunctions.
System regulating equipment such as transformer tap changers and generator AVRs may correct the overvoltage
unless this equipment mal-functions. The 7SR24 overvoltage/DTL elements can be used to protect against
damage caused by system over-voltages.
If the overvoltage condition is small a relatively long DTL time delay can be used. If the overvoltage is more
severe then another element, set at a higher pickup level and with a shorter DTL can be used to isolate the circuit
more quickly. Alternatively, elements can be set to provide alarm and tripping stages, with the alarm levels set
lower than the tripping stages.
The use of DTL settings allows a grading system to be applied to co-ordinate the network design, the regulating
plant design, system plant insulation withstand and with other overvoltage relays elsewhere on the system. The
DTL also prevents operation during transient disturbances.
The use of IDMTL protection is not recommended because of the difficulty of choosing settings to ensure correct
co-ordination and security of supply.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 36 of 64
2.10 Neutral Overvoltage (59N)
Neutral Overvoltage Displacement (Residual Overvoltage) protection is used to detect an earth fault where little or
no earth current flows.
This can occur where a transformer feeder has been tripped at its HV side for an earth fault, but the circuit is still
energised from the LV side via an unearthed transformer winding. Insufficient earth current would be present to
cause a trip, but residual voltage would increase significantly; reaching up to 3-times the normal pha se-earth
voltage level.
If Neutral Overvoltage protection is used, it must be suitably time graded with other protections in order to prevent
unwanted tripping for external system earth faults.
OC/EF
Transformer Feeder
Earth
fault
EHV/HV HV/MV
HV CB
Tripped
by local
protection
MV CB tripped by:
1) Feeder unit protection or
2) Intertrip from HV feeder protection or
3) NVD protection
NVD
HV CB MV CB
Figure 2-20 NVD Application
Typically NVD protection measures the residual voltage (3V0) directly from an open delta VT or from capacitor
cones see fig. 2.13-2 below .
3Vo
3Vo
VT with
Open Delta
Secondary
Capacitor
Cone
Unit
Capacitor
Cone
Adaptor Unit Relay
Relay
Figure 2-21 NVD Protection Connections
2.10.1 Application with Capacitor Cone Units
Capacitor cones provide a cost effective method of deriving residual voltage. The wide range of capacitor cone
component values used by different manufacturer’s means that the relay cannot be connected directly to the
cones.
The external adaptor unit contains parallel switched capacitors that enable a wide range of values to be selected
using a DIL switch and hence the Capacitor Cone output can be scaled to the standard relay input range.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 37 of 64
2.11 Under/Over Fre quency (81)
During normal system operation the frequency will continuously vary over a relatively small range due to the
changing generation/load balance. Excessive frequency variation may occur for:
Loss of generating capacity, or loss of mains supply (under-frequency): If the governors and other
regulating equipment cannot respond to correct the balance, a sustained under-frequency condition may
lead to a system collap se.
Loss of load excess generation (over-frequency): The generator speeds will increase causing a
proportional frequency rise. This may be unacceptable to industrial loads, for example, where the
running speeds of synchronous motors will be affected.
In the situation where the system frequency is falling rapidly it is common practise to disconnect non-essential
loads until the generation-load balance can be restored. Usually, automatic load shedding, based on under-
frequency is implemented. Under-frequency relays are usually installed on the transformer incomers of
distribution or industrial substations as this provides a convenient position from which to monitor the busbar
frequency. Loads are disconnected (shed) from the busbar in stages until the frequency stabilises and returns to
an acceptable level.
The 7SR24 has six under/over frequency elements (optional).
An example scheme may have the first load shedding stage set just below the nominal frequency, e.g. between
49.0 - 49.5Hz. A time delay element would be associated with this to allow for transient dips in frequency and to
provide a time for the system regulating equipment to respond. If the first load shedding stage disconnects
sufficient plant the frequency will stabilise and perhaps return to nominal. If, however, this is not sufficient then a
second load shedding stage, set at a lower frequency, will shed further loads until the overload is relieved. This
process will continue until all stages have operated. In the event of the load shedding being unsuccessful, a final
stage of under-frequency protection should be provided to totally isolate all loads before plant is damaged, e.g.
due to overfluxing.
An alternative type of load shedding scheme would be to set all under-frequency stages to about the same
frequency setting but to have different length time delays set on each stage. If after the first stage is shed the
frequency doesn’t recover then subsequent stages will shed after longer time delays have elapsed.
Generator
Network
Incomer
G59
300/5
STAGE 1: Least important
STAGE 2
STAGE 3
STAGE 4
Essential
Load
STAGE 5
STAGE 6
6
125 5 3 4 24
Figure 2-22 Load Shedding Scheme Using Under-Frequency Elements
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 38 of 64
2.12 Over Fluxing Protection (24)
An under-frequency condition at nominal voltage can cause over-fluxing (or over-excitation) of the transformer.
Excess flux can cause transformer core saturation and some of the flux will radiate as leakage flux through the
transformer tank. This leakage flux causes eddy currents and the I2R losses from these currents heat the
transformer tank and can cause overheating.
Overfluxing protection is applied to generator step-up transformers and other plant which may be subject to this
condition.
This function measures the ratio of voltage to frequency (V/f) applied the transformer to determine operation.
The relay has two types of V/f characteristics:
User Definable Inverse curve
Two Independent Definite Time Lag elements(DTL)
User Definable V/f Curve
As the leakage flux will cause overheating, an inverse type curve provides an appropriate match to the over
fluxing withstand characteristics of a transformer.
The relay includes a user definable curve. Where the transformer manufacturer has provided an over-fluxing
withstand curve the user can define up to seven points to provide correlation between the relay characteristic and
transformer withstand curves.
Y (secs)
X - (V/f)
X0
Y0
X6
Y6
X0, Y0 point
defines
curve pick-up
X6, Y6 point
defines
curve cut-off
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Straight-line
between points
Two Stage DTL Over fluxing
In addition to the inverse curve, two independent DTL V/f elements are included and are used where the over
excitation withstand curve of the transformer is not known. In this case the inverse V/f curve should be set to
[Disabled] and both DTL elements should be set to [Enabled]. The default DTL settings are adequate to protect
almost all transformer designs, and can be used with confidence.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 39 of 64
Section 3: CT Requir eme nts
The specification of CTs must meet the requirements of all protection functions utilised e.g. overall differential,
REF and backup over cur rent protections.
The relay has 1A and 5A rated terminals for each CT input and any combination of these may be used. 1A rated
CTs can be used on one winding and together with 5A rated CTs on the other.
3.1 CT Requirem en t fo r Diff er en tia l Protection
The quality of CTs will affect the performance of the protection system. The CT knee-point voltage (Vk) is a factor
in assessing protection performance.
If a high level internal short circuit occurs the dc offset in the primary fault current may produce transient CT
saturation. This is more likely to occur if the CT knee-point is low and/or the connected burden is high. Saturated
CTs produce high levels of even harmonics which may increase the operate time of the biased differential
function where harmonic restraint or inhibit is applied.
A highset differential element (87HS) can be used without harmonic restraint this can reduce the overall operating
time of the differential protection.
Restricted Earth Fault protection helps ensure fast tripping as its speed of operation is not affected significantly by
CT saturation.
For high speed operation:
Vk ≥ 4 x IFS x (RCT + RL)
Where:
Vk = CT knee point voltage.
IFS = Max. secondary 3-phase through fault current (as limited by the transformer impedance).
RCT = Secondary winding resistance of each star connected CT.
RL = The CT secondary loop lead resistance.
Where the CTs used have a lower knee point voltage e.g. half that calculated in the expression above the biased
differential elements may have a slightly longer operate time. To ensure stability during through fault conditions
the biased differential settings should be increased by 10%.
Advice on CT Selection.
1A rated CT secondaries are preferred to 5A C Ts as the CT VA burden is reduced by a factor of 25.
Line current transformer ratios should be selected to match the main transformer rating and ratio. However the
ICT Multiplier adjustment can be used to compensate for non matched ratios. Choose a CT ratio that produces
at least 0.33 x nominal secondary rating, when based on the transformer is at nameplate rating i.e. within the
range of the ICT Multiplier setting.
Where long secondary lead lengths are required measures can be taken to reduce the burden imposed on the
CTs:
Use high CT ratios to reduce the secondary current. Compensate the low secondary current using the
ICT Multipliers..
Parallel CT secondary cable cores to reduce lead r esistance.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 40 of 64
Worked Example
Y d
400/1 1600/1
90MVA, Z = 14%, Yd11, 132/33kV +10% to -20%
CT Specification
VK = 250V
T = 1/400
RCT = 3.5 Ohms
CT Specification
VK = 750V
T = 1/1600
RCT = 12 Ohms
RL = C = 1 Ohm RL = C = 4 Ohm
Figure 3-1 CT Requirements
Suitability of HV Current Transformers:
( )
126.5V13.5
0.1440010
13231090
4V
3
6
K
=+×
××××
×
×
i.e. less than 250V
Suitability of LV Current Transformers:
( )
V12
0.1400103331090
4V
3
6
K
9.4494
16 =+×
××××
×
×
i.e. less than 750V
An indication of the suitability of a protection class CT e.g. class 5P to IEC60044 classification can be obtained.
The product of its rated burden expressed in ohms and the secondary current equivalent of its accuracy limit
primary current will give an approximation of the secondary voltage it can produce while operating within the limit
of its stated composite error.
3.2 CT Requirem ents for High Impe dance Restricted E arth
Fault (64H)
For high impedance REF protection:
It is rec omm end ed t hat lo w rea ct anc e CTs conforming to IEC61869-2 C las s P X are used. Class PX CTs
have a specified excitation characteristic and secondary winding resistance and these parameters are
used to calculate the performance of the protection in terms of primary operate current for internal faults
and stability during through fault conditions.
All current transformers should have an equal turns ratio.
The knee-point voltage of the CTs must be greater than 2 x 64H Setting Voltage (Vs) see section 2.4.
A full explanation of how to specify CTs for use with REF protection, and set REF relays is available on our
Website: www.siemens.com/energy .
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 41 of 64
Section 4: Contr ol Funct ions
4.1 User Defined Logic
4.1.1 Auto-Changeover Scheme Example
INCOMER 1 INCOMER 2
Start On-Load
Change-over
CB1
OPEN VT1 VT2
CB1 CB2
CB3
BI 1 BO3
V 1 Vx
Start On-Load
Change-over
Busbar 1 Busbar 2
LOADS LOADS
Figure 4-1 Example Use of Quick Logic
The MV installation illustrated above is fed from two incomers. To limit the substation fault level the busbar is run
with CB3 open. W hen a fault occurs on one of the incomers it is isolated by the circuit protection. To re-su pp l y t he
disconnected loads from the remaining incomer CB3 is closed.
If the line fault occurs on incomer 1 it must be confirmed that CB 1 has opened before CB3 can be closed. The
relay on incomer 1 confirms that a trip has been issued to CB1 (e.g. Binary Output 2), that CB 1 has opened (e.g.
Binary Input 1) and that no current flows in the circuit (e.g. 37-1 = Virtual 1):
Incomer 1 Relay is Configured:
CB1 Open auxiliary switch wired to B.I. 1
Trip output to CB1 = B.O. 2
OUTPUT CON FIG>OUTP UT MATR IX: 37-1 = V1
OUTPUT CONF IG>OU TP U T M ATR I X: E1 = BO3
CONTROL & LOGIC>QUICK LOGIC: E1 = O2.I1.V1
The output from Incomer 1 (BO3) relay is input to the relay on CB 3 (Binary Input 1). A panel switch may be used
to enable the On-Load Change-over scheme (Binary Input 2). Before Closing CB3 a check may be made that
there is no voltage on busbar 1 (27/59-1 = Virtual 1). CB 3 is closed from Binary Output 3.
CB3 Relay is Configured:
Panel switch (ON-Load Change-over Enabled) wired to B.I. 1
OUTPUT CON FIG>OUTP UT MATR IX: 27/59-1 = V1
OUTPUT CON FI G >O U TP U T M ATR I X: E1 = BO3
CONTROL & LOGIC>QUICK LOGIC: E1 = I1.I2.V1
If required a time delay can be added to the output using the CONTROL & LOGIC > QUICK LOGIC: E1
Pickup Delay setting.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 42 of 64
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 43 of 64
Section 5: Supervisi on Functions
5.1 Inru sh Detector (81H B L 2)
87 Inrush Elem en t (En able, D isable)
When a transformer is energized transient magnetizing inrush currents flow in each phase of the energised
winding. Inrush currents only flow into one transformer winding and the resulting unbalance can be sufficient to
cause mal-operation of the biased differential elements. To prevent the relay operating for this non-fault condition,
the presence of even harmonics in the current is used to distinguish between inrush currents and short circuit
faults.
The inrush restraint detector can be used to block the operation of selected elements during transformer
magnetising inrush conditions.
The 81HBL2 Bias setting allows the user to select between, Phase, Sum and Cross methods of measurement.
Each of the three selections has a specific application.
PhaseThe even harmonic content in each phase is measured independently and compared to the total operate
current in its own phase i.e. each phase of the biased differential elements is blocked by even harmonic content in
its own phase only.
This method is used:
Where large transformers are manufactured with three separate phase tanks each containing a phase
core. This construction facilitates transportation. Each of the phase cores is not magnetically affected by
the flux in the other phase cores. These large single phase transformers are often auto-transformers
used on EHV transmission systems. A typical setting level for this application is 18% of Id.
Both ICT settings are selected to Yy e.g. reactor, mot or, generator applic atio ns.
Cross Each phase is monitored and if the even harmonic present in any phase exceeds the setting then all
three phases are blocked. This method is used for the majority of applications of the relay to power transformers.
Generally the default setting of 0.20 x Id prov id es stab le operation.
SumThe level of even harmonic current (2nd and 4th) in the differential signal for each phase is measured. The
square root is taken of each of these even harmonic currents and these three values summated. This single
current level is then divided by the Inrush Setting to arrive at the Harmonic Sum with which each of the phase
currents are com pared .
If the operate current in any phase is greater than this Harmonic Sum then its differential element will operate.
The advantage of this method is it allows fast operation of the biased differential element if the transformer is
switched onto an internal phase to earth fault. The cross method may suffer from slowed operation for this
situation, as healthy phase inrush may block all three phases (including the one feeding the fault current) from
operating. W here REF is used to protect the winding, the slowed operation is not critical as the REF will operate
very fast, typically in about 20ms for this rare condition.
The Sum method is not slowed down when switching onto an in zone earth fault, as the Harmonic Sum is reduced
by the presence of the fault current and therefore allows relay operation.
Typically the Sum method will allow the biased differential elements to operate in the normal time of about 30ms,
if a transformer earth fault occurs when it is energised.
This setting is recommended if REF is not used to protect the windings for earth faults on effectively earthed
power systems. The recommended setting that offers a good compromise between stability for typical inrush
currents and fast operation for internal faults is 0.15 x Id.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 44 of 64
87 Inrush Setting (0.1 to 0.5 x Id)
This defines the levels of inrush used in each of the above methods.
The setting applied will determine the level of even harmonic (second and fourth) content in the relay operating
current that will cause operation of the relay to be inhibited. The lowest setting of 0.1 x Id therefore represents the
setting that prov ide s the most stab ility under mag netising inrush con diti ons .
The recommended settings for each method are:
Phase 0.18 x Id
Cross 0.20 x Id
Sum – 0.15 x Id
These setting provide a good compromise between speed of operation for internal faults and stability for inrush
current. Generally the above values will be stable for most cases, but in rare cases may not prevent relay
operation for all angles of point on wave switching, and the setting may require being lower slightly. If the relay
operates when the transformer is energised, the waveform record should be examined for signs of fault current
and the levels of harmonic current.
Set to 0.20 x Id unless a very rare false operation for inrush occurs. In which case a lower setting should be
adopted after checking the waveform record for the presence of fault current.
5.2 Overfluxing Detector (81HBL5)
An increase in transformer or decrease in system frequency may result in the transformer becoming over-excited.
The 81HBL5 element can be used to prevent protection operation e.g. prevent differential protection operation
during acceptable over-excitation conditions.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 45 of 64
5.3 Circuit Breaker Fail (50BF)
Where a circuit breaker fails to operate to clear fault current the power system will remain in a hazardous state
until the fault is cleared by remote or back-up protections. To minimise any delay, CB Failure protection provides
a signal to either re-trip the local CB or back-trip the next ‘upstream’ CB.
7SR24
50
BF
50
BF
HV
LV
CB1
CB2
Figure 5-1 - Circuit Breaker Fail
The CBF function is initiated by the operation of either:
Protection functions that operate binary outputs mapped as OUTPUT CONFIG>BINARY OUTPUT
CONFIG>CBn Trip Contacts, or
A binary input mapped as INPUT CONFIG>INPUT M ATRIX > C50BF-n Ext T r ip
Each 50BF uses phase segregated current check elements and two timers.
Current in each phase is monitored and if any of the 50BF current check elements have not reset before the
timers have expired an output is given. Typically a single stage scheme is used, DTL1 is wired to back-trip the
adjacent CBs e.g. via the busbar protection system. Alternatively the first timer output can be wired to re-trip the
failed CB through a different trip coil, and the second timer output is wired to trip the adjacent CBs.
Practical time sequ enc es for si ngle and two stage 50BF applications are illustrated below .
CB Backtrip
Sucessful
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340
System
Fault
ms from fault
occuring
Relay
Operation
and CBF
Timer
Started
Main
Trip
Relay
Operation
Failure of
CB to trip
Reset of
CBF elements
does not occur
Backtrip
Operation
Backtrip
Trip Relay
CB Operate Time
Stage 1 CBF Timer (Backtrip) = 120ms
Figure 5-2 - Single Stage Circuit Breaker Fail Timing
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 46 of 64
Stage 1 CBF Timer (Retrip) = 120ms
Failed CB Retrip
Operation
40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 360340
System
Fault
Relay
Operation
and CBF
Timer
Started
Main
Trip
Relay
Operation
CB's
Fails to
Trip
No Reset of
CBF elements CBF Retrip
Operation
CBF Retrip
Trip Relay
CB Operate Time
Stage 2 CBF Timer (Backtrip) = 250ms
No Reset of
CBF elements
CBF Back trip
Operation
Backtrip
Trip Relay
Operation
Operation of all
BB CB's
Reset of
CBF elements
ms from
occuri
Figure 5-3 - Two Stage Circuit Breaker Fail Timing
Example of Required Settings (e.g. HV CB)
FUNCTION CONFIG>
Gn CB Fail Enabled
SUPERVISION > CB FAIL > 50BF-1
Gn 50BF-1 Element Enabled
Gn 50BF-1 Setting 0.2 x In
Gn 50BF-1-1 Delay 120ms
Gn 50BF-1-2 Delay 250ms
INPUT CONFIG>INPUT MATRIX>
50BF-1 Ext Tri p BIn
OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX>
50BF-1-1 BOn, Ln
50BF-1-2 BOn, Ln
OUTPUT CONFIG>BINARY OUTPUT CONFIG>
CB1 Trip Contacts BOn
The above based on:
First Stage Backtrip (or Re-trip) Typical Times
Trip Relay operate time 10ms
CB Tripping time 50ms
DUOBIAS-M Reset Time 30ms
Safety Margin 30ms
Overall First Stage CBF Time Delay 120ms
Second Stage (Back Trip)
First CBF Time Delay 120ms
Trip Relay operate time 10ms
DUOBIAS-M Reset Time 30ms
CB Tripping time 50ms
Margin 50ms
Overall Second Stage CBF Time Delay 260ms
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 47 of 64
5.4 Trip Circuit Supervision (7 4TCS)
Binary Inputs may be used to monitor the integrity of the CB trip circuit wiring. Current flows through the B.I.
confirming the integrity of the auxiliary supply, CB trip coil, auxiliary switch, C.B. secondary isolating contacts and
associated wiring connected to that BI. If the current flow ceases, the B.I. drops off and if it is user programmed to
operate one of the output relays, this can be used to pro vi de a n alarm. In addition, an LED on the relay fascia can
be programmed to operate. A user text label can be used to define the operated LED e.g. “Trip CCT Fail”.
The relevant Binary Input is mapped to 74TCS-n in the INPUT CONFIG>INPUT MATRIX menu. To avoid giving
spurious alarm messages while the circuit breaker is operating the input is given a 0.4s Drop-off Delay in the
INPUT CONFIG>BINARY INPUT CONFIG menu.
To provide an alarm output a normally open binary output is mapped to 74TCS-n.
5.4.1 Trip Circ uit Supervision Connections
The following circuits are derived from UK ENA S15 standard schemes H5, H6 and H7.
For compliance with this standard:
Where more than one device is used to trip the CB then connections should be looped between the
tripping contacts. To ensure that all wiring is monitored the binary input must be at the end of the l ooped
wiring.
Resistors must be continuously rated and where possible should be of wire-wound construction.
Scheme 1 (Basic)
R
BI
+ve -ve
+
BO 1 BO n Remote
Alarm
BO
R
TRIP COIL
52a
52b
-
Circuit
Breaker
H5 Scheme Notes:
BI = 19V (30, 48, 110, 220V supply)
BI = 88V (110, 220V supply)
R = 3K3 typical
TRIP CCT n FAIL
7SR24
Figure 5-4: Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme 1 (H5)
Scheme 1 provides full Trip and Close supervision with the circuit breaker Open or Closed.
Where a ‘Hand Reset’ Trip contact is used measures must be taken to inhibit alarm indications after a CB trip.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 48 of 64
Scheme 2 (Intermediate)
TRIP COIL
52a
52a
52b
-
Circuit
Breaker
BI
+ve -ve
+
BO 1 BO n Remote
Alarm
BO
RTRIP CCT n FAIL
7SR24
H6 Scheme Notes:
BI = 19V (30, 48, 110, 220V supply)
BI = 88V (110, 220V supply)
R = 3K3 typical
Figure 5-5: Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme 2 (H6)
Scheme 2 provides continuous Trip Circuit Supervision of trip coil with the circuit breaker Open or Closed. It does
not provide pre-closing supervision of the connections and links between the tripping contacts and the circuit
breaker and may not therefore be suitable for some circuits which include an isolating link.
Scheme 3 (Comprehen s iv e) 19V Binary Input Only
BI
+ve -ve
BO
BI
+ve -ve
TRIP COIL
52a
52b
-
Circuit
Breaker
TRIP CCT n FAIL
BO 1 BO n Remote
Alarm
7SR24
+
R
RH7 Scheme Notes:
BI = 19V (48, 110, 220V supply)
R = 3K3 typical
Figure 5-6: Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme 3 (H7)
Scheme 3 provides full Trip and Close supervision with the circuit breaker Open or Closed.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 49 of 64
5.4.2 Close Ci r cuit Supervision Connections
R
+
CLOSE
COIL
52a
52b
-
Circuit
Breaker
BI
+ve
-ve
BO 1 BO n Remote
Alarm
BO
RCLOSE CCT n FAIL
7SR24 H5 Scheme Notes:
BI = 19V (30, 48, 110, 220V supply)
BI = 88V (110, 220V supply)
R = 3K3 typical
Figure 5-7 Close Circuit Supervision Scheme
Close circuit supervision with the circuit breaker Open or Closed.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 50 of 64
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 51 of 64
Section 6: Application Considerations and Examples
6.1 The Effects of An In Zone Eart hing Transformer
The in zone earthing transformer is a source of zero-sequence fault current. An earth fault on the delta side of the
transformer external to the differential protection zone will cause zero sequence currents to flow in the CTs on the
delta side of the transformer without corresponding current to flow in the line CTs on the star side of the
transformer. If these zero sequence currents are allowed to flow through the differential elements they may cause
undesired tripping.
Yd11 (30o)
B
B
BB
OOO
OOO
ICT Multiplier
ICT Connection
87HS
87T
Yy0 (0o)
ABC
Yd11 (30o)
Figure 6-1: Relay Currents External Earth Fault with In Zone Earthing Transformer
To prevent undesired tripping the ICT connections should be such as to cause the zero sequence currents to flow
in a closed delta CT secondary connection of low impedance instead of in the differential relay operating coil. As
we have already corrected for the transformer vector group on the star side a Ydy0 ICT is used on the delta side
winding.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 52 of 64
Yd11 (30o)
B
B
B
B
B
B
ICT Multiplier
ICT Connection
87HS
87T
ABC
Ydy0 (0o)
Yd11 (30o)
Figure 6-2: Relay Currents External Earth Fault with In Zone Earthing Transformer
W1/W2
Yd11 (30o)
1718
12
56
910
1413 IG1
21
65
109
W1 IL1
W1 IL2
W1 IL3
ICT1 = Yd11 ICT2 = Ydy0
A
1718 IG2
12
56
910
W2 IL1
W2 IL2
W2 IL3
A
B
NOTES
CTs shown wired to 1A relay inputs
Figure 6-3 7SR24 Applied to Yd Transformer with an In Zone Earthing Transformer
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 53 of 64
6.2 Protection of Star/Star Transformer With Tertiary Winding
Yndyn0 (0
o
)
1718
12
56
910
1413 I
G1
21
65
109
W1 I
L1
W1 I
L2
W1 I
L3
ICT1 = Yd11 ICT2 = Yd11
A
17
18 I
G2
12
56
910
W2 I
L1
W2 I
L2
W2 I
L3
A
B
Figure 6-4: Protection of Star/Star Transformer with Tertiary
The provision of the tertiary winding in star/star transformers both stabilises the neutral potential and can allow
earth fault current to flow in the secondary connections i.e. reduces the zero sequence impedance. An earth fault
on the LV side of the transformer external to the differential protection zone will cause zero sequence currents to
flow in the CTs on the LV side without corresponding current to flow in the line CTs on the HV side. If these zero
sequence currents are allowed to flow through the differential elements they may cause undesired tripping.
The transformer has a phase shift of zero. To prevent undesired tripping for external faults a zero sequence shunt
is required, this is implemented by selecting star/delta interposing CT settings. The Interposing CT Connection
setting on all sets of current inputs must be set to the same Yd setting e.g. all Yd1, -30° or all Yd11, 30° .
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 54 of 64
6.3 Transfo rmer with Prim ary Connections Cr ossed on Both
Windings
Yd11 Transformer Connected as Yd9 (900)
The phase-shift between the W1 and W2 primary systems may necessitate that primary connections to each
winding of the transformer have to be crossed. Fig. 6.4-1 shows a typical arrangement where a Yd11 transformer
is arranged to give a primary system phase-shift of 90° by crossing of its main connections. There are two
optional methods of configuring the 7SR24 relay.
Solution 1
Figure 6-5 shows W1 and W2 CT secondary wiring crossed over to replicating the crossovers on the t ransfo rmer
primary connect ions:
W1/W2
Yd11 (30
o
)
1718
12
56
910
1413 I
G1
21
65
109
W1 I
L1
W1 I
L2
W1 I
L3
ICT1 = Yd11 ICT2 = Ydy0
A
1718 I
G2
12
56
910
W2 I
L1
W2 I
L2
W2 I
L3
A
B
NOTES
CTs shown wired
to 1A relay inputs
a
c
b
C B
A
A
B
C
a
b
c
A-N = b-c
B-N = c-a
C-N = a-b
Figure 6-5 – AC Connections: Yd9, 900 Transformer Non-standard Secondary Connections
Notes:
An advantage of the above is that the 7SR24 relay can be set to correspond to the vector group shown on the
main transformer rating plate i.e. Yd11, +30° simplifying installation. This approach is also applicable where the
transformer is used to reverse the system phase sequence see section 6.5.
A disadvantage is that ‘non-standard’ secondary wiring connections are used.
Relay instruments will indicate ’transformer’ quantities rather than system quantities.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 55 of 64
Solution 2
Fig. 6-6 shows use of the ICT Connection settings to correct for the phase shift introduced by the transformer
connection i.e. ICT1 Connection is set to Yd9, -90° and ICT2 Connection i s se t to Ydy0, 0°.
ICT1 = Yd9
W1/W2
Yd11 (30
o
)
1718
12
56
910
1413 I
G1
21
65
109
W1 I
L1
W1 I
L2
W1 I
L3
ICT2 = Ydy0
A
1718 I
G2
12
56
910
W2 I
L1
W2 I
L2
W2 I
L3
A
B
NOTES
CTs shown wired
to 1A relay inputs
a
b
c
A
B
C
a
c
b
C B
AA-N = b-c
B-N = c-a
C-N = a-b
Fig. 6-6 AC Connections: Yd9, 900 Transformer Standard Secondary Connections
Notes:
An advantage of the approach above is that ‘standard’ secondary wiring connections are used.
The 7SR24 relay setting correspon d to the power system vector relationship i.e. Yd9, 9.
Relay instruments will indicate ’system’ quantities rather than transformer quantities.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 56 of 64
6.4 T ransform er with Primary Connect ions Cr ossed on One
Winding
Reversing the connections on only one side of the transformer will reverse the phase sequence of the system. For
this arrangement W1 and W2 CT secondary wiring must be crossed over to replicate the crossovers on the
transformer primary connections see Fig. 6-7.
Dyn11
1718
12
56
910
1413 I
G1
21
6
5
109
W1 I
L1
W1 I
L2
W1 I
L3
ICT1 = Yy0 ICT2 = Yd1
A
1718 I
G2
12
56
910
W2 I
L1
W2 I
L2
W2 I
L3
A
B
NOTE:
CTs shown wired
to 1A relay inputs
C B
A
a
b
c
A-B = b-n
B-C = a-n
C-A = c-n
Fig. 6-7 Dyn11 Transformer with Reverse Phase Notation
Notes:
The 7SR24 relay is set to correspond to the vector group shown on the main transformer rating plate i.e. Dy11,
+30°.
Relay instruments will indicate ’transformer’ quantities rather than system quantities.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 57 of 64
6.5 Protection of Auto Transformer s
The transformer has a phase shift of zero. To prevent undesired tripping of the overall differential protection for
external faults a zero sequence shunt is required, this is implemented by selecting ICT Connection setting on
both sets of CT inputs to Ydy0. The inrush inhibit (81HBL2) must be Enabled as the magnetising inrush currents
in each phase will not balance.
1718
12
5
6
9
10
1413 I
G1
2
1
65
109
W1 I
L1
W1 I
L2
W1 I
L3
ICT1 = Ydy0ICT2 = Ydy0
A
17
18 I
G2
1
2
5
6
910
W2 I
L1
W2 I
L2
W2 I
L3
A
B
Fig. 6-8: AC Connections for Auto-Transformer Overall Protection
1718
1
2
56
910
14
13 IG1
21
65
109
W1 IL1
W1 IL2
W1 IL3
ICT1 = Ydy0 ICT2 = Ydy0
A
1718 IG2
12
56
910
W2 IL1
W2 IL2
W2 IL3
A
B
Fig. 6-9: AC Connections for Auto-Transformer Overall and REF Protection
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 58 of 64
6.6 Reactor, Motor and Connections Protection
1718
12
56
910
1413 I
G1
21
65
109
W1 I
L1
W1 I
L2
W1 I
L3
ICT1 = Yy0 ICT2 = Yy0
A
1718 I
G2
12
56
910
W2 I
L1
W2 I
L2
W2 I
L3
A
B
Fig. 6-10 AC Connections for Reactor and Conne ctions Pr otection
Settings must take into con si d eratio n:
Connections: High internal and through fault currents.
Series reactor: Through fault current limited by reactor.
Shunt reactor: Single end fed faults only.
Motor: Single end fed faults only.
Generator: Single end fed faults only.
Primary current values are not subject to variation due to tap changing (as in transformer / OLTC applications),
the 87BD and 87BD 1st Bias Slope can both be set t o 0.1.
The inrush inhibit feature (81HBL2) must be enabled as the magnetising inrush currents in each phase will not
balance.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 59 of 64
Section 7: Commo n Functi ons
7.1 Multiple Settings Groups
Alternate settings groups can be used to reconfigure the relay during significant changes to system conditions
e.g.
Primary plant switching in/out.
Summer/w inter or day/nig ht se t ting s.
Switchable earthing connections.
Allowable short term overloads.
Loss of Grid connection (see below)
Figure 7-1 Example Use of Alternative Settings Groups
RADIAL SUBSTATION
Start
generators
Select alternate
settings group
Local
Generation
Industrial system draws power from grid
system during normal operation
Relays normally use settings group 1
On loss of mains:
Local generation switched in.
Non essential loads tripped
Relays on essential circuits switched to
settings group 2 to reflect new load and
fault currents
Non-essential
loads
Trip non-essential loads
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 60 of 64
7.2 Binary Inputs
Each Binary Input (BI) can be programmed to operate one or more of the relay functions, LEDs or output relays.
These could be used to bring such digital signals as Inhibits for protection elements, the trip circuit supervision
status, autoreclose control signals etc. into the Relay.
Alarm and Tripping Inputs
A common use of binary inputs is to provide indication of alarm or fault conditions e.g. transformer Buchholz Gas
or Buchholz Surge conditions. The Binary Inputs can be mapped to LED(s), waveform storage trigger and binary
outputs.
The inputs can also be mapped as ‘General Alarms’ this allows user defined text to be displayed on the LCD
when the BI is energised. Inputs used in this way are programmed using:
INPUT CONFIG>INPUT MATRIX>General Alarm nAssigned to BI.
INPUT CONFIG>GENERAL ALARMS>General Alarm n16 character string.
Where transformer outputs require high speed tripping, such as a Buchholz Surge, these should be wired to a
binary input to provide LED indication and also have a parallel connection wired to directly trip the circuit via a
blocking diode, see Figure 7-2:
RELAY
BI n
+ve
-ve
BI n
+ve
-ve
BO n
BO n
BO n
BO n
BO n
BO n
BO n
BO n
Buchholz Gas
Buchholz Surge
Wdg. Temp Alarm
Wdg. Temp Trip
Oil Temp Alarm
Oil Temp Trip
BI n
+ve
-ve
BI n
+ve
-ve
BI n
+ve
-ve
BI n
+ve
-ve
+-
TRIP CIRCUIT
POWER
TRANSFORMER Blocking
Diodes
Figure 7-2 Example of Transformer Alarm and Trip Wiring
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 61 of 64
The Effects of Capacitance C urr ent
The binary inputs have a low minimum operate current and may be set for instantaneous operation. Consideration
should be given to the likelihood of mal-operation due to capacitance current. Capacitance current can flow
through the BI, for example if an earth fault occurs on the dc circuits associated with the relay. The binary inputs
will be less likely to mal-operate if they:
1 Have both the positive and negative switched (double-pole switched).
2 Do not have extensive external wiring associated with them e.g. if the wiring is confined to the
relay room.
Where a binary input is both used to influence a control function (e.g. provide a tripping function) and it is
considered to be susceptible to mal-operation the external circuitry can be modified to provide immunity to such
disturban ce s, see Figure 7-3.
AC Rejection
The default pick-up time delay of 20ms provides immunity to ac current e.g. induced from cross site wiring.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 62 of 64
BI (19V)
ESI-130V DC Nominal
(24 37.5V Operative)
I
OP
> 10mA
470
1K5
48V DC Nominal
(37.5 60V Operative)
I
OP
> 10mA
1K6
1K5
110V DC Nominal
(87.5 – 137.5V Operative)
I
OP
> 25mA
2K0
560
ESI-230V DC Nominal
(24 – 37.5V Operative)
I
OP
> 20mA
220
820
48V DC Nominal
(37.5 – 60V Operative)
I
OP
> 20mA
820
820
110V DC Nominal
(87.5 137.5V Operative)
I
OP
> 50mA
1K2
330
BI DTL = 10ms
(10µF, 60V Capacitance discharge)
BI DTL = 10ms
(10µF, 150V Capacitance discharge)
BI (19V)
BI (19V)
BI (19V)
BI (19V)
BI (19V)
+
-
+
+
+
+
+
-
-
-
-
-
Resistor power ratings: 30V DC Nominal >3W
48V DC Nominal >3W
110V DC Nominal >10W (ESI- 1)
110V DC Nominal >20W (ESI-2)
Resistors must be wired with crimped connections as they may run hot
110V DC Nominal
(87.5 137.5V Operative)
I
OP
> 25mA
2K7
110V DC Nominal
(87.5 – 137.5V Operative)
I
OP
> 50mA
1K3
BI DTL = 10ms
(10µF, 150V Capacitance discharge)
BI (88V) BI (88V)
++
--
Figure 7-3 – Binary Input Configurations Providing Compliance with EATS 48-4 Classes ESI 1 and ESI 2
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 63 of 64
7.3 Binary Outputs
Binary Outputs are mapped to output functions by means of settings. These could be used to bring out such
digital signals as trips, a general pick-up, plant control signals etc.
All Binary Outputs are trip rated
Each can be defined as Self or Hand Reset. Self-reset contacts are applicable to most protection applications.
Hand-reset contacts are used where the output must remain active until the user expressly clears it e.g. in a
control scheme where the output must remain active until some external feature has correctly processed it.
Case contacts C25 and C26 will automatically short-circuit when the relay is withdrawn from the case. This can be
used to provide an alarm that the Relay is out of service.
Notes on Self Reset Outputs
With a failed breaker condition the relay may remain operated until current flow in the primary system is
interrupted by an upstream device. The relay will then reset and attempt to interrupt trip coil current flowing
through an output contact. Where this level is above the break rating of the output contact an auxiliary relay with
heavy-duty contact s shou ld be utilise d.
7.4 LEDS
Output-function LEDs are mapped to output functions by means of settings. These could be used to display such
digital signals as trips, a general pick-up, plant control signals etc.
User Defined Function LEDs are used to indicate the status of Function Key operation. These do not relate
directly to the operation of the Function Key but rather to its consequences. So that if a Function Key is depressed
to close a Circuit-Breaker, the associated LED would show the status of the Circuit-Breaker closed Binary Input.
Each LED can be defined as Self or Hand Reset. Hand reset LEDs are used where the user is required to
expressly acknowledge the change in status e.g. critical operations such as trips or system failures. Self-reset
LEDs are used to display features which routinely change state, such as Circuit-Brea ker op en or close.
The status of hand reset LEDs is retained in capacitor-backed memory in the event of supply loss.
©2017 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 64 of 64
Siemens Protection Devices Limited 2
www. siemens.com/energy
Published by and copyright © 2014:
Siemens AG
Infrastructure & Cities Sector
Freyeslebenstrasse 1
91058 Erlangen, Germany
Siemens Protection Devices Limited
P.O. Box 8
North Farm Road
Hebburn
Tyne & Wear
NE31 1TZ
United Kingdom
Phone: +44 (0)191 401 7901
Fax: +44 (0)191 401 5575
www.siemens.com/energy
For more information, please contact our
Customer Support Center.
Phone: +49 180/524 8437
Fax: +49 180/524 24 71
E-mail: support.energy@siemens.com
August 17
All rights reserved.
Trademarks mentioned in this document are the property of Siemens AG, its affili-
ates, or their respective owners.
Subject to change without prior notice.
The information in this document contains general
descriptions of the technical options available, which
may not apply in all cases. The required technical
options should therefore be specified in the contract.